E-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide

e-Fim OTNM2000
Element Management System
Operation Guide
Version: A
Code: MN000002229
FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

April 2015
Thank you for choosing our products.
We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.
Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China
Zip code: 430073
Tel:
+6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)

+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax:
+86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice
are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface
Related Documentation
Version
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
u
Commissioning engineers
Equipment maintenance staff
To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:
II
SDH theory
WDM theory
PTN theory
OTN theory
Data communication technology
Ethernet technology
Conventions
Terminology Conventions
Terminology
Convention
FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management
OTNM2000
System
FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2100 Network Management
OTNM2100
System
Symbol Conventions
Symbol
Convention
Note
Description
Important features or operation
guide.
Possible injury to persons or
Caution
systems, or cause traffic interruption

or loss.
Warning
May cause severe bodily injuries.
Jump
Jumps to another step.
Cascading menu
Connects multi-level menu options.
Bidirectional service
The service signal is bidirectional.
Unidirectional service
The service signal is unidirectional.
III
Operation Safety Rules
The network management computer should be placed away from

direct sunlight, electromagnetic interference, heat source,
humidity and dust, and with at least 8 cm distance from other
objects in order to keep good ventilation.
Use UPS power supply to avoid loss of network management
data caused by accidental power failure.
The computer case, UPS power supply and switch (or hub)
should be connected to protection earth ground.
To shut down the network management computer, first exit the
operation system normally and then shut off the power supply.
Do not exit the network management system when it is working
normally. Exiting the network management system does not
interrupt traffic in the network, but precludes centralized control of
the networked equipment.
The network management computer cannot be used for purposes
other than network management. The network management
computer cannot be used for purposes other than network
management.
Do not delete any file in the network management system
randomly or copy any irrelevant file into the network management
computer.
Do not visit Internet via the network management computer.
Doing so may increase data flow in the net card and hence affects
normal network management data transmission or results in other
accidents.
Do not perform service configuration or expansion during service

busy hours via the network management system.
Do not modify the network management computers protocol
settings, computer name or LAN settings. Doing so may result in
abnormal operation of network management system.
VI
VII
VIII
Contents
Preface...................................................................................................................I
Related Documentation ...................................................................................I
Version ...........................................................................................................II
Intended Readers ...........................................................................................II
Conventions ..................................................................................................III
Operation Safety Rules ......................................................................................... V
1
Preparatory Knowledge ...............................................................................1-1

1.1
1.2
Management System .....................................................................1-2

1.1.1
Management Model .........................................................1-2
1.1.2
Management Structure ....................................................1-3
Numbering Hierarchy .....................................................................1-5

1.2.1
Physical Part ...................................................................1-6
1.2.2
Logical Part .....................................................................1-6
OTNM2000 Basic Operations ......................................................................2-1

2.1
2.2
2.3
Login / Logout................................................................................2-2
2.1.1
Logging into the OTNM2000 ............................................2-2
2.1.2
Logging Out of the OTNM2000.........................................2-4
GUI Introduction ............................................................................2-4

2.2.1
System GUI .....................................................................2-4
2.2.2
Main Menu.......................................................................2-5
2.2.3
Shortcut Icons................................................................2-19
2.2.4
Commonly Used Shortcuts.............................................2-22
2.2.5
Object Tree....................................................................2-23
2.2.6
Display Pane .................................................................2-26
2.2.7
Task Panel.....................................................................2-26
2.2.8
Status Bar .....................................................................2-27
Common Operations....................................................................2-28
2.3.1
Customizing the Table....................................................2-28
2.3.2
2.4
Viewing the Command Manager ..................................................2-31
2.5
Locking / Unlocking the Client End ...............................................2-32

2.5.1
Locking the Client End ...................................................2-32
2.5.2
Unlocking the Client End................................................2-33
2.6
Monitoring the Network Status .....................................................2-34
2.7
Viewing the Version Information ...................................................2-35
2.8
Current User Logout ....................................................................2-35
Security Management ..................................................................................3-1

3.1
Basic Concepts..............................................................................3-2
3.2
Security Policy Management..........................................................3-5

3.2.1
Automatically Locking the Client End................................3-5
3.2.2
Setting the Automatic Exit ................................................3-6
3.2.3
Setting the User Login Detection ......................................3-8
3.2.4
Setting the Password Complexity Check ..........................3-9
3.2.5
Setting the Lockout Upon Incorrect Password Inputs ........3-9
3.3
Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division ................................3-10
3.4
Authorization Planning .................................................................3-11
3.5
Managing System Users ..............................................................3-13
3.6
Quick Copy of Table Contents ........................................2-30
3.5.1
Managing Object Groups ...............................................3-13
3.5.2
Managing Operation Groups ..........................................3-16
3.5.3
Managing User Groups ..................................................3-19
3.5.4
Managing Users ............................................................3-22
3.5.5
Authorization and Domain Division Example ..................3-33
Managing User Sessions .............................................................3-36

3.6.1
Monitoring User Sessions ..............................................3-36
3.6.2
Logging Out a User........................................................3-37
3.6.3
Sending Messages to Other Online Users ......................3-39
3.6.4
Monitoring the User Activities .........................................3-41
3.7
Managing the EMS_f Authority.....................................................3-41
3.8
Network Management Tool...........................................................3-43
Integrated Configuration Management .........................................................4-1

4.1
Modifying Project Attributes............................................................4-3
4.2
4.2.1
Adding a Manager Service ...............................................4-4
4.2.2
Modifying a Manager Service ...........................................4-5
4.2.3
Deleting Manager Services ..............................................4-8
4.3
Configuring the GNE......................................................................4-9
4.4
Managing Network Blocks............................................................4-11
4.5
4.6
4.7
Managing Manager Services..........................................................4-3
4.4.1
Adding a Network Block .................................................4-11
4.4.2
Modifying Network Block Attributes ................................4-13
4.4.3
Deleting a Network Block ...............................................4-14
Managing NEs .............................................................................4-15

4.5.1
Adding an NE ................................................................4-15
4.5.2
Modifying the NE Attributes ............................................4-16
4.5.3
Copying / Pasting an NE ................................................4-17
4.5.4
Moving an NE ................................................................4-18
4.5.5
Deleting an NE ..............................................................4-19
Managing Cards ..........................................................................4-20

4.6.1
Adding a Card................................................................4-20
4.6.2
Adding a Card Automatically ..........................................4-21
4.6.3
Replacing a Card ...........................................................4-23
4.6.4
Editing a Card................................................................4-24
4.6.5
Deleting a Card..............................................................4-25
Configuring NE IP Remotely based on SN....................................4-26

4.7.1
Configuring the Local NE IP Address..............................4-28
4.7.2
Configuring the IP Address of the Neighboring NE ..........4-31
Topology Management.................................................................................5-1
5.1
Topology Construction Flow ...........................................................5-2
5.2
Creating the Topology ....................................................................5-4
5.3
5.2.1
Adding a Topological Node...............................................5-4
5.2.2
Adding a Fiber Connection...............................................5-4
Adjusting the Topology Display.......................................................5-6

5.3.1
Setting the Topology Display ............................................5-6
5.3.2
Setting the NE Icon ..........................................................5-7
5.3.3
Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute ..............................5-8
5.3.4
Expanding / Collapsing Topological Links .........................5-9
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.3.5
Setting the Size of Display Area .....................................5-10
5.3.6
Setting the Background Image .......................................5-11
5.3.7
Setting the Color of the NE.............................................5-12
5.3.8
Setting the Color of the Line ...........................................5-13
Layer-based Topology..................................................................5-14
5.4.1
Setting Topology Layers.................................................5-15
5.4.2
Modifying Topology Layers.............................................5-17
5.4.3
Viewing the Layer-based Topology.................................5-19
Deleting a Topological Object .......................................................5-22

5.5.1
Deleting a Fiber Connection ...........................................5-22
5.5.2
Deleting a Node .............................................................5-23
Viewing the Topology ...................................................................5-24

5.6.1
Viewing the Main Topology.............................................5-24
5.6.2
Viewing the Airscape .....................................................5-25
5.6.3
Viewing the Subnet ........................................................5-26
5.6.4
Searching Objects .........................................................5-27
Managing the DCN Network.........................................................5-29

5.7.1
DCN Topology Management ..........................................5-30
5.7.2
DCN Configuration Management....................................5-33
5.7.3
DCN Status Monitoring ..................................................5-35
5.7.4
DCN Alarm Management ...............................................5-38
5.7.5
Automatic Discovery of Topological Links .......................5-40
Configuration Management ..........................................................................6-1

6.1
Time Calibration.............................................................................6-2
6.2
Management Configuration ............................................................6-2
6.3
6.4
6.2.1
Downloading the Management Configuration ...................6-3
6.2.2
Analyzing the Network Block Management Configuration .6-4
Structure Configuration ..................................................................6-5

6.3.1
Downloading the Structure Configuration .........................6-5
6.3.2
Analyzing the Network Block Structure Configuration .......6-6
Device Configuration......................................................................6-8
6.4.1
Downloading the Equipment Configuration .......................6-8
6.4.2
Reading the Device Configuration ....................................6-9
6.5
Refreshing Configuration Time .....................................................6-10
6.6
Configuration Check ....................................................................6-11
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.6.1
Configuration Check ......................................................6-11
6.6.2
Comparing the NE Configuration....................................6-13
Managing Card ............................................................................6-14

6.7.1
Configuring Card Parameters.........................................6-14
6.7.2
Copying Card Configuration ...........................................6-16
6.7.3
Delivering Card Control Commands ...............................6-17
6.7.4
Checking the Card Status ..............................................6-18
6.7.5
Synchronizing the Card Configuration ............................6-20
Managing NE Software ................................................................6-22

6.8.1
Downloading the Software .............................................6-22
6.8.2
Setting Delayed Enabling of the Card Software ..............6-24
6.8.3
Setting the FTP..............................................................6-26
6.8.4
Managing Card Software ...............................................6-27
6.8.5
NE Software Download ..................................................6-30
NE Communication......................................................................6-34
6.9.1
Pinging the NE...............................................................6-34
6.9.2
SSH ..............................................................................6-35
6.9.3
Telneting the NE ............................................................6-37
6.10
Optical Cable Router Settings ......................................................6-37
6.11
Setting the NE to the Not Started Status .......................................6-41
6.12
Backing Up DCG Files .................................................................6-42
Service Configuration and Management.......................................................7-1

7.1
PTN/IPRAN ...................................................................................7-4
7.1.1
Tunnel .............................................................................7-4
7.1.2
PW ................................................................................7-15
7.1.3
L2VPN Service ..............................................................7-20
7.1.4
L3VPN Service ..............................................................7-34
7.1.5
ATM Service ..................................................................7-37
7.1.6
Group Service................................................................7-40
7.1.7
Protection Ring ..............................................................7-41
7.1.8
VRRP Configuration ......................................................7-46
7.1.9
Creating Tunnels Quickly ...............................................7-48
7.1.10 Quickly Create Ethernet Service.....................................7-49

7.2
POTN/PE-OTN ............................................................................7-51
7.2.1
Optical Channel .............................................................7-52
7.2.2
ODUk Channel ..............................................................7-59
7.2.3
Client Service Channel ..................................................7-61
7.2.4
ODUk Protection Group .................................................7-63
7.2.5
OCh Ring Protection ......................................................7-64
7.2.6
ODUk Ring Protection....................................................7-65
7.2.7
Tunnel ...........................................................................7-66
7.2.8
PW ................................................................................7-66
7.2.9
L2VPN Service ..............................................................7-66
7.2.10 L3VPN Service ..............................................................7-67

7.2.11 Group Service................................................................7-67
7.2.12 Ring Protection ..............................................................7-67
7.2.13 IPRAN VRRP Config......................................................7-68
7.3
SDH/MSTP..................................................................................7-68
7.3.1
Circuit............................................................................7-68
7.3.2
VCG Channel ................................................................7-77
7.3.3
Protection Ring ..............................................................7-78
7.4
Service Template .........................................................................7-81
7.5
Routing Template.........................................................................7-85
7.6
Service Global Settings................................................................7-86

7.6.1
PTN NE Global Settings.................................................7-86
7.6.2
Enabling the Global Section Layer OAM.........................7-88
7.6.3
Enabling the Global Section Layer LM Frame .................7-89
7.6.4
Merging OTN NEs .........................................................7-90
7.6.5
Setting the OTN Channel Wavelength ............................7-99
7.6.6
Setting the OTN NE Optical Link ..................................7-102
7.6.7
Setting the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead ......................7-103
7.6.8
Setting the OTN WSS Group........................................7-105
7.6.9
Setting the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitor...................7-107
7.6.10 Setting the OTN SAPU Protection ................................7-109

7.7
ASON Resource Management ................................................... 7-111

7.7.1
SPC Resource Management (SDH/PTN) ..................... 7-111
7.7.2
SPC Resource Management (OTN / POTS) ................. 7-111
7.7.3
Synchronizing SPC Port Resources ............................. 7-112
7.7.4
Synchronizing SPC Data.............................................. 7-112
7.7.5
Synchronizing SPC Channels ...................................... 7-112
7.8
Displaying Routes...................................................................... 7-113
7.9
Options...................................................................................... 7-115
7.10
Querying Services ..................................................................... 7-116
7.11
Managing Broken Services ........................................................ 7-119
7.12
Saving Configuration Data to the Database ................................7-122
7.13
Reading Configuration Data from the Database..........................7-123
7.14
Full Download............................................................................7-124
7.14.1 Saving Cross-connect Data (NE)..................................7-124
7.14.2 Delivering the Cross-connect Data (NE) .......................7-126
7.14.3 Saving SDH NE Cross-connect Data............................7-128
Alarm Management .....................................................................................8-1

8.1
Basic Concept ...............................................................................8-2
8.2
Setting Alarm-related Parameters ..................................................8-7
8.3
Viewing Alarms............................................................................8-10
8.4
8.5
8.3.1
Viewing Current Alarms .................................................8-10
8.3.2
Viewing Alarm History ....................................................8-12
8.3.3
Viewing Reported Events...............................................8-15
8.3.4
Viewing Environmental Monitoring Alarms......................8-16
Setting the Alarm Template ..........................................................8-18

8.4.1
Setting the Alarm Query Template ..................................8-18
8.4.2
Managing Alarm Statistical Templates ............................8-20
8.4.3
Managing Alarm Level Templates...................................8-23
Handling Alarms ..........................................................................8-26

8.5.1
Alarm Processing Flow ..................................................8-26
8.5.2
Synchronizing Alarms ....................................................8-28
8.5.3
Isolating Alarm...............................................................8-29
8.5.4
Confirming Alarms .........................................................8-29
8.5.5
Querying Correlated Alarms ...........................................8-31
8.5.6
Viewing Alarm-related Services......................................8-33
8.5.7
Alarm Statistics..............................................................8-33
8.5.8
Refreshing Alarms .........................................................8-39
8.5.9
Printing Alarm Data........................................................8-40
8.5.10 Manage alarm help ........................................................8-40

8.6
Saving Alarm History Data ...........................................................8-43
8.7
Managing the Alarm Filter ............................................................8-45

8.7.1
Setting the Current Alarm Filter ......................................8-45
8.7.2
Setting the Card Alarm Filter ..........................................8-47
8.7.3
Setting the NE Alarm Filter .............................................8-49
8.7.4
Managing Alarm Filter Rules ..........................................8-52
8.7.5
Setting the History Alarm Filter .......................................8-55
8.7.6
Viewing History Alarm Filter ...........................................8-56
8.8
Setting Alarm Suppression...........................................................8-57
8.9
Customizing Alarm Levels............................................................8-59
8.10
Managing Alarm Report ...............................................................8-60

8.10.1 Setting the Alarm Reporting ...........................................8-61
8.10.2 Viewing Alarm Report ....................................................8-62
8.10.3 Setting the Alarm Remote Notification ............................8-64
8.11
Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder............................................8-69

8.11.1 Setting the Alarm Sound Reminder ................................8-70
8.11.2 Setting the Alarm Indicator Color ....................................8-71
8.11.3 Setting the Alarm Flickering............................................8-71
Performance Management...........................................................................9-1
9.1
Basic Concept ...............................................................................9-2
9.2
Setting Performance-related Parameters........................................9-2
9.3
Setting the Performance Parameter Collection ...............................9-4
9.4
Viewing Performance.....................................................................9-5
9.4.1
Viewing Current Performance ..........................................9-5
9.4.2
Viewing Performance History ...........................................9-7
9.5
Setting Performance Query Profile ...............................................9-10
9.6
Managing Performance................................................................9-12
9.6.1
Locating the Performance ..............................................9-12
9.6.2
Viewing the Accumulative Performance..........................9-13
9.6.3
Refreshing the Performance ..........................................9-13
9.6.4
Filtering the Zero-value Performance..............................9-14
9.6.5
Printing Performance Data .............................................9-14
9.6.6
Detecting the Real-time Performance .............................9-15
9.6.7
Viewing Performance Reports........................................9-16
9.6.8
Gathering Statistics of and Analyzing Performance

History...........................................................................9-17
9.6.9
Clearing Performance Data............................................9-18
9.6.10 Managing the Performance Help ....................................9-20

9.7
9.8
Managing Performance History Data............................................9-22

9.7.1
Saving Performance Data ..............................................9-22
9.7.2
Saving the Performance History Data Manually ..............9-24
9.7.3
Managing Performance Reports.....................................9-27
Managing Performance Filter .......................................................9-27

9.8.1
Setting the Card Performance Filter................................9-28
9.8.2
Setting NE Filter Performance ........................................9-29
9.8.3
Setting the Performance History Filter ............................9-32
9.8.4
Viewing History Performance Filter.................................9-34
9.9
Gathering Statistics of Optical Power Information .........................9-35
9.10
Traffic Management .....................................................................9-37

9.10.1 Querying the Traffic Values ............................................9-37
9.10.2 Monitoring the NE Traffic................................................9-39
9.10.3 Monitoring the Second-level Traffic.................................9-43
9.10.4 Monitoring the Port Real-time Traffic...............................9-45
9.10.5 Monitoring the Long-term Traffic.....................................9-47
9.10.6 Setting the Traffic Threshold...........................................9-48
10 Log Management.......................................................................................10-1
10.1
Log Management Policy...............................................................10-2
10.2
Viewing Command Logs ..............................................................10-3
10.3
Viewing User Logs.......................................................................10-5
10.4
Viewing Business Logs ................................................................10-7
10.5
Viewing EMU Logs ......................................................................10-8
10.6
Viewing Reported Events.............................................................10-9
10.7
Uploading NE Device Logs ........................................................10-10
10.8
Managing the Command Log Filter.............................................10-10
10.8.1 Setting the Command Log Filter ...................................10-10

10.8.2 Viewing the Command Log Filter..................................10-12
10.9
Saving Command Logs..............................................................10-13
11 Statistical Management..............................................................................11-1
11.1
Service Data Query Report ..........................................................11-3

11.1.1 Gathering Statistics of Link Resource Usage ..................11-3
11.1.2 Gathering Statistics of Circuits on the Link......................11-5
11.1.3 Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Usage of the
NE.................................................................................11-7
11.1.4 Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Circuit of the
NE.................................................................................11-8
11.1.5 Gathering Statistics of Circuits Between NEs................ 11-10
11.1.6 Gathering Statistics of NE Cross-connect Capacity....... 11-11
11.1.7 Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Usage .................... 11-12
11.1.8 Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Protection LSP ....... 11-14
11.1.9 Gathering Statistics of the NE VPWS ........................... 11-15
11.1.10Gathering Statistics of the NE VPLS............................. 11-16
11.1.11Gathering Statistics of the Port Service Traffic .............. 11-18
11.1.12Gathering Statistics of the PTN Services /Labels .......... 11-20
11.1.13Querying Services at L2 / L3 Bridge Point..................... 11-22
11.1.14Querying PTN NE LSR ID Addresses........................... 11-22
11.1.15Querying the Used Labels............................................ 11-25
11.1.16Querying L2VPN Reports............................................. 11-27
11.1.17Gathering Statistics of the OAM&BFD Enabling
Reports ....................................................................... 11-29
11.1.18Gathering Statistics of the OTN Station Capacity .......... 11-30
11.1.19Gathering Statistics of OTN Wavelength Resources ..... 11-32
11.1.20Querying the Protection Information ............................. 11-33
11.2
Stock Statistics .......................................................................... 11-34

11.2.1 Gathering Statistics of NEs .......................................... 11-34
11.2.2 Gathering Statistics of Cards........................................ 11-35
11.2.3 Gathering Statistics of Slots ......................................... 11-36
11.2.4 Gathering Statistics of Serial Numbers ......................... 11-37
11.2.5 Gathering Statistics of NE Fiber Connections ............... 11-38
11.3
Alarm Statistics.......................................................................... 11-40

11.3.1 Alarm Filter Statistics ................................................... 11-40
11.3.2 Gathering Statistics of Alarm History ............................ 11-43

11.4
PM Statistics.............................................................................. 11-45
11.4.1 Managing Bandwidth Usage Statistics.......................... 11-45
11.4.2 Managing 15-minute Traffic Statistics ........................... 11-49
11.4.3 Managing 24-hour Traffic Statistics............................... 11-53
11.4.4 Managing Device Environment Parameter Statistics..... 11-57
11.4.5 Managing Optical Power Performance Statistics........... 11-61
11.4.6 Gathering Statistics of NE CPU and Memory Usage ..... 11-64
11.5
Managing VOA Status Statistics................................................. 11-67
11.6
IP Statistics................................................................................ 11-70
11.6.1 Statistics of Management Interface IP Addresses ......... 11-71
11.6.2 Statistics of Logical Interface IP Addresses................... 11-72
11.7
Viewing the Opposite End Port Information................................. 11-73
11.8
Viewing Software Version .......................................................... 11-73
11.9
Viewing IP Configuration............................................................ 11-74
12 Data Management .....................................................................................12-1

12.1
Backing Up / Restoring the OTNM2000 Data................................12-2

12.1.1 Backing Up the OTNM2000 Configuration Data
Manually........................................................................12-3
12.1.2 Backing Up Configuration Data via the Network Management
Tool ...............................................................................12-4
12.1.3 Backing Up the Configuration to the File .........................12-7
12.1.4 Restoring the Configuration from the File........................12-7
12.1.5 Exporting the Dynamic Data...........................................12-8
12.1.6 Importing the Dynamic Data .........................................12-10
12.2
Managing Data Sources.............................................................12-13

12.2.1 Importing Configuration from the File ............................12-13
12.2.2 Clearing the Configuration Data ...................................12-14
12.3
Backing Up / Restoring Service Data..........................................12-15

12.3.1 Synchronizing All Configuration Data ...........................12-16
12.3.2 Switching to the Offline Mode .......................................12-17
12.3.3 Backing Up the Configuration to the File .......................12-18
12.3.4 Restoring the Configuration from the File......................12-18
12.3.5 Downloading Data to the Client End .............................12-19
12.3.6 Uploading Data to the Server .......................................12-19

Appendix A
OTNM2000 Service List .......................................................... A-1
Appendix B
Setting the Web Browser ......................................................... B-1
Appendix C
Abbreviations.......................................................................... C-1
Figures
Figure 1-1
Interrelationship between the Manager, the Agent and the Managed

Object............................................................................................1-3
Figure 1-2
The OTNM2000 Management Structure.........................................1-4
Figure 1-3
Numbering Hierarchy .....................................................................1-5
Figure 2-1
The OTNM2000 Main GUI .............................................................2-5
Figure 2-2
Display Pane ...............................................................................2-26
Figure 2-3
The Task Panel Pane ..................................................................2-27
Figure 2-4
The Command manager Window ...............................................2-32
Figure 2-5
The Client Locking Alert Box ........................................................2-33
Figure 3-1
Setting Automatic Lockout of the Client End ...................................3-6
Figure 3-2
Setting Automatically Exiting the Client End....................................3-7
Figure 5-1
Network Topology Construction Flow..............................................5-2
Figure 5-2
Setting the NE Icon ........................................................................5-8
Figure 5-3
Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute ............................................5-9
Figure 5-4
Setting the Topology Area Size ....................................................5-11
Figure 5-5
Setting the Background Color.......................................................5-12
Figure 5-6
Setting the Color of the NE...........................................................5-13
Figure 5-7
Setting the Color of the Line .........................................................5-14
Figure 5-8
Viewing the Subnet ......................................................................5-26
Figure 5-9
Collapsing Subnet........................................................................5-27
Figure 5-10 Querying the NE Port ...................................................................5-38

Figure 6-1
The Time Calibration Alert Box .....................................................6-2
Figure 6-2
The Management Configuration Alert Box ...................................6-3
Figure 6-3
The management config data Window .........................................6-5
Figure 6-4
The Structure Configuration Alert Box .........................................6-6
Figure 6-5
The structure config data Window ...............................................6-7
Figure 6-6
The Device Configuration Alert Box .............................................6-9
Figure 6-7
The Refresh Config Time Alert Box ............................................6-11
Figure 6-8
The NE Config Compare Window ...............................................6-13
Figure 6-9
The Card Configuration Page.......................................................6-14
Figure 6-10 The Card Control Command Page ...............................................6-18

Figure 6-11
The Card Status Page..................................................................6-19
Figure 6-12 Adding a Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration ..................6-21

Figure 6-13 The Board software manager Window .......................................6-27
Figure 6-14 Imported into the Software Library ................................................6-28
Figure 6-15 Checking Card Software Information ............................................6-29
Figure 6-16 The Result of Pinging NE .............................................................6-35
Figure 6-17 The Optical Cable Router Setting Dialog Box.............................6-38
Figure 6-18 The NE Not Provisioned Tab ......................................................6-41
Figure 6-19 The Backup DCG File Dialog Box ...............................................6-42
Figure 7-1
PTN / IPRAN Configuration Item ....................................................7-4
Figure 7-2
POTN/PE-OTN Configuration Item...............................................7-52
Figure 7-3
OCh Channel Configuration GUI ..................................................7-53
Figure 7-4
Selecting SPC .............................................................................7-56
Figure 7-5
The ASON Advanced Settings Window ........................................7-57
Figure 7-6
ODUk Channel Configuration GUI................................................7-59
Figure 7-7
Client Service Channel Configuration GUI ....................................7-61
Figure 7-8
ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI .....................................7-63
Figure 7-9
OCh Ring Protection Configuration GUI .......................................7-64
Figure 7-10 ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI .....................................7-65

Figure 7-11
Selecting the OTN NE to Merge ...................................................7-91
Figure 7-12 The NE Merge Configuration GUI.................................................7-92

Figure 7-13 Merging NEs - Selecting the NE ...................................................7-93
Figure 7-14 Merging NEs - Confirming the Configuration .................................7-93
Figure 7-15 Merging NEs - Completing the Configuration ................................7-94
Figure 7-16 Inserting the NE - Selecting the NE ..............................................7-95
Figure 7-17 Inserting the NE - Confirming the Configuration ............................7-95
Figure 7-18 Inserting the NE - Completing the Configuration ...........................7-96
Figure 7-19 Splitting the NE - Selecting the Configuration................................7-97
Figure 7-20 Splitting the NE - Confirming the Configuration .............................7-97
Figure 7-21 Splitting the NE - Completing the Configuration ............................7-98

Figure 7-22 The NE Search GUI .....................................................................7-99
Figure 7-23 Accessing the OTN Channel Wavelength Window......................7-100
Figure 7-24 The OTN Channel Wavelength Window .....................................7-100
Figure 7-25 Accessing the OTN NE Optical Link Window ..............................7-102
Figure 7-26 The OTN NE Optical Link Window..............................................7-102
Figure 7-27 Accessing the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window ..................7-104
Figure 7-28 The OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window..................................7-104
Figure 7-29 Accessing the OTN WSS Group Window ...................................7-106
Figure 7-30 The OTN WSS Group Window ...................................................7-106
Figure 7-31 Accessing the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window..........7-108
Figure 7-32 The OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window .........................7-108
Figure 7-33 Accessing the OTN SAPU Protection Window............................7-109
Figure 7-34 The OTN SAPU Protection Window ........................................... 7-110
Figure 8-1
Checking the Current Alarm Information .......................................8-11
Figure 8-2
Option List of the Alarm Title Bar ..................................................8-12
Figure 8-3
Viewing the Alarm History ............................................................8-14
Figure 8-4
Option List of the Title Bar ............................................................8-15
Figure 8-5
The Set Current Alarm Query Condition Dialog Box..................8-19
Figure 8-6
Defining the Alarm Profile Name ..................................................8-20
Figure 8-7
The Alarm Statistical Template Tab ...........................................8-21
Figure 8-8
The Alarm Level Template Tab ...................................................8-24
Figure 8-9
Alarm Handling Process...............................................................8-27
Figure 8-10 Querying Correlated Alarms .........................................................8-32

Figure 8-11
The Current Alarm Panel..............................................................8-34
Figure 8-12 The History Alarm Statistics Tab ...............................................8-38

Figure 8-13 File Result List of Alarm History Statistics .....................................8-38
Figure 8-14 Checking Alarm Help ...................................................................8-41
Figure 8-15 The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box .......................8-42
Figure 8-16 Viewing the Alarm Help ................................................................8-43
Figure 8-17 Setting the Current Alarm Filter ....................................................8-46
Figure 8-18 Setting the Card Alarm Filter ........................................................8-48
Figure 8-19 Adding a Alarm Filter Rule............................................................8-53

Figure 8-20 The Filter Window - Alarm History...............................................8-55
Figure 8-21 Viewing History Alarm Filter .........................................................8-56
Figure 8-22 Customizing the Alarm Level........................................................8-60
Figure 8-23 Setting the Reporting Condition....................................................8-61
Figure 8-24 Viewing the Reported Content......................................................8-63
Figure 8-25 Viewing the Filter Content ............................................................8-63
Figure 8-26 Setting the Filter Condition ...........................................................8-64
Figure 8-27 The Current Alarm Panel..............................................................8-70
Figure 8-28 Setting the Alarm Indicator Color ..................................................8-71
Figure 9-1
Setting the Performance Collection Mode.......................................9-5
Figure 9-2
Option List of the Performance Title Bar .........................................9-7
Figure 9-3
Setting the Performance Query Condition.......................................9-9
Figure 9-4
Option List of the Performance History Title Bar............................9-10
Figure 9-5
The Set Performance Query Condition Dialog Box....................9-11
Figure 9-6
Defining the Performance Profile Name........................................9-12
Figure 9-7
Viewing the Accumulative Performance........................................9-13
Figure 9-8
Detecting the Real-time Performance ...........................................9-15
Figure 9-9
Viewing Performance Reports......................................................9-17
Figure 9-10 Viewing the Performance History Statistical and Analytical Report 9-18
Figure 9-11
Checking the Performance Help...................................................9-20
Figure 9-12 The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box .......................9-21
Figure 9-13 Checking All the Performance Help Information............................9-21
Figure 9-14 The PM Backup Management Tab..............................................9-25
Figure 9-15 File Result List .............................................................................9-26
Figure 9-16 The PM-REPORT Dialog Box ......................................................9-27
Figure 9-17 Setting the Card Performance Filter..............................................9-28
Figure 9-18 The Filter Settings Window - Performance History ......................9-33
Figure 9-19 Viewing History Performance Filter...............................................9-34
Figure 9-20 Viewing the Optical Power Statistics.............................................9-36
Figure 9-21 Setting the Performance Query Condition.....................................9-39
Figure 9-22 Viewing the Port Traffic ................................................................9-41
Figure 9-23 The Performance Collection Settings Dialog Box ......................9-41

Figure 9-24 Setting the Traffic Threshold.........................................................9-49
Figure 9-25 Setting the Delayed Time to Report the Threshold-crossing Alarm 9-50
Figure 9-26 Viewing Threshold-crossing Alarms .............................................9-50
Figure 10-1 Viewing Command Logs ..............................................................10-4
Figure 10-2 Viewing User Logs.......................................................................10-6
Figure 10-3 Viewing Business Logs ................................................................10-8
Figure 10-4 The Filter Settings Window - Command Logs ........................... 10-11
Figure 11-1
The Add Dialog Box - Alarm Filter Statistics ............................... 11-41
Figure 11-2
The Add Dialog Box - Bandwidth Utilization Ratio Statistics........ 11-46
Figure 11-3
The Add Dialog Box - 15min Traffic Statistics ............................. 11-50
Figure 11-4
The Add Dialog Box - 24hour Traffic Statistics............................ 11-54
Figure 11-5
The Add Dialog Box - Device Environment Parameter Statistics. 11-58
Figure 11-6
The Add Dialog Box - Optical Performance Statistics ................. 11-61
Figure 11-7
The Add Dialog Box - NE CPU and Memory Usage Statistics..... 11-65
Figure 11-8
The Add Dialog Box - VOA Status Statistics............................... 11-68
Figure 11-9
Viewing the Opposite End Port Information................................. 11-73
Figure 11-10 Viewing Software Version .......................................................... 11-74

Figure 11-11 The Browse IP Configuration Tab ............................................ 11-75
Figure 12-1 Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool ...............................................12-8
Figure 12-2 Selecting Items to Be Exported ....................................................12-9
Figure 12-3 Export Success Alert Box...........................................................12-10
Figure 12-4 Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool ............................................. 12-11
Figure 12-5 Selecting Items to be Restored...................................................12-12
Figure 12-6 Import Success Alert Box ...........................................................12-13
Tables
Table 2-1
Description of Submenus under the System Main Menu ................2-6
Table 2-2
Description of Submenus under the View Main Menu .....................2-6
Table 2-3
Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main

Menu .............................................................................................2-8
Table 2-4
Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu ....2-10
Table 2-5
Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu ....2-13
Table 2-6
Description of Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu .................2-14
Table 2-7
Description of Submenus of the Performance Main Menu............2-15
Table 2-8
Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu ...........2-15
Table 2-9
Description of Submenus under the Security Main Menu .............2-18
Table 2-10
Description of Submenus under the Help Main Menu ...................2-18
Table 2-11
Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar .................................2-19
Table 2-12
Shortcut Icons on the Main Topology ............................................2-21
Table 2-13
Description of Commonly Used Shortcuts.....................................2-22
Table 2-14
Description of the Object Tree Panes ...........................................2-25
Table 2-15
Description of Status Bar..............................................................2-27
Table 2-16
Access Method of Checking the Command Manager....................2-31
Table 2-17
Access Method of Monitoring Network Status...............................2-34
Table 3-1
Description of the Authority and Domain Division Scenario ...........3-11
Table 3-2
Authorization Planning Flow.........................................................3-12
Table 3-3
User Settings ...............................................................................3-25
Table 3-4
Creating User Groups ..................................................................3-34
Table 3-5
Creating Users.............................................................................3-35
Table 3-6
Access Method of Managing the EMS_f Authority.........................3-42
Table 3-7
Description of the Configuration Items in the EMS_f Management

Tab ..............................................................................................3-42
Table 4-1
NE IP Address Settings................................................................4-30
Table 5-1
Description of the Network Topology Construction Flow ..................5-3
Table 5-2
Description of the Fiber Connection Attributes ................................5-5
Table 6-1
Access Method of Downloading Management Configuration...........6-3
Table 6-2
Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Management

Configuration .................................................................................6-4
Table 6-3
Access Method of Downloading Structure Configuration .................6-6
Table 6-4
Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Structure

Configuration .................................................................................6-7
Table 6-5
Access Method of Downloading Equipment Configuration ..............6-8
Table 6-6
Access Method of Refreshing the Configuration Time ...................6-10
Table 6-7
Access Method of Configuration Check ........................................6-11
Table 6-8
Operations in the Card Configuration Page...................................6-15
Table 6-9
Access Method of Synchronizing the Card Configuration ..............6-20
Table 6-10
Description of Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration ...........6-21
Table 6-11
Access Method of Delivering Software .........................................6-23
Table 7-1
Description of Circuit Basic Properties..........................................7-11
Table 7-2
Description of Bandwidth Settings ................................................7-12
Table 7-3
Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Source/ Sink Node,

Source / Sink Port, and BFD) .......................................................7-12
Table 7-4
Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Routing Policy and

Intermediate Route Constraints)...................................................7-13
Table 7-5
Description of Precreated Circuit Parameters ...............................7-14
Table 7-6
Description of Revert Properties...................................................7-14
Table 7-7
Description of the Working / Protection Path Properties (when BFD or

Proactive OAM is enabled)...........................................................7-15
Table 7-8
Description of Dynamic / Static PW Basic Properties. ...................7-17
Table 7-9
Description of Lower-level Tunnel Parameters..............................7-18
Table 7-10
Description of PW Advanced Properties .......................................7-19
Table 7-11
Description of L2VPN Basic Properties.........................................7-32
Table 7-12
Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the

E-LINE Service ............................................................................7-32
Table 7-13

E-LAN or E-TREE Service ...........................................................7-33
Table 7-14

CES Service ................................................................................7-33
Table 7-15
Description of Node NE / Port Configuration Parameters of the N:1

Group Service..............................................................................7-34
Table 7-16
Description of the RD/RT, PE Member and Interface List

Information Parameters of the L3 VPN........................................7-37
Table 7-17
Description of the ATM Service Cross-connect Settings................7-40
Table 7-18
Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties ......................7-45
Table 7-19
Description of VRRP configuration Parameters ............................7-47
Table 7-20
Description of Path Basic Attributes..............................................7-73
Table 7-21
Description of ASON Advanced Parameters.................................7-75
Table 7-22
Description of the Source / Sink NEs Ports of the VCG Circuit.......7-78
Table 7-23
Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties ......................7-80
Table 7-24
Description of the PTN Global Variable Parameters ......................7-88
Table 8-1
Meaning and Severity of Alarm Levels............................................8-4
Table 8-2
Description of Alarm-related Parameters ........................................8-8
Table 8-3
Access Method of Viewing the Current Alarm ...............................8-10
Table 8-4
Access Method of Viewing the Alarm History ................................8-13
Table 8-5
Description of the Menus in the Customize Alarm Level Dialog

Box..............................................................................................8-25
Table 8-6
Description of the Alarm Processing Flow.....................................8-28
Table 8-7
Data Save Parameters - Alarm History .........................................8-44
Table 8-8
Access Method of Setting the Current Alarm Filter ........................8-46
Table 8-9
Descriptions of Items in the Card Alarm Filter ...............................8-48
Table 8-10
Description of Items in the Card Alarm Filter Tab...........................8-53
Table 8-11
Access Method of Setting the Alarm Reporting .............................8-61
Table 8-12
Description of Alarm Reporting Conditions ...................................8-62
Table 8-13
Description of the SMS Device Parameters ..................................8-68
Table 9-1
Description of Performance-related Parameters .............................9-3
Table 9-2
Access Method of Viewing the Current Performance ......................9-6
Table 9-3
Access Method of Viewing the Performance History .......................9-8
Table 9-4
Data Save Parameters - Performance History ..............................9-23
Table 9-5
Description of Items in the Card Performance Setting ...................9-29
Table 9-6
Access Method of the Optical Power Statistics .............................9-35
Table 9-7
The Traffic Threshold Setting Access Method of the Card .............9-49
Table 10-1
Description of the Parameters in the Save Data Tab - Command

Logs ..........................................................................................10-13
Table 11-1
Introduction to Extended Functions ............................................ 11-38
Table 11-2
Description of Alarm Filter Statistics Parameters......................... 11-41
Table 11-3
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the Bandwidth

Usage Statistics......................................................................... 11-46
Table 11-4
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 15min Traffic
Statistics.................................................................................... 11-50
Table 11-5
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 24-hour

Traffic Statistics ......................................................................... 11-54
Table 11-6
Description of Device Environment Parameters Statistics ........... 11-58
Table 11-7
Description of Optical Power Performance Statistics................... 11-62
Table 11-8
Description of NE CUPU and Memory Usage Statistical

Parameters................................................................................ 11-65
Table 11-9
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the VOA Status
Statistics.................................................................................... 11-69
Table 12-1
Description of the OTNM2000 Backup and Restoration ................12-2
Table 12-2
Description of the Items in the Left List .........................................12-9
Table A-1
Description of the OTNM2000 Services......................................... A-1
Preparatory Knowledge
The OTNM2000 Element Management System (the OTNM2000 for short) performs
effective and unified management of various access equipment offered by
FiberHome to facilitate users operations and reduce the maintenance costs of the
equipment. Below are detailed contents.
Management System
Numbering Hierarchy
Version: A
1-1
e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide
1.1
Management System
The following introduces the management model and management structure of the
OTNM2000.
1.1.1
Management Model
Practically, the network management uses a multi-layered distributed structure and
each layer has the management capability of preset level. The most elementary
management model includes three units: manager (M), agent (A) and managed
object (MO).
u
Manager:
The manager participates in the system management process, the

manager can communicate with NEs of the same layer and the operating
system; in addition, it provides the management support for them.
Gives operating information of the OTNM2000 (such as searching the

alarm record and setting the threshold), receives event reports forwarded
by the agent (such as the alarm and running performance) and reports the
operating result to the upper-level EMS.
Note:
In the OTNM2000, there are usually two "M"s on one module, which are
"Ma" (active manager) and "Mb" (standby manager) respectively. Under
normal occasion, "Ma" performs as the manager; when "Ma" fails, "Mb"
replaces "Ma" to be the manager.
u
Agent: It manages relevant objects directly, responds to commands delivered

by the manager and informs the manager of MO activities.
Managed object: It receives and implements the administrating commands from

the manager, and informs the agent of its activities.
Figure 1-1 shows the relationship among the manager, agent and managed object.
1-2
Version: A
1 Preparatory Knowledge
Figure 1-1
Interrelationship between the Manager, the Agent and the Managed Object
The one-to-many relationship between the manager and the agent means that one
manager is able to exchange information with many agents.
1.1.2
Management Structure
The OTNM2000 uses layered management mode to achieve the management of
multiple elements with one network management system, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Version: A
1-3
Figure 1-2
The OTNM2000 Management Structure
The OTNM2000 is connected to the equipments EMU via F interface, and manages
all EMUs through monitoring path. An EMU is able to serve as both the manager
and the agent. It communicates with BCT (Board Control Terminal) of each card via
internal bus. The communications include transmitting management operation
commands and receiving notifications. BCT (Board Control Terminal), as the
managed object, receives and implements the administrating commands from EMU,
and informs EMU of its activities.
Note:
BCT (Board Control Terminal) is a subcard on the card for managing the
card. The BCT collects the alarm and performance information of the card
and transmits them to the EMU. Simultaneously, the BCT operates the
configuration management of the card according to the commands from
EMU.
The OTNM2000 performs real-time monitor to the NE via both polling and active
report modes.
u
Polling: Usually, the NE-level manager calls each NE in the part in turn via
polling mode, collects and stores the alarm and performance of them.
1-4
Version: A
1 Preparatory Knowledge
Active report: If one alarm occurs in some NE of the part, it will be reported to
the NE-Level manager immediately. To view the information, users should send
a request to the NE-level manager, who will show users the collected
information via GUI immediately.
1.2
Numbering Hierarchy
In the OTNM2000, managed objects are divided into logical part and physical part.
Using the unique numbering system can correctly locate each managed object in
the network, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3
Numbering Hierarchy
Physical part: The actual physical structure of the equipment, including bureau,
rack, shelf, slot and card.
Logical part: The concepts including project, part, NE and group that facilitates
EMS management of equipment.
Both of these two parts are independent of each other but cannot be separated.
Version: A
1-5
1.2.1
Physical Part
The bureau number, rack number, shelf number and slot number compose the
physical address.
u
Bureau: Equipment in different places is not set in one bureau. Names of

different bureaus should be different.
Rack: Racks in one bureau are numbered uniformly. The number is unique.
Shelf: Shelves in one rack are numbered uniformly. The number is unique.
Slot: Slot number is related to equipment. The slot number of a set of

equipment follows a unified specification and cannot be changed manually.
Card: The address of a card and group number compose the unique
identification (ID number) for the card within NE. The address of the card is
unique within a group.
1.2.2
Logical Part
The project number, part number, NE number, group number and slot number
compose the logical address.
u
Project: Composed of several parts, project is the topmost layer of numbering

hierarchy. The project number is unique.
Part: Part is composed of multiple interconnected NEs. Part segmentation must

be convenient for management; and usually, it depends on the structure of
transmission system (such as the ring or chain). In one project, the part number
is unique.
Note:
In one part, the quantity of NEs should be no more than 32.
u
NE: NE is logically independent and it is the smallest unit to perform some

functions. Usually, one EMU card is the entity of one NE. In one part, the NE
number is unique.
Group: Group number and slot address compose the only identity (ID number)
for the card within NE. In one NE, the group number is unique.
1-6
Version: A
OTNM2000 Basic Operations

Login / Logout
GUI Introduction
Common Operations
Viewing the Command Manager
Locking / Unlocking the Client End
Monitoring the Network Status
Viewing the Version Information
Current User Logout
Version: A
2-1
2.1
Login / Logout
The following introduces how to log into or log out of the OTNM2000 client end.
2.1.1
Logging into the OTNM2000

Only after logging into the OTNM2000 can you perform operations in the
OTNM2000 graphical user interface (GUI).
Prerequisite
u
You have logged into the operating system as the administrator.
The OTNM2000 server end services have been started up.
The client IP address is included in the access control list of the OTNM2000
system settings. See Setting the Access Control List for the settings of access
control list.
You have been assigned with a valid user account (username and password).
1.
Double-click the OTNM2000 icon on the desktop.
2.
Select the OTNM2000 server IP address in the Server drop-down list.
Procedure
If the server IP address is not set, follow the steps below to add the server IP
address.
1.
Click
to the right of Server drop-down list to open the Server
configuration dialog box, and then click Add.

2.
In the added row, click to configure the parameters of the OTNM2000

server and then click OK.
Parameter
IP Address
Name
2-2
Description
It is required. Sets the IP address corresponding to the
network card of the OTNM2000 server database.
Sets the name of the OTNM2000 server, used to
differentiating from other OTNM2000 servers.
Version: A
2 OTNM2000 Basic Operations
Parameter
Description
Configures this item according to the actual situation. If the
Whether the configuration
gateway of the server is inconsistent with that of the client, it is
NAT gateway
required to configure the NAT gateway to implement

interconnection.
If Whether the configuration NAT gateway is set to Yes,
Server Extranet IP
enter the extranet IP address corresponding to the OTNM2000

server.
3.
In the Server configuration dialog box, select the server in the list and
click Connect Test.
Click OK in the displayed connect success alert box.
If connect failure appears, check whether the network connection

and the server IP address are correctly configured, and then test the
connection again.
4.
When the connection test is successful, click Add in the Server

configuration dialog box.
5.
3.
In the displayed alert box, click OK to save the server IP settings.
In the Local IP drop-down list, select the client end IP address.

If the gateway of the server is inconsistent with that of the client, it is required to
configure the NAT gateway to implement interconnection. Follow the steps
below to set the extranet IP address of the client end.
1.
Click
2.
In the displayed Client NAT configuration dialog box, set the client
extranet IP address and click OK.

4.
Version: A
Type the username and password in the Login dialog box and click OK.
2-3
Note:
u
After the OTNM2000 is installed, the default username and

password are admin. You should modify the password immediately
after login so as to ensure the OTNM2000 security.
By default, when you enter incorrect passwords three times in a row,

the OTNM2000 will lock your account. To unlock it, see Unlocking
Users.
2.1.2
Logging Out of the OTNM2000

The following introduces how to log out of the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
The OTNM2000 runs normally.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemExist in the OTNM2000 window or click
at the upper right
corner of the OTNM2000 window.

2.
2.2
In the displayed alert box, select one of the following operations:
Click Yes to save the service configuration and exit.
Click No to exit without saving the service configuration.
GUI Introduction
The following introduces the layout and functions of the OTNM2000 GUI.
2.2.1
System GUI
The main GUI of the OTNM2000 is composed of the object tree pane, toolbar, menu
bar, status bar, etc, as shown in Figure 2-1.
2-4
Version: A
(1) Object tree pane
(2) Menu bar
(4) Display pane
(5) Status bar
Figure 2-1
2.2.2
(3) Toolbar
The OTNM2000 Main GUI
Main Menu
The following introduces the functions of the main menu and the sub menus of the
OTNM2000.
Version: A
2-5
2.2.2.1
System
The submenus under the System main menu are described in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Description of Submenus under the System Main Menu
Menu Option
Object Searching
Query
Condition
Option
Searches for the desired object by setting the search condition. The
search objects include NEs, network block and shelves.
Sets the parameters related to alarm / performance search, including
setting the alarm / performance query conditions and setting conditions
before querying the alarm /performance history data.
Automatic
Sets automatic refreshing the project or other current alarm values,
Function
automatic lockout and automatic exist.
Sound
Sets the alarm sound and animation parameters, including whether to
Option
enable the sound, sound play mode, play time and play priority.
Opens the Save Settings tab to set the data save policy.
Save Data
Network Status
Monitor
Lock the EMS
2.2.2.2
Description
Opens the Network Status Monitor tab to monitor the network status.
Locks the current operating and you cannot perform any operations on
the GUI.
Change Password
Changes your password.
Connect to MSMP
Connects to the multi-service management service. In normal
Service
connection status, this menu is greyed out.
Start Devcfg.exe
Starts the Devcfg configuration management GUI.
Log out
Logs out of the current OTNM2000 GUI and returns to the login GUI.
Exit
Exits and closes the OTNM2000 GUI.
View
The submenus under the View main menu are described in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2
Description of Submenus under the View Main Menu
Menu Option
Topo Layer Management
2-6
Description
Opens the Topo Layer Management tab to set the layer-based
topology.
Topo
Bureau
Sets whether to display the bureau name of the NE in the main
Display
Name
topology.
Version: A
Table 2-2
Description of Submenus under the View Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
IP Address
topology.
Sets whether to display the logical address of the NE in the main
Address
topology.
Connection
Sets whether to display the connection number of the NE in the
Number
main topology.
Sets whether to display the dialing switch of the NE in the main
topology.
Show link
Sets whether to display the remarks of the links in the main
remark
topology.
Show NE in
the network
block only
NE Icon
Line Property
Setting
Sets whether to display the IP address of the NE in the main
Logic
Switch
Topo
Description
Sets whether to only display the NEs of the selected network

block in the main topology.
Sets the icon of the NE according to the NE type.
Sets the properties (width, dotted or solid line) of the line
according to the link rate.
Regional
Sets the size of the main topology area, including the width and
Size
height.
Background
image
Use default
background
Logical Tree
Operational Tree
Browse Tree
Sets the background image of the main topology.
Adopts the default background for the main topology.

Sets whether to display the Logical Tree pane in the object pane.
Sets whether to display the Operational Tree pane in the object
pane.
Sets whether to display the Browse Tree pane in the object pane.
Opens the Command manager window to view all the operation
Command Manager
commands, including command start time, used time and other

relevant information.
Supports switching between the main topology and the DCN
DCN Topo
topology. The DCN topology visualizes the communication

relationship among NEs, providing convenience for management
and maintenance.
Version: A
2-7
2.2.2.3
Business Management
The submenus under the Business Management main menu are described in
Table 2-3.
Table 2-3
Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
Queries and manages the tunnel data configured in the
Tunnel
OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the PW data configured in the
PW
OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the L2VPN data configured in the
L2VPN Service
OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the L3VPN data configured in the
L3VPN Service
OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the group service data configured in
Group Service
the OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the MPLS ring data configured in
MPLS Ring
the OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the VRRP data configured in the
VRRP
OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the protection pair data configured
Protection Pair
in the OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the OTN circuit data configured in
OTN Circuit
the OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the OTN ring data configured in the
OTN Ring
OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the OTN NE structure data
OTN NE graph
configured in the OTNM2000.
SDH/MSTP Circuit
the OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the SDH/MSTP ring data
SDH/MSTP Ring

Broken Tunnel
management
2-8

Queries and manages the VCG channel data configured in
VCG Channel
Broken data
Queries and manages the SDH/MSTP circuit data
Queries and manages the broken tunnels in the

OTNM2000.
Broken PW
Queries and manages the broken PWs in the OTNM2000.
Broken Service
Queries and manages the broken server data in the
Data
OTNM2000.
Version: A
Table 2-3
Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
Description
Broken MPLS
Queries and manages the broken MPLS rings in the
Rings
OTNM2000.
Broken
Protection
Pairs
Broken OTN
Queries and manages the broken protection pairs in the

OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the broken OTN circuits in the
OTNM2000.
Broken OTN
Queries and manages the broken OTN rings in the
Rings
OTNM2000.
Broken
SDH/MSTP
Circuits
Broken
SDH/MSTP
Rings
Queries and manages the broken SDH/MSTP circuits in

the OTNM2000.
Queries and manages the broken SDH/MSTP rings in the

OTNM2000.
Save Config Data to Database
Saves the current configuration data to the database.
Read Config Data from Database
Reads the configuration data from the database.
Full Download
Save Cross-
Saves the cross-connect data of the specified NE to the
connect (NE)
database.
Deliver Cross-
Delivers the cross-connect data of the specified NE to the
connect (NE)
database.
Save SDH NE
Saves the SDH NE cross-connect data into the database
Cross-connect
and view the save status.
Increment
Import
Datasource
Imports the pre-configured data source file to the

OTNM2000, which greatly improves the service
configuration efficiency.
Merge Config
Merges the configurations of multiple EMSs.
Clear Config
Clears all service data configured in the OTNM2000.
Data
Please handle with care.

Notifies the multi-service background to generate the
Synchronize
circuit data and report the circuits onto the GUI. The GUI
All Config Data
automatically saves the reported data into the database

and provides ways to view circuits of different types.
Backup/Restore
Switch to
Offline Mode
Backup to File
Version: A
Switches between online mode and offline mode.

u
Online Mode: Obtains data from the background.
Offline Mode: Loads the data configured offline.
Backs up the current configuration file of business

management.
2-9
Table 2-3
Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
Description
Recovery From
File
Downloaded
Data to the
Client End
2.2.2.4
Imports the configuration file of business management.
Downloads the data from the current server to the client

end in offline mode.
Uploaded Data
Uploads the data of the current client end to the server in
to the Server
offline mode.
Business Configuration
The submenus under the Business Configuration main menu are described in
Table 2-4.
Table 2-4
Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
Tunnel
Configures the dynamic / static tunnel.
PW
Configures the dynamic / static circuit.
L2VPN Service
Configures the L2 VPN.
L3VPN Service
ATM Service
Configures the ATM service.
Group Service
PTN/IPRAN
Ring protection
IPRAN VRRP
Config
Quickly Create
Tunnel
Configures the combination service bridging the L2VPN

and the L3 VPN.
Creates the protection ring for the PTN/IPRAN device.
Configures the VRRP parameters.
Quickly creates the tunnel.
Quickly Create
Ethernet
Quickly configures the Ethernet service and PW.
Service
Optical
Channel
POTN/PE-OTN
ODUk Channel
Client Service
Channel
2-10
Creates the OCh channel.

Creates the ODUk channel.
Creates the client service channel.
Version: A
Table 2-4
Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
Description
ODUk
Protection
Creates the ODUk protection group.
Group
OCh Ring
Protection
ODUk Ring
Protection
Creates the ODUk ring protection.
Tunnel
Configures the dynamic / static tunnel.
PW
Configures the dynamic / static circuit.
L2VPN Service
L3VPN Service
Group Service
Ring Protection
IPRAN VRRP
Config
SDH/MSTP
Creates the OCh ring protection.
Configures the combination service bridging the L2VPN

and the L3 VPN.
Creates the protection ring for the POTN/PE-OTN device.
Configures the VRRP parameters.
Circuit
Creates the SDH circuits.
VCG Channel
Creates the SDH VCG channel.
Ring protection
Creates the SDH protection ring.
PTN NE Global
Settings
Global VS
OAM Enable
Global LM
Frame Enable
Merge OTN
NEs
Service Global
OTN
Settings
wavelength
Sets the global variable of the PTN NE.
Enables the global section layer OAM.

Enables the global section layer LM frame.
Merges the OTN NEs.
Configures the OTN channel wavelength.
setup
OTN NE
Optical Link
Configures the fiber connection among the OTN NEs.
OTN
OTUk/ODUk
Configures the OTN OTUk / ODUk overhead.
Overhead
OTN WSS
group
Version: A
Configures the OTN WSS group.
2-11
Table 2-4
Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
Description
OTN OPM
Wavelength
Configures the OTN OPM wavelength monitoring.
Monitor
OTN SAPU
Protection
SPC Resource
Management
(SDH/PTN)
SPC Resource
Management
(OTN/POTS)
ASON
Resource
Management
Synchronize
SPC Port Data
Synchronize
SPC Resource
Synchronize
SPC Tunnels
Display Route
Configures the OTN SAPU protection.
Indicates the SPC resource management for the SDH and

PTN devices.
Indicates the SPC resource management for the OTN and

POTS devices.
Synchronizes the SPC port on the device to the
OTNM2000 to ensure the statuses of the SPC ports in the
OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent.
Synchronizes the SPC data on the device to the
OTNM2000 to ensure the statuses of the SPC data in the
OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent.
Synchronizes the SPC channel on the device to the
OTNM2000 to ensure the statuses of the SPC circuits in
the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent.
Displays the information of the configured route.
Includes the three parameters of the OTNM2000:
Options
Background Initialization Parameter, Operation

Parameter Settings and Display Settings.
2-12
Version: A
2.2.2.5
Configuration
The submenus under the Configuration main menu are described in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5
Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu
Menu Option
Manager Service
config
GNE Configuration
NE IP Remote Config
Configures the manager service and its corresponding network block.

Configures the gateway NE, including the gateway NE group and
gateway NE.
Configures the IP address, mask and gateway of the NE remotely
through the device SN.
Downloading
Downloads the network blocks management configuration data from
Management Config
the database to the device.
Download Structure
Downloads the network blocks structure configuration from the
Config
database to the device.
Download Equipment
Downloads the equipment configuration data of the network block or
Config
NE from the database to the device.
Refresh Config Time
Refreshes the configuration delivering time.
Check Config
Network Block
Management Config
Analysis
Network Block
Structure Config
Analysis
Optical Cable Router
Setting
Card Config Timing

Synchronization
Backup DCG File
Version: A
Description
Checks whether the actual device configuration is consistent with the

configuration in the database.
Reads the management configuration data of the network block from
the device and check whether the configuration is correct.
Reads the structure configuration data of the network block from the
device and check whether the configuration is correct.
Sets the information of the same optical cable route. Check whether
the active and standby circuits are in the same optical cable route so
as to ensure the availability of the standby circuit.
Sets the scheduled synchronization task of card configuration to
synchronize the configuration data at the device side to the
OTNM2000.
Sets the automatic backup task of DCG files to back up the
configuration file to the specified directory.
2-13
2.2.2.6
Alarm
The submenus under the Alarm main menu are described in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6
Description of Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
Current Alarm
Opens the current alarm tab to view current alarms.
Alarm History
Opens the alarm history tab to view the alarm history.
View Report Alarm
Alarm Report Settings
Selects whether to open the Report Content Display tab to

view the reported alarms.
Sets the number of reported alarms according to the
requirement for network maintenance.
Filters the specified current alarms according to the requirement
Current Alarm Filter
for network maintenance. The filtered current alarms will not

appear on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Filters the specified alarm history according to the requirement
Alarm History Mask
for network maintenance. The filtered alarm history will not be

saved into the database.
Alarm Filtering Rule
Manages the current alarm filter rules, including adding,
Management
modifying and deleting alarm filter rules.
Custom Alarm Level
Re-defines the alarm levels.
Alarm Level Template
Alarm Statistical Template
House-Keeping Alarm
2-14
Manages the alarm level templates according to the

requirement for network maintenance.
Manages the alarm statistical templates and sets the statistical
range of the current alarm by switching the template.
Sets the query object and monitors the environment alarm of
the designated object.
Version: A
2.2.2.7
Performance
The submenus under the Performance main menu are described in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7
Description of Submenus of the Performance Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
Current Performance
Opens the current performance tab to view current performance.
History Performance
Collection Task Settings
Opens the history performance tab to view the performance

history.
Sets the performance collection task indicator, including the
collection object and collection start / end time.
Filters the specified performance history according to the
History Performance Mask
requirement for network maintenance. The filtered performance

history will not be saved into the database.
Monitors the device traffic. The monitored objects involve ports,
Flow Monitor
sections, LSP, PW and L2VPN.
Long-term traffic monitoring

settings
2.2.2.8
Sets the long-term traffic monitoring parameters, including the

monitored objects, storage period and save directory of data
files.
Statistics
The submenus under the Statistics main menu are described in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8
Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
Link Resource
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of link
Usage
resource usage and exports reports.
Circuit Statistics on
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of circuit
Link
information on links and exports reports.
NE-Tributary-Port
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the NE
Service Data
Usage
tributary port usage and exports reports.
Query Report
Tributary-Port Circuit
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of circuit
Statistics
information of the NE tributary port and exports reports.
Paths Between NEs
Version: A
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of circuits

between NEs and exports reports.
NE Cross-connect
Capacity
cross-connect capability and exports reports.
2-15
Table 2-8
Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
Description
NE Port Usage
Statistics
port usage and exports reports.
NE Port Protection
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the
LSP
protection LSP of the NE port and exports reports.
NE VPWS Statistics
NE VPLS Statistics
Port Flow Statistics

VPWS and exports reports.
VPLS and exports reports.
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the port
service traffic and exports reports.
PTN Service/Label
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the PTN
Statistics
service / label and exports reports.
L2/L3 bridge access
Sets the query condition, queries the L2 / L3 bridge
point
node services and exports reports.
Query PTN NE LSR
Sets the query condition, queries the PTN NE LSR ID
ID
address and exports reports.
Used Label
Sets the query condition, queries the information of
Information
used labels and exports reports.
L2VPN Report
Sets the query condition, queries the L2VPN reports

and exports reports.
OAM&BFD Enable
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of
Report
OAM&BFD enabling and exports reports.
OTN Station
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the OTN
Capacity
station capacity and exports reports.
OTN Wavelength
Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of OTN
Resource
wavelength resources and exports reports.
Wavelength and
Channel
Comparison Report
Sets the query condition, queries the system channel

comparison reports and exports reports.
Protection
Sets the query condition, queries the protection
Information
information and exports reports.

Gathers statistics of all NEs in the entire network,
including NE name, NE type, EMU card type, switch
NE Statistics
No. and NE IP address. It supports filtering NEs,

exporting reports, navigating to shelf and navigating to
the topology.
2-16
Version: A
Table 2-8
Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Option
Description
Gathers statistics of all the cards in the entire network,
including card name, card type, card address and
associated NE. It supports filtering cards, exporting
Board Statistics
reports, navigating to shelf and navigating to the

topology.
Gathers statistics of total slots and idle slots in the
Slot Used Statistics
entire network. It supports filtering slots, exporting

reports, navigating to shelf and navigating to the
topology.
Gathers statistics of SN information of NEs in the
SN Statistics
entire network.
NE Link Info Statistics
Alarm Filter Statistics
the entire network and supports exporting reports.

Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of lines
whose alarms are filtered and exports reports.
Bandwidth Utilization Statistics
Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of device
Management
bandwidth usage and exports reports.
15min Traffic Statistics Management
24hour Traffic Statistics Management

15-minute traffic and exports reports.
24-hour traffic and exports reports.
Device Environment Parameters
Statistics
environment parameters and exports reports.
Option of Power Statistics
CPU MEM Statistics
VOA Status Statistics Management
Manage Port IP
Statistics
IP Statistics
Version: A
Gathers statistics of NE fiber connection information in
Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of optical

power performance and exports reports.
Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of NE CPU
and memory usage and exports reports.
Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of VOA
status of the WDM / OTN device and exports reports.
Gathers statistics of management interface IP
addresses of the selected devices and outputs the
report.
Logic Port IP
Gathers statistics of logical interface IP addresses of
Statistics
the selected devices and outputs the report.
2-17
2.2.2.9
Security
The submenus under the Security main menu are described in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9
Description of Submenus under the Security Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
Manages the users, user groups, object groups and operation
User Management
groups in the OTNM2000, including the attribute settings and

authority allocation.
Online User Management
Views the online users, sends messages to other online users

and log out other users.
Manages the F interface authority of the selected NE, that is,
EMS_f Management
selects whether to enable the F interface of the selected NE and

sets the login password of the F interface.
View Command Log

View User Log
View Business Log
View EMU Log
View Report Event
2.2.2.10
Views the information such as name, time and result of the

users commands.
Views the information about users login and logout of the
OTNM2000.
Views the operation records of the services.
Views the information such as delivering object, time, command
name of the EMU command.
Views the related information of the report events of the ASON
equipment.
Help
The submenus under the Help main menu are described in Table 2-10.
Table 2-10
2-18
Description of Submenus under the Help Main Menu
Menu Option
Description
OTNM2000 Help
Opens the OTNM2000 online help document.
Alarm and Performance
Views the relevant reference information of the alarm and
Help
performance.
About
Views the version and service information of the OTNM2000.
Version: A
2.2.3
Shortcut Icons
The following introduces the commonly used shortcut icons.
Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

The shortcut icons on the toolbar are described in Table 2-11.
Table 2-11
Area
Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

Icon
Name
Description
Lock the
Locks the current operating GUI and users will not be
EMS
able to implement any operation on the GUI.
Alarm
Sound
(alarm
sound is
turned on)
Alarm
Turns on or off the alarm sound.
Sound
(alarm
sound is
turned off)
Alarm
Flickering
Standard
(alarm
flickering is
turned on)
Turns on or off the alarm flickering.
Alarm
Flickering
(alarm
flickering is
turned off)
Object
Opens the Quick search dialog box to locate the object
Searching
in the topology.
View Report
Alarm
Command
Manager
Version: A
Displays or hides the current alarm report window.
Opens the Command manager window.
2-19
Table 2-11
Area
Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar (Continued)

Icon
Name
Description
Dynamically displays the information of interruption
alarms. The first digit indicates the total number of
Interruption
interruption alarms and the last digit indicates the
Alarm
number of interruption alarms that are not confirmed.

Click the icon to open the Current Alarm tab to view
interruption alarms.
Dynamically displays the information of critical alarms.
The first digit indicates the total number of critical
Critical
alarms and the last digit indicates the number of critical
alarm
alarms that are not confirmed.

critical alarms.
Dynamically displays the information of major alarms.
The first digit indicates the total number of major alarms
Current
Alarm
Major alarm
Panel
and the last digit indicates the number of major alarms

that are not confirmed.
major alarms.
Dynamically displays the information of minor alarms.
The first digit indicates the total number of minor alarms
Minor alarm
and the last digit indicates the number of minor alarms

that are not confirmed.
minor alarms.
Dynamically displays the information of prompt alarms.
The first digit indicates the total number of prompt
Prompt
alarms and the last digit indicates the number of prompt
Alarm
alarms that are not confirmed.

prompt alarms.
Normal
Business
Service
Data
Amount
Statistics
Object
Statistics
Dynamically displays the amount of normal service

data. Click this icon to open the Business object
statistics window.
To-beactivated
Dynamically displays the amount of service data to be
Business
activated. Click this icon to open the Business object
Object
statistics window.
Statistics
2-20
Version: A
Table 2-11
Area
Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar (Continued)

Icon
Name
Description
To-bedeleted
Dynamically displays the amount of service data to be
Business
deleted. Click this icon to open the Business object
Object
statistics window.
Statistics
Broken
Business
Object
Statistics
Dynamically displays the amount of broken service

data. Click this icon to open the Business object
statistics window.
Shortcut Icons on the Main Topology

The shortcut icons are described in Table 2-12.
Table 2-12
Icon
Shortcut Icons on the Main Topology

Name
Lock Current
Layer
Locks the current layer. When the topology is zoomed in or

out, the system will not switch the current layer according to
the scaling ratio.
Selection
Switches to the selection mode, in which you can select the
Mode
topological object.
Drag Mode
Airscape
Enable Edit
Legend
Version: A
Description
Switches to the drag mode, in which you can move the

topology view.
Opens / closes the Airscape.
Enables / disables the editing mode, in which you can move
the NE to another location.
Opens the Legend pane to understand the object type and
status that each icon indicates in the topology.
Zoom In
Zooms in the topology.
Zoom Out
Zooms out the topology.
Revert
Restores the topology to the original size.
Scaling Ratio
Selects the scaling ratio to display the topology.
2-21
Shortcuts on Other GUIs

Icon
Name
Description
Opens the corresponding filter dialog box to set the filter
Filter
2.2.4
conditions and view the filter result.
Refresh
Refreshes the current GUI.
Sort
Opens the Sort dialog box to set the sorting conditions.
Select
Opens the Select Column dialog box to set the columns to be
Column
displayed and the display sequence.
Export Report
Exports the data on the current GUI as a report.
Commonly Used Shortcuts

The commonly used shortcuts of the OTNM2000 are described in Table 2-13.
Table 2-13
Shortcut
Description
F1
Open the online help.
Shift+F1
Open the alarm and performance help.
Ctrl+F
Ctrl+Shift+L
Ctrl+L
2-22
Description of Commonly Used Shortcuts
Open the Quick search dialog box to locate the object in the
topograph.
Lock the current operating GUI manually.
Open the Topo Layer Management tab to set layer-based
topology.
Ctrl+M
View the current alarms.
Ctrl+H
View the alarm history.
Ctrl+U
View the current performance.
Ctrl+P
View the performance history.
Ctrl+W
View the far-end port information of the selected NE.
Ctrl+K
Add a connection.
Ctrl+Insert
Copy the NE.
Shift+Insert
Paste the copied NE.
Version: A
2.2.5
Object Tree
The object tree is located at the upper left part of the main screen. It supports the
following functions:
u
Displays the hierarchical relationship between all network objects managed by

the OTNM2000.
Provides the alarm status LEDs for users. Via the object tree pane or topology
view, users can focus on the alarm and status information of the target NE or
NEs quickly and conveniently.
Version: A
2-23
The object tree pane is composed of three tabs, the Logical Tree pane, the
Operational Tree pane and the Browse Tree pane. The panes are described in
Table 2-14.
2-24
Version: A
Table 2-14
Pane
Description of the Object Tree Panes

Illustration
Description
Displays the logical relationships within the

current project as well as names of the NEs
and parts, alarm information, etc.
Logical Tree
Click an object in this tab, and the object will

be highlighted in the view pane right to the
pane. Select ViewLogical Tree in main
menu to display or close this tab.
Manages the current project.

Operational
Tree
Click an operational tool, its operation window

will appear in the view pane right to this tab.
Select ViewOperational Tree in main menu
to display or close this tab.
Displays the subnet list of the current project.

Click an object in this tab, and the object will
Browse Tree
be highlighted in the view pane right to the

pane. Select ViewBrowse Tree in main
menu to display or close this tab.
Version: A
2-25
2.2.6
Display Pane
The display pane is located in the middle of the main GUI to display the current
operation tab of the OTNM2000. For example, Figure 2-2 shows the Current Alarm
tab. The communication between users and the OTNM2000 is mainly achieved via
this pane.
Figure 2-2
2.2.7
Display Pane
Task Panel
The Task panel is located on the right side of the main screen, which displays the
operation commands that can be operated on the selected object. The operation
commands displayed on the Task panel vary with the object selected. For example:
The Task panel of the XSJ2 card is as shown in Figure 2-3.
2-26
Version: A
Figure 2-3
2.2.8
The Task Panel Pane
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the main screen. It shows the status
information of the current login user and the system.
Table 2-15
Icon
Description of Status Bar

Description
Displays the name of the current user. Click this icon to
open the User Management tab.
Displays the IP address of the server that you logged into.
Displays the current date and time of the OTNM2000 and
the time is consistent with the OTNM2000 server.
Displays the current connection status of network. Click
this icon to open the Network Status Monitor tab.
Version: A
2-27
2.3
Common Operations
The following introduces the commonly used operation in the OTNM2000.
2.3.1
Customizing the Table

The OTNM2000 provides the table customization function, which enables you to
adjust the column sequence, show / hide a column according to your preference.
When you open the GUI next time, it appears as what you customized.
Procedure
u
Right-click the title bar and select the columns to be displayed from the shortcut
menu. The columns not selected will not appear in the window.
2-28
Version: A
Click the shortcut icon
above the table to open the Select Column dialog
box. You can select the columns to be displayed in the title bar and the display
sequence.
Version: A
2-29
2.3.2
Quick Copy of Table Contents

Some tables in the OTNM2000 support text copy function, which enables you to
quickly copy the data in the table to another program.
Procedure
1.
Select data in a table in the OTNM2000, right-click in a blank area and select
Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu.
2-30
Version: A
2.
Switch to another program, for example, Notepad and press down Ctrl+V. The
selected data are pasted.
2.4
Viewing the Command Manager

You can view all the operation commands that users issue to the equipment,
including the start time, used time and other related information of the commands.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 2-16 to bring up the Command Manager window, as
shown in Figure 2-4.
Table 2-16
Operation
Access Method of Checking the Command Manager

Access Method
Click ViewCommand Manager in the main menu.
Viewing the
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolSystem
command
ManagementCommand Manager.
manager
Click
Version: A
2-31
Figure 2-4
2.
The Command manager Window
Users can check whether your management operations are successful in the
command manger.
2.5
Locking / Unlocking the Client End

The OTNM2000 supports the locking function to ensure the EMS security.
2.5.1
Locking the Client End

To prevent unauthorized operations, it is suggested to lock the OTNM2000 client
upon leaving.
Procedure
1.
Follow the steps below to lock the client end:
Manually lock the client end.

Select SystemLock the EMS or click
on the toolbar to lock the EMS
client.
Automatically lock the client end.

See Automatically Locking the Client End for setting. The client end will be
locked if no operations are performed in the set time.
2-32
Version: A
2.5.2
Unlocking the Client End

Users can perform this operation to make the OTNM2000 operational after it has
been locked.
Prerequisite
The OTNM2000 has been locked.
Procedure
1.
Enter the password into the dialog box as shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5
The Client Locking Alert Box
Note:
The OTNM2000 will automatically exit after users enter incorrect
passwords for three times successively.
2.
Version: A
Click OK to unlock the OTNM2000.
2-33
2.6
Monitoring the Network Status

Network status monitoring function is used to monitor the status of some important
information in the network, including ASON event information, inconsistency
between the database and equipment configuration as well as relevant service
information. Users can get an understanding about the operation information of the
equipment and the OTNM2000, which enables users to move to the next operation.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 2-17 to open the Network Status Monitor tab.
The Network Status Monitor tab has six sub-tabs: Event, Manager, Device,
Synchronize and Automatic NE Discovery.
Table 2-17
Access Method of Monitoring Network Status
Operation
Access Method
Select SystemNetwork Status Monitor in the main menu.
Network status
monitor
ManagementNetwork Status Monitor.

Click
2.
on the task bar of the OTNM2000 main GUI.
Click each sub-tab to perform the following operations:
Select Event to view the ASON-related event information.
Select Manager to view the inconsistent information between the database

and the equipment.
Select Device to view the configuration results reported by the equipment.
Select Synchronize to view the synchronization information of the active /

standby network management systems and related information of services
such as EMS_Dumper and EMS_Monitor. Indication information on this
page helps users analyze the network management service operation
status and the faults occur on the EMS.
Note:
The Automatic NE Discovery sub-tab is not available currently.
2-34
Version: A
2.7
Viewing the Version Information

Under some circumstances, i.e., before system upgrade, users should check and
record the version information of the OTNM2000.
Procedure
2.8
1.
Select HelpAbout OTNM2000 in the main menu.
2.
View the version information of the OTNM2000 in the dialog box that appears.
Current User Logout

Different OTNM2000 users have different operation authorities. You can log out of
the OTNM2000 and log in with a different user account to perform operations of
different levels.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemExit in the main menu and click OK in the displayed alert box.
2.
Type the username and password in the displayed Login dialog box and click
OK.
Version: A
2-35
2-36
Version: A
Security Management
The security management is used to prevent illegal operation of users and
guarantee the network data security. The security management includes user
management, user session management and EMS_f authority management.
Basic Concepts
Security Policy Management
Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division
Authorization Planning
Managing System Users
Managing User Sessions
Managing the EMS_f Authority
Network Management Tool
Version: A
3-1
3.1
Basic Concepts
The administrative objects of authorization and domain division include user groups,
operation groups, object groups and users. Understanding the concepts related to
the authorization and domain division helps plan and allocate user authorities.
User Group
A user group is a set of OTNM2000 users with the same management authorities.
For the users to be granted with the same authorities, you can add them into a same
user group and authorize the user group to make every user in the user group have
the same authorities, quickly allocating the authorities to users.
The OTNM2000 provides the following default user groups, among which
Administrators, Security Administrator Group, Devcfg, Eot Group and NMS Group
cannot be deleted and modified.
u
Administrators: This user group has the management domain over assembly of
objects and operation authorities over assembly of application operations.
Note:
The Assembly of Application Operations does not include the operation
authorities related to the security management.
u
Security Administrator Group: This user group has the operation authorities
related to the security management, including user management and online
user management.
Operator Group: This user group has the management domain over assembly
of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application operators by
default.
Maintainer Group: This user group has the management domain over assembly
of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application maintainers
by default.
Inspector Group: This user group has the management domain over assembly
of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application inspectors by
default.
3-2
Version: A
3 Security Management
Devcfg: This user group has the operation authorities of the Devcfg.
Eot Group: This user group has the operation authority of the Eot group.
NMS Group: This user group has the operation authority of the OTNMApi.
When the upper-level NMS system connects to the OTNM2000 through the
northbound interface, you need to create a user for the NMS on the
OTNM20000 and add the user into the NMS group. The NMS group is for
managing the access authorities of the NMSs.
If the default user groups do not meet the requirements, you can create user groups
of the two types: Domain Security Admin Group and Common User Group.
Security administrators (users in the Security Admin Group user group) can create
sub domain security administrator groups and common user groups, while the sub
domain administrator can only create common user groups. Creating a sub domain
administrator group equals creating a sub domain. The users belonging to the sub
domain administrator group have the operation authorities within the sub domain
range, that is, the object sets, operation sets, user groups and users created by a
sub domain administrator are only visible to the sub domain administrators in the
same group. When creating a common user group, the operation authority cannot
be set as the security management authorities.
Operation Group
An operation group is a set of operation authorities provided by the OTNM2000.
When a user or user group is bound with an operation group, this user or user group
has all the operation authorities of the operation group. By creating an operation
group and adding the required operation authorities into the operation group, you
can allocate the authorities to relevant users or user groups, implementing quick
allocation of user authorities.
The OTNM2000 EMS provides the following default operation groups:
u
Assembly of Application Operations: Includes the operation authorities of all NE

applications except the security management.
Assembly of Application Operators: Includes the operation authorities of

creating NEs, modifying NEs and deleting NEs of integrated configurations.
Assembly of Application Maintainers: Includes the authorities of alarm

confirmation.
Version: A
3-3
Assembly of Application Inspectors: Includes the authorities of viewing alarms

and performance.
Object Group
An object group is a set of manageable objects provided by the OTNM2000. When
a user or user group is bound with an object group, this user or user group has the
authorities to manage all the objects in the object group. By creating an object group
and adding the objects to be managed into the object group, you can specify a user
or user group to manage all the objects in the object group, lowering the
management cost. You can create object groups based on geographical regions,
network layers or equipment type.
The object group provided by the OTNM2000 by default is Assembly of Objects,
which cannot be deleted or modified. The objects include subnets, network blocks
and NEs, with the NE as the smallest granularity.
User
For the OTNM2000 client users, their usernames and passwords uniquely
determine their respective operation and management authorities on the
OTNM2000.
There are two default built-in users: admin and root. The "admin" user is a system
administrator, which cannot be deleted or modified.
Authority Allocation
Binding a user with an operation group, object group and user group implements the
authorization and domain division function. After a user logs in, the OTNM2000 only
displays the sets of equipment applicable to the user group that the user belongs to
and the user can only perform the operations defined in the bound operation group
on the equipment; The path list of the domain user are the paths among the NE
nodes managed by the user. The cross-domain paths will only appears in the global
user's path list, which means it will not appear in the domain user's path list.
Authorities can be assigned to a user through the following ways:
u
Adding a user into a specific user group so that the user has the authorities
assigned to the user group.
3-4
Version: A
Binding a user with a specific object group and operation group.
Note:
u
One user can be added into multiple user groups simultaneously,

and therefore the final authorities of the user are the user's original
authorities coupled with the authorities of the user groups to which
the user belongs.
It is recommended to bind a user with a or more user groups to

authorize the user instead of directly authorizing the user (by binding
the user with operation groups and object groups) or adjusting the
default user group for user authorization.
3.2
Security Policy Management

To enhance the access security of the OTNM2000 and prevent illegal operations,
you can set the security policies, such as automatic lockout, automatic exist and
login detection. You can plan and configure the security policies upon initial
installation and adjust them according to your management requirement later.
3.2.1
Automatically Locking the Client End

To prevent the improper operation, users can set the client end as the auto lock so
that the client end will turn to the lock status when no operation is performed in a
period of time.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemOption in the main menu to open the "System Option

Settings". Then select Automatic Function, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Version: A
3-5
Figure 3-1
2.
Setting Automatic Lockout of the Client End
Select Enable Auto Lock and enter the interval for locking the client end in the
Auto Lock Time Interval (Minute) text box. As shown in Figure 3-1, the client
end will be locked if no operations are performed in 5 minutes.
Note:
If Enable Auto-lock is not selected, the automatic lock function of the
client end will be disabled.
3.
3.2.2
Click OK.
Setting the Automatic Exit

To prevent the illegal operation by other users, you can set the automatic exit
function to make the client end exit when no operation is performed in a specified
period of time.
3-6
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Select SystemOption in the main menu to open the "System Option

Settings". Then select Automatic Function, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2
2.
Setting Automatically Exiting the Client End
Select Enable Auto-exit and enter the interval for exiting the client end
automatically in the Auto-exit Time Interval (Minute) text box. As shown in
Figure 3-2, 100 minutes is set, indicating the client end will exit automatically
when no operation is performed in 100 minutes.
Note:
If Enable Auto-exit is deselected, the automatic exit function of the client
end will be disabled.
3.
Version: A
Click OK.
3-7
3.2.3
Setting the User Login Detection

An IP address, after being specified in the login detection settings, can log into only
one client at a time.
Prerequisite
You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin
Group.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityUser Management to open the User Management tab.
2.
Click the User node, and click the Login Check Setup button in the right pane
or right-click in the right pane to select Login Check Setup.
3-8
3.
Click Add in the User Login Check Setup dialog box.
4.
Type the desired IP address in the IP Address text box, and click OK.
Version: A
5.
After completing the settings, click OK in the User Login Check Setup dialog
box.
3.2.4
Setting the Password Complexity Check

By default, the user password should meet the complexity requirements. The
OTNM2000 supports the password complexity check function. When this function is
disabled, the system will not conduct the password complexity check upon setting
the password.
Procedure
1.
Open the otnm.ini in the d:\OTNM\ui\ini\ directory.
2.
Search for CHECK_PASSWORD and set it as needed.
If CHECK_PASSWORD is set to 1, the password complexity check

function is enabled.
If CHECK_PASSWORD is set to 0, the password complexity check

function is disabled.
3.
3.2.5
Save and close the otnm.ini file.
Setting the Lockout Upon Incorrect Password Inputs

By default, the system locks a user if the user enters incorrect passwords three
times in a row. The OTNM2000 supports the lockout upon incorrect password
inputs. When this function is disabled, the user will not be locked even if the user
enters incorrect passwords in a row.
Version: A
3-9
Note:
The admin user will never be locked.
Procedure
1.
Open the securityserver.ini file in the d:\OTNM\md\etc\security\ directory.
2.
Search for CHECK_WRONG_PASSWORD_STATUS and set it as needed.
If CHECK_WRONG_PASSWORD_STATUS is set to 1, the lockout upon

incorrect password inputs is enabled.
If CHECK_WRONG_PASSWORD_STATUS is set to 0, the lockout upon

incorrect password inputs is disabled.
3.
3.3
Save and close the securityserver.ini file.
Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division

There are two scenarios applicable for authorization and domain division: initial
authorization and authority adjustment. See Table 3-1 for operations according to
your situation.
3-10
Version: A
Table 3-1
Scenario
Description of the Authority and Domain Division Scenario
Description
Sub Scenario
1.
Make a plan before the authorization to reduce
After installing the OTNM2000, you

Initial
need to configure and authorize the
authorization
administrator for managing sets of

equipment.
Make an authorization plan.

unnecessary authorization and maintenance
workload.
2.
Authorize the users.

Authorize the users according to the authorization
plan.
Adjust authorities in case of adding or removing of

equipment sets.
After new sets of equipment (NE or the entire
subnet) is deployed, you need to authorize the
When the initial authorization is
corresponding user group to manage the
completed, the authority maintenance
equipment. After any sets of equipment is
Authority
begins. When any sets of equipment is
removed, the authorities for managing the
adjustment
added or removed, or user authorities
equipment will be automatically removed from the

corresponding user or user group.
are changed, you need to adjust users'

authorities.
Adjust authorities in case of authority change.

You need to adjust users' authorities when their
authorities are required to change due to
administrative NE scope change, operation
authority change or role change.
3.4
Authorization Planning
Make a plan before the authorization to reduce unnecessary authorization and
maintenance workload. The authorization plan flow is as shown in Table 3-2.
Version: A
3-11
Table 3-2
Planning Flow
Authorization Planning Flow

Content
Principle
You can sort out the equipment

management division table as the original
data of authority management according
to your organization structure and
equipment networking.
Analyze the original data for subsequent
planning based on the following
Collecting original data of
requirements:
authority management.
Sort out the users managing the
same devices, that is, the users

belong to the same object group.
u
Sort out the users with the same

responsibilities, including not only
the same administrative equipment
but also the same operation
authorities.
Add the users with the same authorities
Configuring user groups
Classify users according their
into a same user group. For users with
responsibilities.
different authorities, plan different user

groups.
For the users with the same
Configuring object groups
Plan how to group the administrative
administrative scope, plan their object
objects to fulfill efficient authorization,
group together. For users with different
convenient for subsequent maintenance.
administrative scope, plan different object

groups for them.
Analyze the authorities required for users

Configuring operation
to fulfill the corresponding management
groups
and define these operation authorities

into operation set.
For user groups requiring the same

operation authorities, define the same
operation set for them. Otherwise, define
operation sets respectively for each user
group.
Sort and output the complete

authorization planning, providing
reference for authorization and
Outputting authorization
subsequent authority maintenance.
planning summary listing
The authorization planning summary
listing should include user group name,

user group members, management
domain and operation authorities.
3-12
Version: A
3.5
Managing System Users

The following introduces how to create, modify and delete system users, and assign
corresponding authorities to users.
3.5.1
Managing Object Groups

An object group is a set of manageable objects. Managing object groups help you
centrally manage the equipment objects.
u
The default object group of the OTNM2000 is Assembly of Objects, which

including all manageable objects.
When a user or user group is bound with an object group, this user or user
group has the authorities to manage all the objects in the object group.
Only the users in "Security Admin Group" and "Domain Security Admin Group"
can manage object groups.
The default object group cannot be deleted and only its description information
can be modified.
3.5.1.1
Viewing Object Groups

You can view the objects included in an object group to check whether the objects
meet the requirements.
Prerequisite
Group or Domain Security Admin Group.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityUser Management from the main menu to open the User
Management window.
2.
Expand the Object Group node in the left pane to view the existing object
groups.
Version: A
3-13
3.
Select the desired object group, click the Member tab on the right to view the
specific objects included in the object group.
Other Operations
u
Delete an object group.

Right-click the object group, select Del from the short menu and click Yes in the
displayed alert box.
Modify a object group.

Select the desired object group in the left pane, modify the corresponding
information in the right pane as needed and click Apply.
Note:
For the "Assembly of Objects", only the description information can be
modified.
3.5.1.2
Creating Object Groups

You can create user groups according to your needs.
Prerequisite
3-14
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Select one of the following access methods to open the Add Object Group
dialog box.
Function-
Access Method
al Item
Right-click Object Group in the left pane and select Add Object Group from the
Creating
shortcut menu.
an Object
Click Object Group in the left pane and then click the Add Object Group button
Group
in the right pane.

Click Object Group in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane
and select Add Object Group from the shortcut menu.
3.
Set the object group name and description information in the Basic Info tab
according to the planning.
4.
In the Member tab, expand the Device node under Object For Select on the
left, select the members and click
to add them into the Object
Selected on the right.
5.
Version: A
After completing the settings, click OK in the Add Object Group dialog box.
3-15
3.5.2
Managing Operation Groups

An operation group is a set of operations. By managing operation groups, you can
allocate and manage the operations to be performed on the equipment.
u
The default operation groups of the OTNM2000 include Assembly of

Application Operations, Assembly of Application Operators, Assembly of
Application Maintainers and Assembly of Application Inspectors.
When a user or user group is bound with an operation group, this user or user
group has all the operation authorities assigned to the operation group.
can manage operation groups.
The default operation groups cannot be deleted and only their description
information can be modified.
3.5.2.1
Viewing Operation Groups

You can view the operation objects included in an operation group to check whether
the authorities in the operation group meet the requirements.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Expand the Operation Group node in the left pane to view the existing
operation groups.
3.
Select the desired operation group, click the Member tab on the right to view
the specific operation objects included in the operation group.
3-16
Version: A
Other Operations
u
Delete an operation group.

Right-click the operation group, select Del from the short menu and click Yes in
the displayed alert box.
Modify an operation group.

Select the desired operation group in the left pane, modify the corresponding
information in the right pane as needed and click Apply.
Note:
The default operation groups cannot be deleted and only their description
information can be modified.
3.5.2.2
Creating Operation Groups

You can create operation groups when the existing operation groups do not meet
your requirements.
Prerequisite
Version: A
3-17
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Select one of the following access methods to open the Add Operation Group
dialog box.
Functional
Access Method
Item
Right-click Operation Group in the left pane and select Add Operation Group
Creating an
from the shortcut menu.
Operation
Click Operation Group in the left pane and then click the Add Operation
Group
Group button in the right pane.

Click Operation Group in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right
pane and select Add Operation Group from the shortcut menu.
3.
Set the operation group name and description information in the Basic Info tab
4.
In the Member tab, select the members under Operation For Select on the left
and click
5.
to add them into the Operation Selected on the right.
After completing the settings, click OK in the Add Operation Group dialog
box.
3-18
Version: A
3.5.3
Managing User Groups

A user group is a set of OTNM2000 users with the same management authorities.
For the users to be granted with the same authorities, you can add them into a same
user group and authorize the user group to make every user in the user group have
the same authorities, quickly allocating the authorities to users.
u
The OTNM2000 built-in default user groups include Administrators, Security

Administrator Group, Operator Group, Maintainer Group, Inspector Group,
Devcfg, Eot Group, and NMS Group.
When a user is bound with a user group, this user owns the authorities
assigned to the user group.
can manage user groups.
The default user groups "Administrators", "Security Administrator Group",

"Devcfg", "Eot Group" and "NMS Group" cannot be deleted and only their
description information can be modified.
3.5.3.1
Viewing User Groups

You can view the objects and operations corresponding to a user group so as to
check whether the authorities assigned to the user group meet the requirements.
Prerequisite
You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user in Security Admin Group or
Domain Security Admin Group.
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Expand the User Group node in the left pane to view the existing user groups.
3.
Select the desired user group in the left pane, and view the related information
of the user group in the right pane.
Version: A
3-19
Other Operations
u
Delete a user group.

Right-click the user group, select Del from the shortcut menu and click Yes in
the displayed alert box.
Modify a user group.

Select the user group in the left pane, modify the corresponding information in
the right pane as needed, and then click Apply.
3.5.3.2
Creating a User Group

You can create user groups according to your needs to centrally assign authorities
to users.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Select one of the following access methods to open the Add User Group
dialog box.
3-20
Version: A
Function-
Access Method
al Item
Right-click User Group in the left pane and select Add User Group from the
Creating a
shortcut menu.
User
Click User Group in the left pane and then click the Add User Group button in
Group
the right pane.

Click User Group in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane and
select Add User Group from the shortcut menu.
3.
Set the relevant parameter of the user group in the Add User Group dialog box
Note:
There are two types of user group: Domain Security Admin Group and
Common User Group.
u
Domain Security Admin Group: The Domain Security Admin Group,

with its management domain assigned by the security administrator,
only has the Security Management authorities, which cannot be
modified.
In case the network managed by the OTNM2000 is large with a
relatively high quantity of network objects, the security administrator
can divide the entire network into several domains and specify a
domain security administrator for each domain. The domain security
administrator responsible for a domain can create users for this
domain and assign authorities to users.
Common User Group: The management domain and operation

authorities of a common user group are assigned by the security
administrator or domain security administrator.
4.
Version: A
After completing the settings, click OK in the Add User Group dialog box.
3-21
3.5.4
Managing Users
The security administrator reasonably authorizes the EMS users to ensure the
users have necessary authorities to perform operations and meanwhile avoid
authority-exceeding operations.
Planning users should combine with the requirement of maintenance and
management, authorizing users with appropriate privileges and restraining them to
use the management and maintenance functions in corresponding situations. The
OTNM2000 V2.0R5 (Build04.20.05.50) uniquely identifies the user logged in and its
operation privileges by the username and password.
After the OTNM2000 V2.0R5 (Build04.20.05.50) is installed, it only provides the
default user: admin (username and password are admin) and the users (1, 2, 3, 4)
will be no longer used.
The admin user is the super user, who has all the operation and management
privileges. Other users will be directly or indirectly created by the admin user.
3.5.4.1
Viewing Users
You can view the related information of users, conveniently managing them.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
3-22
Expand the User node in the left pane to view the existing users.
Version: A
3.
Select the desired user in the left pane, and view the related information of the
user in the right pane.
Other Operations
u
Delete a user.
Right-click the user, select Del from the shortcut menu and click Yes in the
displayed alert box.
Modify a user.
Select the user in the left pane, modify the corresponding information in the
right pane as needed, and then click Apply.
Version: A
3-23
3.5.4.2
Creating a User
You can create OTNM2000 user accounts, assign them with corresponding
authorities, and then allocate the accounts to users with different responsibilities.
Note:
After creating users, you can add them into corresponding user groups
and authorize the user groups to avoid cross-over authorization. It is not
recommended to set management domain and operation authorities for
users respectively.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
2.
Select one of the following paths to open the Add User dialog box.
Functional Item
Path
Right-click User in the left pane and select Add User from the
shortcut menu.
Creating a User
Click User in the left pane and then click the Add User button in the
right pane.
Click User in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane
and select Add User Group from the shortcut menu.
3-24
Version: A
3.
See Table 3-3 to set the relevant parameter of the user in the Add User dialog
box according to the planning.
Table 3-3
User Settings
Parameter
Description
User name
Description
Name of the user. It is required and should contain at least 6

characters.
Description information of the user, for distinguishing users.
Password of the user. It should contain at least 8 characters. If
Password
Basic
Information
the password complexity check is enabled, the password

should contain three types of characters among upper-case
letters, lower-case letters, numbers and other characters.
Confirm
password
Type the password again.

Number of days in which the password is valid.
Password
If you check Unlimit, the password will never expire.
Valid Days
If you do not check Unlimit, set the specific number in the

text box. Value range: 1 to 180 days.
Version: A
3-25
Table 3-3
User Settings (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Maximum number of users allowed to use this account to log
into the OTNM2000.
Max Online
If you check Unlimit, it has no limit on number of users

using this account to log into the OTNM2000.
No.
u
If you uncheck Unlimit, set the specified number in the text

box. Value range: 1 to 32.
Disable This
If you check Disable This User, this user account cannot be
User
used.
Sets the user group to which this user belongs. One user can
User Group Belong To
be added into the user group of a same administrator type

(Security Administrator or Domain Security Administrator).
Object Group Belong To
Sets the object group to which this user belongs.
Operation Group Belong TO
Sets the operation group to which this user belongs.
Access Control List
4.
3.5.4.3
Sets the allowed IP range for login, allowing the users to login
from the client in the specified IP range.
After completing the settings, click OK in the Add User dialog box.
Disabling a User
You can disable a user account that is not used at present. The disabled user
cannot log into the OTNM2000.
Background Information
u
The users in the "Security Admin Group" can enable or disable all the other
users except themselves and the admin user.
The users in the "Domain Security Admin Group" can enable or disable the
users created by them.
The admin user cannot be disabled.
1.
2.
Expand the User node on the left navigation tree, select the desired user and
Procedure
select the Disable This User check box.

3-26
Version: A
3.
3.5.4.4
Click Apply to apply the settings immediately.
Unlocking Users
After being unlocked, the users can log into the OTNM2000 again.
Context
u
When a user's login attempts reach three times, the user will be locked. Only
the users in "Security Admin Group" and "Domain Security Admin Group" can
unlock users.
The OTNM2000 supports manual unlocking and automatic unlocking of the

locked user.
Prerequisite
Procedure
u
Manual Unlocking
1)
Select SecurityUser Management from the main menu to open the

User Management window.
Version: A
3-27
2)
Expand the User node in the left pane.
3)
Right-click the locked user, and select Unlock User from the shortcut
menu.
Automatic Unlocking
A locked user cannot log into the OTNM2000 until it is automatically unlocked
after specified time period.
Note:
The system automatically unlocks the locked user accounts in the
following ways:
3.5.4.5
Unlock user accounts 30 minutes later since the lockup.
Unlock user accounts at midnight.
Resetting the User Password

The following introduces how to reset the user password. In case a user forgets the
password, the password expires or the user login is denied, you need to reset the
password for the user.
Context
u
A user in Security Admin Group can reset the passwords for all the users
except admin and himself / herself.
A user in Domain Security Admin Group can reset the passwords for its
created users.
The password of Admin cannot be reset.
Prerequisite
3-28
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Expand the User node in the left pane.
3.
Right-click the corresponding user account, select Reset Password from the
shortcut menu.
4.
In the Reset Password dialog box, set the New Password and Confirm New,
and then click OK.
3.5.4.6
Modifying Your Password

To ensure the access security of the OTNM2000, it is suggested to modify your
password regularly.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemChange Password in the main menu.
2.
In the displayed Change Password dialog box, enter Old Password, New
Password and Confirm Password.
Note:
The password should contain at least 8 bytes. If the password complexity
check function is enabled, the password should contain three types of
capital letters, lowercase letters, numbers or other characters.
Version: A
3-29
3.
3.5.4.7
Click OK.
Setting the Access Control List

You can set the access control list to limit the OTNM2000 users to login only from
the specified IP address or network segment to ensure the network security.
The access control list applies only to the desired user.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
2.
Expand the User node on the left navigation tree,, select the desired user and
click Access Control List tab.
3-30
Version: A
3.
Click Add to open the Set IP Range dialog box.
4.
Set the Start IP Address and End IP Address, and click OK. The added IP
address range appears in the access control list.
5.
3.5.4.8
Click Apply to apply the settings immediately.
Querying User Authorities

The following introduces how to view the user authorities.
Prerequisite
You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to "Security Management
Group".
Version: A
3-31
Context
A user's original authorities coupled with the authorities of the user groups to which
the user belongs amount to the total authorities of the user. For example,
As shown in the above figure, the user "test" owns the following authorities:
u
For the objects in the Object Group A, the user has the operation authorities
defined in Operation Group A.
For the objects in the Object Group B, the user has the operation authorities
defined in Operation Group B.
However, the user "test" cannot perform the operations defined in Operation Group
B on the objects defined in Object Group A, and similarly the user cannot perform
the operations defined in Operation Group A on the object defined in Object Group
B.
Procedure
1.
Management window.
2.
Expand the User node in the left pane, and select the desired user.
View the user groups to which the user belongs. In the right pane, click
User Group Belong To to view the user groups to which the user is
added.
View the object groups to which the user belongs. In the right pane, click
Object Group Belong To to view the object groups to which the user is
added.
3-32
Version: A
View the operation groups to which the user belongs. In the right pane,
click Operation Group Belong To to view the operation groups to which
the user is added.
3.
Expand User Group in the left pane to view the object groups and operation
groups associated with the user groups that the user belongs to.
4.
3.5.5
Confirm the user's authorities through the query result of step 2 to 3.
Authorization and Domain Division Example

The following uses an example to introduce the operations related to the
authorization and domain division.
3.5.5.1
Authorizing a New User

The following takes assigning authorities for users in two regions as an example to
introduce how to create user accounts and assign authorities.
Scenario Description
There are region A and region B. The equipment in the two regions are centrally
monitored managed and maintained through the OTNM2000. To have the
equipment in region A monitored, managed and maintained by the staff in region A
and the equipment in region B by the staff in region B, you need to create user
accounts and allocate authorities for the staff in region A and region B respectively.
Procedure
1.
Create object groups.

Create object group A and object Group B according to the region, and add the
equipment sets in region A into object group A and the equipment sets in region
B into object group B.
For creating object sets, see Creating Object Groups.
2.
Create operation groups.

Adopt the default operation sets according to the users' responsibilities.
Version: A
3-33
The user responsible for monitoring the equipment corresponds to the

operation group Assembly of Application Inspectors.
The user responsible for operating the equipment corresponds to the

operation group Assembly of Application Operators.
The user responsible for maintaining the equipment corresponds to the

operation group Assembly of Application Maintainers.
For details of creating operation groups, see Creating Operation Groups.

3.
Create user groups.

According to the users' responsibilities, it is required to create six user groups,
as shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4
Creating User Groups
User Group
Type
Management
Authorities
Domain
Name
Inspector Group
Common User
Group
Operator Group
Common User
Group
Maintainer
Common User
Group A
Group
Inspector Group
Common User
Group
Operator Group
Common User
Group
Maintainer
Common User
Group B
Group
Object Set A
Assembly of Application Inspectors
Object Set A
Assembly of Application Operators
Object Set A
Assembly of Application
Maintainers
Object Set B
Assembly of Application Inspectors
Object Set B
Assembly of Application Operators
Object Set B
Maintainers
For details of creating user groups, see Creating a User Group.

4.
Create users.
Create user basic information, such as user name and password.
Set the user groups to which the users belong respectively. Suppose six
users A, B, C, D, E and F are created. You can add the users into the
respective user groups, as shown in Table 3-5. After being added into the
corresponding user groups, the users own the management domain and
operation authorities of their corresponding user groups.
3-34
Version: A
Table 3-5
Creating Users
User
User Group
Inspector Group A
Operator Group A
Maintainer Group A
Inspector Group B
Operator Group B
Maintainer Group B
Set the access control list to restrict users' login IP address to the specified
ones.
For details of creating user groups, see Creating a User.

After completing the above configurations, provide the user accounts for the
corresponding staff.
3.5.5.2
Adjusting Users' Authorities

The following takes deleting specific authorities of an existing EMS user as example
to introduce how to adjust the authorities of existing users.
Description
Delete the Modify NE authority of the EMS user B.
Adjustment Analysis
User's Original Authorities
Analysis
Description
In this example, you need to
unbind the user group Operator
Group A with the operation group
The EMS user

B belongs to
the nondefault user
group
Operator
Group A.
The authority adjustment
Operator Group A
requirement in this example does
Operators and then bind it with a
includes the non-default
not involve any changes of the
new operation group.
object group Object Set
management domain, and
If there are other users who
A.
therefore no adjustment to the
require the Modify NE authority in
object group is needed.
the user group, you need to

remove the user B from Operator
Group A and then re-assign
authorities to the user.
Version: A
3-35
User's Original Authorities
Analysis
Description
As the authority adjustment

requirement in this example
involves changes of operation
Operator Group A
authorities and modifying the
includes the default
default operation group is not
operation group
recommended, you need to create
Assembly of
an operation group that includes
Application Operators.
all the operation authorities in

Operators except the Modify NE
authority.
Procedure
1.
Create an operation group.

Create the operation group and select all the authorities in "Assembly of
Application Operators" with Modify NE removed.
For details of creating operation groups, see Creating Operation Groups.
2.
Modify the user group Operator Group A.

Modify the user group Operator Group A, unbind it with the operation group
Assembly of Application Operators and then bind it with the new operation
group.
For details of modifying user groups, see Viewing User Groups.
3.6
Managing User Sessions

You can manage user sessions to understand the online users and activity
information of users.
3.6.1
Monitoring User Sessions

You can monitor user sessions to understand the information of the online users.
u
3-36
Session: The connection established between the client and the server.
Version: A
A same user account can be used to log in on multiple clients. You can define
the maximum number of concurrent logins of a same user account. See
Creating a User.
Procedure
1.
Select Security managementOnline User Management in the main menu.
2.
In the Online User Management tab, view the information of online users.
Other Operations
Right-click in the Online User Management tab and select Refresh to refresh the
online users.
3.6.2
Logging Out a User

By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of online users and log
out the users that may threaten the system security as needed to ensure the system
security.
u
Creating a User.
Version: A
3-37
The objects of logging out user and sending messages are user sessions. For
example, the account user is used to log in to a same OTNM2000 server on
client A and client B concurrently, which generate session a and session b
respectively. When you log out the account user that generates the session a,
the account user that generates session b will not be influenced.
The admin user can log out all other users, while the users belonging to the
Security Admin Group can only log out ordinary users.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Select Security managementLogged-in User Management in the main

menu.
2.
3.
Right-click the corresponding user session and select Force Exit from the
shortcut menu.
4.
3-38
Enter the logout reason in the Force Exit dialog box and click OK.
Version: A
3.6.3
Sending Messages to Other Online Users

By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of online users. If
required, you can send messages to the user corresponding to the selected session
to communicate with the user in a different location about maintenance of the
OTNM2000.
u
Creating a User.
You cannot send messages to yourself.
1.
Select Security managementOnline User Management in the main menu.
2.
Procedure
Version: A
3-39
3.
Right-click the selected user session and select Send Message from the
shortcut menu.
Note:
The OTNM2000 supports sending message to multiple user sessions
simultaneously. You can press down the Ctrl or Shift key to select
multiple sessions.
4.
3-40
Enter the message content in the Send Message dialog box and click OK.
Version: A
3.6.4
Monitoring the User Activities

You can view the activity information of users to prevent unauthorized operations.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
2.
Expand the User node on the left navigation tree.
3.
Click the corresponding user and click Active Info in the right pane to view the
activity information of the user.
Note:
When anomaly information is detected, you can process the user
accordingly. For example, log out the user through the Online User
Management tab.
3.7
Managing the EMS_f Authority

Manage the operation authority of the f interface on the NE.
Version: A
3-41
Prerequisite
The EMU card supports the f interface authority management function.
Prerequisite
You have logged in as the admin user.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 3-6 to open the EMS_f Management tab.
Table 3-6
Access Method of Managing the EMS_f Authority
Operation
Access Method
Select SecurityEMS_f Management in the main menu, and select the
corresponding NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
.
Managing EMS_
f Authority
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolCard

ManagementEMS_f Management, select the desired NE in the lower
part of the Operational Tree pane and click
2.
Refer to Table 3-7 to configure in the EMS_f Management tab.
Note:
Set the configuration items in a batch manner conveniently via the
shortcut menu.
Table 3-7
Description of the Configuration Items in the EMS_f Management Tab
Parameter
f-interface setting flag
f-interface status
Code setting flag
User code
3-42
Description
Only after users select the f-interface setting flag of an NE can the
configuration performed on this f interface be valid.
For setting the f interface status of the corresponding NE to Refuse
of All, Set Enable of All or Set Read only of All.
Only after users select the code setting flag of an NE can the
configuration on the password of this f interface be valid.
For setting the password of the f interface belonging to the
corresponding NE.
Version: A
3.
Select the NE, right-click anywhere in the EMS_f Management tab and select
Set EMS_f Authority of Selected from the shortcut menu.
4.
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the EMS_f Management tab to perform the

following operations:
Selecting Get EMS_f Authority of All: Gets the f-interface status and
passwords of all the NEs in the OTNM2000, and check whether the EMS_f
settings of all NEs are correct.
Selecting Get EMS_f Authority of Selected: Gets the f-interface status

and passwords of the selected NEs in the OTNM2000 and check whether
the EMS_f settings of the selected NEs are correct.
3.8
Selecting Refresh: Refreshes the current tab.
Network Management Tool

The OTNM2000 provides the Web-based network management tool, which
supports managing network management processes, monitoring network
management server resources and importing / exporting configurations.
Prerequisite
The EMS_unmcmagent and EMS_unmcmservice services have been started up
at the server end.
Procedure
1.
Enter "http://IP:52302/nmtool" in the address bar of the browser (here, IP refers

to the IP address of the computer running the OTNM2000 server) to open the
login GUI as shown in the figure.
Version: A
3-43
2.
Enter the username and password, and click Login.
Note:
The system provides two users by default:
u
The username and password of the administrator are Admin.
The username and password of the ordinary query user are Query,
which only has the authority to view and export data.
3.
You can perform the following operations via the network management tool:
The Admin user is used as example.
Item
Description
The Process Management window lists all the services that can be
Process
monitored. Select one or more services in the service list to enable /
Management
stop / restart the selected service(s). It also supports enabling /

stopping / restarting the OTNM2000.
Resource
In the Resource Management window, you can view the information
Management
related to Operating System, EMS System and Database.
Historical Data
3-44
The Historical Data GUI graphically displays the usage of resources

related to Operating System, EMS System and Database.
Version: A
Item
Description
Log Management
including the operation name, operation time, operation terminal and
In the Log Management window, you can view the operation records,
operation result.
Settings
In the Settings window, you can set the save time of Historical Data
and Logs.
In the Import/Export window, you can import and export the
OTNM2000 configuration.
u
It supports setting the backup server. You can select local backup
or the FTP server and set the parameters related to the backup
Import / Export
server, including backup folder on the local server and the IP

address / port of the FTP server.
u
You can also set a timer to export the OTNM2000 configuration

automatically.
Version: A
3-45
Integrated Configuration
Management
The following introduces the concept of the integrated configuration and how to
manage the projects, network blocks, NEs, cards and manager services through the
integrated configuration in the OTNM2000.
Integrated Configuration
The integrated configuration implements the integration of the network data
configuration and management. It changes the configuration mode in which both the
Devcfg and the OTNM2000 are involved. The integrated configuration has the
following features:
u
Supports direct management (adding, editing and deleting) of projects, network

blocks, NEs and cards in the OTNM2000, without the need to configure and
manage them in the Devcfg first. This saves the time spent in repeated
configuration.
Allows multiple users to perform operations simultaneously in the OTNM2000

and synchronizes the data changes to other clients in real time, with no
influence caused to users. This improves the inconvenience that when multiple
users edit data simultaneously, the data changes saved at last will overwrite the
data changes of other users.
After the integrated configuration function is provided, the Devcfg functions as a

storage, mainly backing up and restoring data, with no data configuration any
longer.
Modifying Project Attributes

Managing Manager Services
Configuring the GNE
Managing Network Blocks
Managing NEs
Version: A
4-1
Managing Cards
Configuring NE IP Remotely based on SN
4-2
Version: A
4 Integrated Configuration Management
4.1
Modifying Project Attributes

The following introduces how to modify the attributes of the project in the
OTNM2000. After the project attributes are modified, the changes will be read from
the database in Devcfg, making sure the project information in Devcfg is consistent
with that in the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges.
Procedure
1.
In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a project and select Project
Attribute from the shortcut menu to open the Project Property dialog box.
2.
Modify the project name, structure configuration height and width parameters.
Click OK to complete modifying the project attributes.
4.2
Managing Manager Services

The NEs of different types communicate with the OTNM2000 using different
communication protocols. Before building network topologies of different types, it is
needed to understand the communication protocols used by NEs of different types
to communicate with the OTNM2000 so as to ensure normal communication
between the created NEs and the OTNM2000.
Version: A
4-3
To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to
configure the manager services for managing NEs at the EMS side. The following
introduces how to add, edit and delete manager services in the OTNM2000.
4.2.1
Adding a Manager Service

To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to
configure the manger services for managing NEs at the EMS side. The following
introduces how to add manager services in the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Select ConfigurationManager Service Config from the main menu to open

the Manager Service Config tab.
2.
Click Add to open the Add Manager Service dialog box and set the attributes.
The items with * are required, and others are optional.
4-4
Version: A
Note:
u
The IP address of a manager service must be unique in a project.

One manager service can manage multiple network blocks.
Under the same communication protocol type, the listening IP

address and port of the communication network card must be unique
in a project.
3.
4.2.2
Click OK.
Modifying a Manager Service

When the existing manager services do not meet the requirements for NE
management, you can adjust the manager services for managing network blocks or
NEs by modifying or switching them.
The following introduces how to modify or switch manager services for managing
network blocks in the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Version: A
4-5
Procedure (Modifying the Manager Service)

1.

2.
Modify the attributes of the manager service.

1)
Select the desired manager service and click Modify.
2)
Modify the attributes in the displayed dialog box. The items with * are
required, and others are optional.
Note:
u
The IP address of a manager service must be unique in a project.

One manager service can manage multiple network blocks.
Under the same communication protocol type, the listening IP

address and port of the communication network card must be unique
in a project.
4-6
Version: A
3)
Click OK.
Procedure (Switching Manager Services of Network Blocks)

1.
Select the manager service.
2.
Select the network block to be switched in the Part of configured this

manager service frame at the bottom (press Ctrl to select multiple ones
randomly; press Shift to select multiple ones successively).
3.
Click Switch Network Block Manager Program.
4.
Select the new manager service in the displayed Please Select Manager
Service dialog box.
Version: A
4-7
4.2.3
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click OK in the displayed alert box.
Deleting Manager Services

When a manager service is no longer used by NEs or network blocks, it can be
deleted to avoid redundant manager services and facilitate the maintenance. The
following introduces how to delete manager services in the OTNM2000.
Caution:
The manager services in use cannot be deleted. To delete it, modify the
manager service managing the network block to another one. For
modifying the manager service, see the Procedure (Switching Manager
Services of Network Blocks) section in Modifying a Manager Service.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.

4-8
2.
Select the desired manager service and click Delete.
3.
Version: A
4.
Click OK in the displayed Integrated Config Operation Information dialog

box.
4.3
Configuring the GNE

You can configure the gateway NE, including the gateway NE group and gateway
NE.
u
The gateway NE is directly or indirectly connected with the OTNM2000 via the
management interface (through the DCN network). A gateway NE coupled with
its connected non-gateway NE constitutes a Administrative Domain. The
OTNM2000 accesses the non-gateway NE of the administrative domain by way
of the gateway NE.
Configuring multiple GNEs can avoid service interruption caused by

malfunction of the gateway. When the gateway of the NE malfunctions, the
secondary gateway will take over and the NE will connect to the OTNM2000 via
the secondary gateway.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Select ConfigurationGNE Configuration to open the GNE Configuration

tab.
Version: A
4-9
2.
Configure the GNE.
Note:
When configuring the network block, you can click Config GNE (Group)
Quickly in the Add Part dialog box to configure the GNE (group).
Configure a single GNE.

a)
Click Add Gateway NE and set the Gateway NE IP, Gateway NE

Mask and Gateway NE Gateway in the GNE Details pane in the
lower part.
b)
Click Save GNE.
Configure multiple GNEs.

a)
Click Add GNE Group to add a GNE group in the Choose GNE pane.
b)
Select the corresponding GNE group in the Choose GNE pane, and
click Add GNE in the GNE Details pane in the lower part to set the
Gateway NE IP, Gateway NE Mask and Gateway NE Gateway.
c)
4-10
Repeat the above step to add other GNEs. Then click Save GNE.
Version: A
Other Operations
u
Delete a GNE group.

1)
In the Choose GNE pane, select the desired GNE group and click Delete.
2)
Click Save GNE.
Delete a GNE.
1)
In the Choose GNE pane, select the desired GNE and click Delete.
2)
Click Save GNE.
Delete a GNE from a GNE group.

1)
Select the desired GNE group in the Choose GNE pane, then select the
desired GNE in the GNE Details pane in the lower part and click Delete
GNE.
2)
Click Save GNE.
Note:
Before deleting a GNE (group), adopt another GNE (group) for the
network block to avoid communication interruption between the network
block and the OTNM2000.
4.4
Managing Network Blocks

The following introduces how to add, edit and delete network blocks in the
OTNM2000.
4.4.1
Adding a Network Block

The following introduces how to add a network block in the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
The manager service is created.
Version: A
4-11
Procedure
1.
In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a project and select Add
Network Block from the shortcut menu to open the Add Part dialog box.
2.
Specify the network block number, name and manager service.
Note:
u
The network block number must be unique, and a network block can
be managed only by one manager service.
The network block name must be unique.
The items with * are required, and others are optional.
3.
Add the Ma NE for the network block.

1)
In the Add Network Block dialog box, click
behind the Ma NE No. to
open the Add Ma NE dialog box.
4-12
Version: A
2)
Set the attributes of the Ma NE. The items with * are required, and others
are optional.
3)
4.
4.4.2
Click OK to complete adding the Ma NE.
Click OK to complete adding the network block.
Modifying Network Block Attributes

The following introduces how to modify the attributes of network blocks in the
OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a network block and select
Modify Network Block from the shortcut menu to open the Modify Network
Block dialog box.
Version: A
4-13
2.
Modify the network block No., name, Ma NE No., manager service according to
the actual situation.
Note:
An Ma NE must exists under each network block.
3.
4.4.3
Click OK to complete modifying the network block attributes.
Deleting a Network Block

The following introduces how to delete a network block in the OTNM2000.
Caution:
u
When a network block is deleted, all the NEs under the network
block will be deleted simultaneously.
Deleting a network block will break the services carried by the NEs
under the network block.
Prerequisite
4-14
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Right-click the network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Delete to
open the Delete Part dialog box.
2.
Confirm the network block to be deleted and click Delete.
Caution:
When the Delete Part dialog box appears as shown in the following
figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the
service carried by the network block to another network block according
to the prompt in red. Otherwise, deleting the network block directly will
greatly influence the service.
4.5
Managing NEs
The following introduces how to add, edit and delete network NEs in the OTNM2000.
4.5.1
Adding an NE
The following introduces how to add NEs in the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Version: A
The corresponding NE is created.

4-15
Procedure
1.
In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a project and select Add NE
from the shortcut menu to open the Add NE dialog box.
2.
Specify the NE attributes and configuration. The items with * are required, and
others are optional.
Note:
u
The names of NEs under a same network block cannot be repeated.
The switch No. can be a decimal or hexadecimal number

(automatically converted), which must be globally unique.
The IP address must be unique.
3.
Click OK to complete adding the NE.
Note:
After an NE is added, the system automatically adds the main switch card
(in the default slot) for the NE.
4.5.2
Modifying the NE Attributes

The following introduces how to modify the attributes of the NE in the OTNM2000.
4-16
Version: A
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Property to open the
Property dialog box.
2.
In the Property dialog box, modify the NE attribute and click OK to save your
changes.
4.5.3
Copying / Pasting an NE
Copying and pasting an NE of the similar parameters can simplify the procedures of
creating an NE.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Copy NE from
the shortcut menu.
Version: A
4-17
2.
Right-click the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and select
Paste NE from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box, as shown below,
displaying the parameters of the copied NE.
3.
Modify the parameters as needed and click OK.
Note:
u
The name of a NE must be unique under a network block.
The switch number can be a decimal or hexadecimal number

(converted automatically), which must be unique globally.
4.5.4
The IP address must be unique globally.
Moving an NE
The OTNM2000 allows you to move an NE to another network block.
Prerequisite
4-18
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Move NE from
the shortcut menu.
2.
In the displayed Move NE dialog box, set the network block No., NE No. and
NE name after the move. Then click OK.
Note:
The name and numbering of a NE must be unique under a network block.
4.5.5
Deleting an NE
The following introduces how to delete an NE in the OTNM2000.
Caution:
u
When an NE is deleted, the icon, card and topological connection of

the NE will be deleted simultaneously. Meanwhile, the services
carried by the NE will be broken.
When only the MA NE exists under a network block, deleting the MA

NE will also delete the network block to which it belongs. However,
when there are multiple NEs under a network block, the MA NE
cannot be deleted.
Version: A
4-19
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Delete NE to open the
Delete NE dialog box.
2.
Confirm the NE to be deleted and click Delete.
Caution:
When the Delete NE dialog box appears as shown in the following figure,
go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the service
carried by the NE to another NE according to the prompt in red.
Otherwise, deleting the NE directly will greatly influence the service.
4.6
Managing Cards
The following introduces how to add, replace, edit and delete cards in the
OTNM2000.
4.6.1
Adding a Card
The following introduces how to add a card in the OTNM2000.
4-20
Version: A
Note:
After an NE is added, the system will automatically add the core switch
card (in the default slot for the core switch card).
Prerequisite
u
The corresponding NE has been created.
1.
Right-click the null slot in the NE shelf view (using CiTRANS 620 as an example)
Procedure
and select the desired card from the shortcut menu.
4.6.2
Adding a Card Automatically

With the card automatic discovery function, the cards can be added quickly in a
batch manner, greatly improving the configuration efficiency.
Version: A
4-21
Prerequisite
u
The corresponding NE supports the card automatic discovery function.
The EMU card of the corresponding NE communicates normally and can be

managed.
Procedure
1.
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolCard management

Board Auto Find.
2.
Select the corresponding NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane
and click
to open the Board Auto Find tab.
Note:
In the Board Auto Find tab, the EMS Configured Board Type indicates
the types of cards configured in the OTNM2000; Device Configured
Board Type indicates the types of cards saved in the device EMU card;
Online Status indicates whether or not the card is present in the
corresponding slot of the device. If the card is present, it will automatically
synchronize the configuration of the device.
3.
4-22
Click Sync All, or select the corresponding slot and click Sync Selected.
Version: A
Note:
The synchronization refers to synchronizing the types of cards configured
on the device to the OTNM2000. After the synchronization, the cards
automatically discovered will be added. The Sync Result column of the
corresponding slot will display Synchronized successfully, and those
cards configured in the OTNM2000 but not present on the device will be
deleted. The Board Auto Find tab will no longer display the
corresponding cards.
4.
(Optional) Click Check to re-detect the card information of the corresponding

NE to confirm whether the card is added.
4.6.3
Replacing a Card
The following introduces how to replace a card in the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Right-click the card in the NE shelf view (using CiTRANS 620 as an example),
select Replace the Card from the shortcut menu and select the new card.
2.
Version: A
Confirm the target card and click Replace.
4-23
Caution:
When the Replace the Card dialog box appears as shown in the
following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and
adjust the service carried by the card to another card according to the
prompt in red. Otherwise, replacing the card may influence the service.
4.6.4
Editing a Card
The following introduces how to set the attributes of cards in the OTNM2000,
convenient for querying and maintaining the cards of the project.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Right-click the card in the NE shelf view and select Property from the shortcut
menu to open the Property dialog box.
4-24
Version: A
2.
4.6.5
Specify the attributes related to the card and click OK.
Deleting a Card
The following introduces how to delete a card in the OTNM2000.
Caution:
When a card is deleted, the topological connection of the card will be also
deleted. Meanwhile, the services carried by the card will be broken.
Prerequisite
Version: A
4-25
Procedure
1.
Right-click the card in the NE shelf view and select Delete the card from the
shortcut menu to open the Delete Board dialog box.
2.
Confirm the card to be deleted and click Delete.
Caution:
When the Delete Board dialog box appears as shown in the following
service carried by the card to another card according to the prompt in red.
Otherwise, deleting the card directly will greatly influence the service.
4.7
Configuring NE IP Remotely based on SN

The SN refers to the 12-digit serial number of the device NMU card, similar to the
MAC address of the computer. This SN must be unique in the entire network. The
SN has already been downloaded to the device NMU card upon delivery. Commonly,
the SN of each NMU card will be labeled on the card panel.
The OTNM2000 configures and downloads the IP address locally and remotely
based on SN to complete configuring IP addresses of the NEs in the entire network.
This version adds the EMS Device SN, indicating the device SN stored in the EMSside database. This provides convenience for you to compare the SN written into
the device with that labeled on the device (EMU Device SN), ensuring the
uniqueness of the SN in the entire network.
4-26
Version: A
1.
Configure the IP address of the local NE (local download).

Connect the network management computer directly with the local NE and the
OTNM2000 will obtain the SN of the NMU card of the local NE and configure
the IP address and switch. Then it downloads the mapping relationship
between SN and IP address to the local NE.
Note:
Local NE: Indicates the NE directly connected to the network
management computer through a network cable.
2.
Configure the IP address of the neighboring NE (remote download).

1)
After the IP address of the local NE is configured, the OTNM2000 will

obtain the SN of the NMU card of the neighboring NE based on the SN of
the NMU card of the local NE, and configure the IP address and switch of
the neighboring NE. Then it downloads the mapping relationship between
SN and IP address to the neighboring NE.
2)
The OTNM2000 obtains the SN of the NMU card of the neighboring NE

based on the NE whose IP address has already been configured. In this
way, it finally finds all NEs and completes configuring the IP addresses of
the NEs in the entire network.
Version: A
4-27
Note:
u
Neighboring NE: Indicates the NE directly connected to the source

NE through an optical path or network cable without no NEs between
them.
Only when the neighboring NE communicates with the source NE

smoothly through the MCC channel can the neighboring NE be
detected by the source NE.
If multiple neighboring NEs are found simultaneously, you can refer

to the corresponding project design document (listing the SNs of the
NMU cards corresponding to the NE) for the specific NE.
4.7.1
Configuring the Local NE IP Address

Complete the mapping between the local NE IP address and the SN.
Prerequisite
u
The project networking planning, NE IP address and domain planning is

prepared.
The cards of the local NEs have been configured.
The physical connection between the network management computer and the
local NE is completed.
1.
In the OTNM2000, click Configuration (C)NE IP Remote Config.
Procedure
4-28
Version: A
Note:
The NE IP Remote Config window displays the NE entries that have
completed the basic configuration.
2.
Set the local NE: In the NE IP Remote Config window, select a local NE entry,
and then select SettingsSet as Local NE.
3.
Query the SN of the local NE: In the NE IP Remote Config window, click
QueryRead Local NE SN.
Version: A
4-29
Note:
If there are multiple local NEs as the network management server is
connected through Hub, the SN will be randomly obtained. You need to
confirm the SN corresponding to the equipment according to the SN label
on the panel of the NMU card of the equipment.
4.
Set the IP address and switch-related parameters of the local NE: Click the
parameter bar according to Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
NE IP Address Settings
Item
Description
SN
Default setting, which does not need to be modified.

u
For the local NE, this item displays the network block / NE number
stored in the database.
Object
For the remote NE, this item automatically displays the network block /
NE number according to the neighboring SN detection sequence.
u
EMU Equipment
SN
NE number in descending order
SN of the NMU card.

It displays the IP address of the NE that detects the neighboring NE for the
Source NE IP
Address
neighboring NE.
For example, suppose NE 1 is the local NE with the IP address 11.18.1.1,
and NE 2 is the neighboring NE of NE 1, the Source NE Address of NE2 is
11.18.1.1.
Switch 1/2
The switch 1 and switch 2 are the NE IDs and the combination of switch 1
and switch 2 must be unique in the entire network.
u
u
IP address of the NE, which must be unique in the entire network.
As the local NE is connected with the network management server through
IP Address
network cables, the IP address of the NE must be in the same subnet as the
IP address of the network card on the network management server;
otherwise, detecting the SN of the neighboring NE may be influenced.
4-30
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
IP Gateway
No need to set.
Version: A
Table 4-1
NE IP Address Settings (Continued)

Description
Item
Note 1: For the parameters not listed above, the default settings will be adopted.
5.
Download the IP configuration of the local NE: In the NE IP Remote Config

window, click SettingsWrite Local NE IP.
6.
Save the IP address of the local NE and the switch-related parameter settings:
In the NE IP Remote Config window, select SystemSave Configuration.
Note:
After saving the settings, you can query the IP address, switch and other
information of the NE in the Modify NE.
4.7.2
Configuring the IP Address of the Neighboring NE

The following introduces how to set the mapping between the IP address and SN of
the neighboring NE.
Prerequisite
u
The project networking planning, NE IP address and domain planning is

prepared.
The IP address of the local NE is configured.
The attributes and card of the neighboring NE are configured.
The neighboring NE communicates with the source NE smoothly through the

MCC channel.
Version: A
4-31
Procedure
1.
In the NE IP Remote Config window, refer to the related project design

document and IP planning, and double-click the parameter bar to configure the
SN, IP address, switch and other information of other NEs.
2.
Click
3.
Obtain the SN of the neighboring NE: Select a local NE entry in the NE IP
to save the settings.
Remote Config window, and then select QueryFind Near NE by SN.
4.
Compare the SN of the NE automatically detected and the SN of the created

NE. Download the IP address If they are consistent. When the IP address is
downloaded, the NMU card is reset.
1)
For the NE whose SN is consistent with that of the NE automatically

detected, set the Source NE IP, which should be consistent with that of the
NE automatically detected.
2)
Select the NE entry whose IP address is to be downloaded in the NE IP

Remote Config window, select SettingsWrite Remote NE IP.
4-32
Version: A
Caution:
u
Downloading the IP address of the NE means downloading the

mapping between the SN and the IP address. The SN deleted is
used to compare with the SN labeled on the NMU card and check
whether the SN manually configured is correct. If there are
inconsistent, the SN automatically detected should be taken as the
standard one. Do not download IP address to the NE automatically
detected and generated before the comparison.
The number of NEs to which the IP addresses are downloaded

cannot exceed 20. Once the limited is exceeded, the OTNM2000 will
gives the corresponding prompt. In this situation, you can download
them gradually.
5.
Detect other neighboring NEs based on the neighboring NE whose IP address

is configured. Repeat Step 4 to complete configuring the IP addresses of the
neighboring NEs.
6.
Repeat Step 5 to compete configuring the IP addresses of the NEs in the entire
network and then close NE IP Remote Config window.
Version: A
4-33
Topology Management
Topology management is used to create and manage the topology structure of the
entire network, so as to reflect the network connection status and operation status of
the equipment. You can view the topological objects and real-time alarms on the
topology view.
Topology Construction Flow

Creating the Topology
Adjusting the Topology Display
Layer-based Topology
Deleting a Topological Object
Viewing the Topology
Managing the DCN Network
Version: A
5-1
5.1
Topology Construction Flow

The construction flow of the network topology describes the construction
procedures of the entire physical topology as well as the relationship among the
operation tasks. The construction flow of the network topology is as shown in
Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1
Network Topology Construction Flow
The construction flow of the network topology is detailed in Table 5-1.
5-2
Version: A
5 Topology Management
Table 5-1
Description of the Network Topology Construction Flow
Operation
Description
Before deploying NEs in the topology view, design the
layers in the physical topology and the location of NEs.
Designing the physical topology
The physical topology should on one hand reflect the

topological structure of the actual communication
network and on the other hand provides convenience for
daily maintenance.
Adding topological
Managing
topological
nodes
Managing
fiber
connections
nodes
Deleting
topological nodes
Adding fiber
connections
Deleting fiber
connections
Adds NEs into the main topology.

Deletes NE nodes from the main topology without
deleting the corresponding NEs. However, this operation
may cause influence on services and fiber connections.
Adds fiber connections in the main topology.
Deletes fiber connections from the main topology.
Setting the
Selects whether to display the bureau name, IP address
topology display
and logical address of NEs in the main topology.
Setting the NE Icon
Selects the icon of the NE according to the NE type.
Setting the fiber

connection
attribute
Adjusting
Setting the area
topology
size
display
Setting the
background image
Setting the color of
the NE
Sets the properties (width, dotted or solid line) of the line

according to the link rate.
Sets the display area size of the main topology.
Sets the background image of the main topology.
Adjusts the color of the NE icon.
Setting the color of

the fiber
Sets the color of the fiber connection.
connection
Setting the
Topology
topology layers
Layer
Management
Version: A
For convenient management, you can place the

topological objects in the same area or of the similar
attributes at a same topology layer.
Modifying the
After setting the topology layers, you can modify the
topology layer
basic attributes and members of the topology layers as
attribute
needed.
5-3
5.2
Creating the Topology

Creating the topology includes adding topological nodes and topological fiber
connections.
5.2.1
Adding a Topological Node

When an NE is added, the corresponding topological node will not be added in the
main topology. You need to drag the NE onto the main topology manually.
Procedure
1.
Click the object in the Logical Tree pane, press the left mouse button and drag
it to the desired location on the main topology view.
5.2.2
Adding a Fiber Connection

NEs communicate with each other through the fiber connection. Only after creating
the corresponding fiber connection in the main topology can you perform service
configurations.
Prerequisite
u
The corresponding topological nodes are added.
1.
Right-click the source NE in the main topology and select Add Link from the
Procedure
shortcut menu.
2.
5-4
Click any NE. The Add Link dialog box appears.
Version: A
Note:
You can click the sink NE, or click any NE and then set the sink NE
information manually in the Add Link dialog box. The fiber connection
will automatically adjust to connect the desired sink NE.
3.
See Table 5-2 to set the fiber connection attribute according to the project
planning. Then click Add to save the settings.
Table 5-2
Description of the Fiber Connection Attributes
Configuration Item
Description
Indicates the fiber connection sequence number of the
Link No.
Related Link
Do not select this item.
Link Cost
Not required.
Source port info
Version: A
NE.
Indicates the card corresponding to the source port. Click

Board
to select the card from the drop-down list.
5-5
Table 5-2
Description of the Fiber Connection Attributes (Continued)
Configuration Item
Description
Port
to
Selects the port corresponding to the card. Click

select the port from the drop-down list.
Not required. By default, for the connection of NEs within

Port in link
a network block, select this item; for the connection of

NEs in different network blocks, do not select this item.
Part No
Sets the numbering of the NE and the network block that
NE No
the NE belongs to. After completing settings, click Apply.
Board
Indicates the card corresponding to the sink port. Click

to select the card from the drop-down list.
Dest port info

Port
to
Selects the port corresponding to the card. Click

select the port from the drop-down list.
Not required. By default, for the connection of NEs within

Port in link
a network block, select this item; for the connection of

NEs in different network blocks, do not select this item.
Sets the remark information of the fiber connection. You
Remark
can select ViewTopo DisplayShow link remark to

show the remark information of the fiber connection in the
main topology.
5.3
Adjusting the Topology Display

The OTNM2000 enables you to adjust the topology display according to your
preference.
5.3.1
Setting the Topology Display

You can set whether to display the bureau name, IP address and logical address of
NEs in the main topology.
Procedure
1.
Select the submenus under ViewTopo Display in the main menu or rightclick in the blank area of the Main Topology tab and select the corresponding
shortcut menus to perform the following operations:
5-6
Version: A
Select Bureau Name to display the corresponding bureau name under the
NE in the Main Topology tab.
Select IP Address to display the corresponding IP address under the NE

in the Main Topology tab.
Select Logic Address to display the corresponding logical address under

the NE in the Main Topology tab.
Select Connection Number to display the corresponding bureau

connection numbering under the NE in the Main Topology tab.
Select Switch to display the corresponding dialing switch under the NE in

the Main Topology tab.
Select Show link remark to display the corresponding link remark

information in the Main Topology tab.
Select Show NE in the network block only to only display the NEs in the
selected network block in the Main Topology tab.
5.3.2
Setting the NE Icon

You can modify the icon of the corresponding NE type displayed in the main
topology according to your preference.
Procedure
1.
Select ViewTopo SettingNE Icon in the main menu to open the NE Image
Setting dialog box.
2.
Double-click the NE image corresponding to the desired NE type and select the
new icon from the drop-down list.
Version: A
5-7
Figure 5-2
3.
5.3.3
Setting the NE Icon
Click OK.
Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute

Sets the properties (width, dotted or solid line) of the line according to the link rate.
After completing the settings, the topology will determine the rate of the link based
on the display of the fiber connection.
Procedure
1.
Select ViewTopo SettingLine Property in the main menu to open the

Line settings dialog box.
2.
In the Line settings dialog box, select the link rate, line width and line type
(solid or dashed line).
5-8
Version: A
Figure 5-3
3.
Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute
Click OK. In this example, the link of the GE rate is displayed as dotted line, as
shown in the following figure.
5.3.4
Expanding / Collapsing Topological Links

There are commonly multiple topological links between two NEs, presenting too
many links in the main topology which are inconvenient for displaying and viewing.
Version: A
5-9
For better display and viewing, the OTNM2000 supports link aggregation in case of
multiple links between two NEs to simplify the complicated topology view.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
Make sure the
button pops up.
2.
Click any of the multiple links between two NEs to implement link aggregation,
as shown in the figure.
Note:
The +(*) appears on the link after the aggregation. The asterisk *
indicates the number of links aggregated.
Other Operations
Double-click the link after the aggregation to expand the links.
5.3.5
Setting the Size of Display Area

You can set the size of the display area of the main topology.
Procedure
5-10
1.
Select ViewTopo SettingRegional Size in the main menu.
2.
In the Topology Size dialog box, set the width and height of the display area.
Version: A
Figure 5-4
3.
5.3.6
Setting the Topology Area Size
Click OK.
Setting the Background Image

You can set the background image of the main topology according to your
preference.
Procedure
1.
Select ViewTopo SettingBackground image in the main menu.
2.
Select the background image from the folder and click OK. The image appears
as the background image of the main topology, as shown in the figure below:
Version: A
5-11
Figure 5-5
Setting the Background Color
Other Operations
Select ViewTopo SettingUse default background in the main menu to restore
the original background of the main topology.
5.3.7
Setting the Color of the NE

You can set the colors of NEs displayed in the main topology according to your
preference.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the NE in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected
NE colorModify net element color from the shortcut menu.
5-12
Version: A
2.
In the Color dialog box, select the desired color and click OK. The icon of the
NE appears in the new color. In the following figure, the color of the NE icon in
red rectangle is set to purple.
Figure 5-6
Setting the Color of the NE
Other Operations
Right-click the NE in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected NE
colorRestore net element color from the shortcut menu to restore the default
color of the NE.
5.3.8
Setting the Color of the Line

You can set the colors of lines (fiber connections) displayed in the main topology
according to your preference.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the line in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected
lines colorsCustomized Color from the shortcut menu.
2.
In the Color dialog box, select the desired color and click OK. The line appears
in the new color. In the following figure, the color of the line in red rectangle is
set to purple.
Version: A
5-13
Figure 5-7
Setting the Color of the Line
Other Operations
Right-click the line in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected lines
colorsRestore the selected NE color from the shortcut menu to restore the
default color of the line.
5.4
Layer-based Topology
The OTNM2000 manages the network topology through the main topology. You can
understand the networking status information and monitor the running status in real
time in the topological view.
The OTNM2000 of the R0550 version implements the layer-based topology display,
which graphically displays topological connections among NEs and NE groups,
including the paths among nodes and the information of NEs based on layers. This
helps locate and manage NEs, improving management efficiency.
u
Manages the topology based on layers and changes the topological view in the
previous version, in which too much NEs are displayed with no layer-based
display function, inconvenient for locating commonly concerned objects.
Reasonably places the stations in an area at a same layer, convenient for you
to quickly select the source / sink stations and set the routes in the topology,
without the need to drag over the topology. This greatly improves the service
configuration efficiency.
5-14
Version: A
5.4.1
Setting Topology Layers

The topology displays the tree on the left and the graph on the right. On the left is
the navigation tree displaying the topological objects and the layer relationship
among them; on the right is the topological chart displaying all the topological
objects in the current physical topology view and their location relationship. For
convenient management, the topological objects in the same area or of the similar
attributes can be placed and displayed at a same topological layer.
Context
According to the actual network, the layer-based topology of the R0550 version
supports classifying objects into different layers by device type or NE type, meeting
different management requirements.
u
It supports quick display of layer-based topology through multiple ways,

including system-defined layers and layers classified according to device type.
The Default Layer is a system-defined layer. All the uncategorized NEs will be
added to this layer.
Each NE can be added into only one layer.
This version supports up to nine topological layers.
Even when an NE is deleted from the customized view, it exists in the

corresponding physical view.
Procedure
1.
Select ViewTopo Layer Management to open the Topo Layer

Management tab.
2.
Click
to open the "Add Topology Layer" dialog box. Then select Basic
Property tab to set the name and remark information of the topological layer.
Version: A
5-15
3.
Select the Member tab, select the desired NE in the NE to be Selected box
and click
or
to add it into the Selected NE box.
Note:
: Indicates adding the selected objects in the left box into the
right box.
u
: Indicates adding all the objects in the left box into the right
box.
The object selection supports fuzzy query. Click
to filter the
objects by NE name or NE type.

4.
5-16
Click
to save the topology layer settings.
Version: A
Other Operations
The other shortcut icons on the toolbar of the Topo Layer Management tab are
described in the following figure:
Icon
Description
Deletes the selected layer.
Modifies the selected layer.
Moves up the selected layer.
Moves down the selected layer.
Categorizes all NEs into Core Layer, Convergence Layer and
Access Layer according to their device type.
Note: When this button is clicked, the customized layers
will be deleted and all the NEs will be re-categorized
according to their device types.
5.4.2
Modifying Topology Layers

After setting the topology layers, you can modify their basic attributes and members
as needed.
Procedure
1.
Select ViewTopo Layer Management to open the Topo Layer

Management tab.
2.
Modify basic attributes of the topology layer.

1)
Select the desired layer and click
to modify the layer name and remark
information.
Version: A
5-17
2)
3.
Click OK.
Adjust the members at the layer.
Method 1
a)
Select the desired layer and click
to open the Modify Property of
Layer dialog box.
b)
Select the Member tab and click
or
to adjust the
members.
c)
Click OK.
Method 2
a)
Double-click the desired layer, or select the desired layer and click the
Detail button at the lower left corner of the Topo Layer Management
window to open the Detail pane.
b)
5-18
Expand the members at the selected layer.

Version: A
c)
Right-click the member to be adjusted and select Delete or Move to

to delete the member or move it to another layer.
5.4.3
4.
Click
to save the topology layer settings.
5.
In the displayed dialog box that prompts successful saving, click OK.
Viewing the Layer-based Topology

The following introduces how to view the topology based on layers to understand
the structural information of the topology.
Context
The layer-based topology adopts the display mode similar to the way how the map
is browsed (a city includes the information of all its urban areas and streets). The
layer-based topology display adopts this browsing mode. When you select the layer
at the top of the Current View drop-down list, all the NEs at the selected layer as
well as those at the layers under the selected one will be displayed in the main
topology. The layer-based topological view has the following functions:
u
It supports layer-based navigation, which means scrolling up / down the mouse

to zoom in / out the topology will switch the topology among different layers.
When the current view is locked, zooming in / out the topology will not switch
the current view.
Version: A
A network block can be taken as an independent layer to view the NEs under it.
The NEs uncategorized into layers will be displayed in Default Layer.

5-19
Procedure
1.
View the topology information in the Main Topology tab.
2.
Click
to the right of Current View to select the desired layer from the drop-
down list.
Note:
The topological chart will display the NEs at the selected layer and those
at the layers under the selected one. For example, if you select Core
Layer, the topological chart displays the members at the access layer,
convergence layer and core layer.
5-20
Version: A
Shortcut Icon Description

The shortcut icons on the toolbar at the top of the topological chart are described in
the following figure.
Icon
Description
Locks / unlocks the current view. When the current view is
locked, zooming in / out the topology will not switch the
current view.
Switches to the selected mode, in which you can select the
topology objects.
Switches to the drag mode, in which you can move the
topology view.
Opens / closes the thumbnail view.
Opens / closes the editing mode, in which you can drag the
NE.
Opens the Chart pane to view the object type and status
information corresponding to each icon in the topology view.
Zoom in the topology.
Zoom out the topology.
Restore the topology to the original size.
Select the display size of the topology.
Other Operations
u
If the current view is not locked, scrolling the mouse wheel or zooming in / out
the topology will switch the topology among different layers according to the
scaling.
If the current view is locked, scrolling the mouse wheel or zooming in / out the
topology will scale the current view to reach the best display.
Select a network block in Logical Tree, and then select ViewTopo Display
Show NE in the network block only in the main menu to only display the
NEs under a specific network block.
Version: A
5-21
5.5
Deleting a Topological Object

Deleting the topology includes deleting topological nodes and topological fiber
connections.
5.5.1
Deleting a Fiber Connection

During network adjustment, you can delete the fiber connection between NEs from
the main topology as needed.
Deleting a fiber connection will also delete the services on the fiber connection.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
In the Main Topology tab, right-click the desired fiber connection and select
Delete from the shortcut menu to open the Delete Fiber Connection dialog
box.
2.
5-22
Confirm the fiber connection to be deleted and click Delete.
Version: A
Caution:
When the Delete Fiber Connection dialog box appears as shown in the
following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and
adjust the relevant services according to the prompt in red. Otherwise,
deleting the fiber connection directly will greatly influence the service.
5.5.2
Deleting a Node
When adjusting the network topology, you can delete the topological nodes from the
main topology according to your needs.
u
Deleting the NE node from the topology will not delete the NE object; however,
deleting the NE will delete the NE node from the topology simultaneously.
Deleting a topological node will also delete the services carried by the node and
its fiber connections.
Version: A
5-23
Procedure
1.
In the Main Topology tab, right-click the desired NE and select Delete node
from the shortcut menu to open the Delete node dialog box.
2.
Confirm the node to be deleted and click Delete.
Caution:
When the Delete node dialog box appears as shown in the following
service carried by the NE to another NE according to the prompt in red.
Otherwise, deleting the node directly will greatly influence the service.
3.
5.6
In the displayed Delete Prompt alert box, click Yes to delete the current node.
Viewing the Topology

By viewing the topology, you can understand the structure of the entire topology.
5.6.1
Viewing the Main Topology

By viewing the main topology, you can understand the network layout and the
running status of NEs.
5-24
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Select the Main Topology tab and view the network of the monitored NEs and
related information.
2.
See Table 2-12 to lock, edit, or zoom in / out the main topology using the
toolbar displayed above the Main Topology tab.
Other Operations
Right-click and select the corresponding shortcut menus to perform the following
operations:
u
Right-click in the Main Topology tab and select Save Topology As Image
from the shortcut menu to save the current topograph as an SVG file.
Right-click in the Main Topology tab and select Export from the shortcut menu
to open the Output Report. View the configuration report of the OTNM2000
subnet structure and export the report as an XML, Txt, CSV or XSL file.
5.6.2
Viewing the Airscape

The Airscape is used to display the full view thumbnail of the topograph. When the
main topology tab only displays part of the view, you can browse full view of the
current view via Airscape and locate the display area of the topograph.
Procedure
1.
Click
on the toolbar of the main topology or
at the lower right corner of
the main topology to open the Airscape pane and view the full view thumbnail
of the topograph.
Note:
The area in red rectangle of the Airscape pane is the visible area of the
topology. You can click the desired location in the airscape or drag the
red rectangle to locate the display area of the main topology.
Version: A
5-25
5.6.3
Viewing the Subnet

You can view the subnets and their corresponding NEs in the main topology.
Besides, collapsing or expanding subnets are supported in the topology view.
Prerequisite
The subnet has been created in the Devcfg.
Procedure
1.
Click the corresponding subnet in the Browse Tree tab and view the selected
subnet and its NEs in the Main Topology tab, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8
2.
Viewing the Subnet
(Optional) In the Main Topology tab, right-click an NE in the subnet and select
Collapse to Subnet from the shortcut menu. The NE nodes in the subnet
appear as the subnet icon.
5-26
Version: A
Figure 5-9
3.
Collapsing Subnet
(Optional) In the Main Topology tab, right-click the subnet icon and select
Expand the Subnet from the shortcut menu to expand the NEs included in the
subnet.
5.6.4
Searching Objects
The object searching function enables you to quickly locate the desired object.
The search objects include NEs, network block and shelves.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemObject Searching in the main menu to open the Object

Searching box under the toolbar.
2.
Version: A
Click
to select the search object from the drop-down list.

5-27
3.
Enter the keyword in the text box according to the prompt in the text box.
Note:
When searching the object, the system adopts dynamic fuzzy search,
which means in the process of entering the keyword, the drop-down list
dynamically displays the result matching the entered content.
4.
Select the desired object from the drop-down list and the object is marked in
the Logical Tree pane and the Main Topology tab.
5-28
Version: A
5.7
Managing the DCN Network

The OTNM2000 supports managing the DCN network of the PTN device. In the
PTN network, the OTNM2000 establishes communication with the device through
the DCN and manages / maintains the device.
The DCN network is composed of the OTNM2000, gateway NE, non-gateway NE
and the communication networks among them. A gateway NE coupled with its
connected non-gateway NE constitutes a Administrative Domain. The OTNM2000
accesses the non-gateway NE of the administrative domain by way of the gateway
NE.
The DCN can be divided into two types in terms of the DCN message bearing
mode: Out-of-band DCN and In-band DCN.
u
In-band DCN: Indicates the DCN network that uses the service channel
provided by the device to transmit the network management information.
Out-band DCN: Indicates the DCN network that uses the channels other than
the service channel to transmit the network management information.
Version: A
5-29
DCN Management
The OTNM2000 supports the following DCN network management functions:
u
DCN topology management
Displays the icon of the OTNM2000 and the out-of-band connections

between the OTNM2000 and NEs in the topograph.
Displays the out-of-band connections between NEs in the topograph.
Displays the routes from the OTNM2000 to the NE and from the
OTNM2000 to the NE by way of Ma / Mb.
DCN configuration management
Disables / enables the MCC channel.
Disables / enables the out-of-band communication network (the device F

interface), disallowing shutdown of the directly connected NE.
DCN status monitoring
Queries the status of the MCC channel (NE network status: disabled /
enabled, UP / DOWN).
Queries the status (disabled / enabled) of the out-of-band communication

network (the device F interface).
DCN alarm management
Queries the alarms of the MCC channel.
Queries the alarms of the out-of-band communication network (the device

F interface).
Automatic discovery of topological links

The OTNM2000 detects new physical links between NEs according to the
OSPF neighbor quantity reported by the device.
5.7.1
DCN Topology Management

The DCN topology management includes adding / deleting network devices,
querying NE ports and viewing the NE-to-NE routes.
5-30
Version: A
The DCN management function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite
is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.
Procedure
1.
Switch to the DCN topology. Select ViewDCN Topo to switch between the
main topology and the DCN topology.
2.
Add a network device.

The network devices include Router and Server.
1)
Right-click in the blank area of the Main Topology tab and select Add
Network Device from the shortcut menu to open the Add Network
Device dialog box.
2)
3.
Set the corresponding parameters and click OK.
Add an Ethernet connection.

1)
Right-click a network device or NE and select Add Ethernet Connection

Version: A
5-31
2)
Click the desired target network device or NE to complete the connection.

The Ethernet connection appears in blue, as shown in the following figure.
4.
View the NE-to-NE route.

1)
Right-click the corresponding NE and select Set Source NE from the

shortcut menu.
2)
Right-click the target NE and select Set Destination NE from the shortcut
menu.
3)
View the NE-to-NE route in the DCN topology. The Ma / Mb appears as a /

b in the DCN topology, which is the same as the display in the main
topology.
Note:
For the concepts of Ma and Mb, see Management Model.
5-32
Version: A
5.7.2
DCN Configuration Management

The DCN configuration management includes managing the NE F interface and the
MCC channel.
5.7.2.1
Managing the MCC Channel Status

The OTNM2000 supports setting the shutdown status of the MCC channel. Only
when the Shutdown Status of the ports of the two NEs is enabled can they
communicate with each other.
The MCC channel status function only supports the PTN device and the
prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select MCC Channel Status to
open the MCC Channel Status tab.
3.
Version: A
In the MCC Channel Status tab, set the shutdown status of the port.
5-33
4.
Right-click in the blank area of the MCC Channel Status tab and select
Channel Setting from the shortcut menu to issue the channel setting command
to the device.
5.
Right-click in the blank area of the MCC Channel Status tab and select
Refresh from the shortcut menu to view the status of the port and confirm
whether the setting is successful or not.
5.7.2.2
Managing the NE F Interface

The F interface of the PTN NE can be shut down. However, the F interface directly
connected with the OTNM2000 cannot be shut down.
The NE F interface management function only supports the PTN device and the
Procedure
1.

ManagementNE-Port Management.
2.
and click
5-34
to open the NE-Port Management tab.
Version: A
3.
Click the Shutdown Status column of the corresponding NE to set the

shutdown status of the NE F interface.
4.
After completing the settings, right-click in the blank area of the NE-Port
Management tab and select Set Shutdown Status from the shortcut menu
and set the "Set the shutdown status" command to the device.
5.
Right-click in the blank area of the NE-Port Management tab and select
Refresh from the shortcut menu and view the status of the F interface to
confirm whether the setting is successful or not.
5.7.3
DCN Status Monitoring

The DCN status monitoring function includes querying the status of the MCC
channel and the status of the out-of-band communication network (the device F
interface).
Version: A
5-35
5.7.3.1
Querying the MCC Channel Status

Querying the MCC channel status helps confirm the shutdown status of the
corresponding device port. Only when the shutdown status of the ports of the two
NEs are set to Enable can they communicate with each other.
The MCC channel status function only supports the PTN device and the
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select MCC Channel Status to
open the MCC Channel Status tab.
3.
In the MCC Channel Status tab, view the related status of the corresponding
port.
5.7.3.2
Querying the Status of the NE F Interface

Querying the status of the NE F interface helps confirm the shutdown status of the
corresponding NE F interface.
The NE F interface management function only supports the PTN device and the
5-36
Version: A
Procedure
1.

ManagementNE F-Port Management.
2.
and click
3.
5.7.3.3
to open the NE F-Port Management tab.
View the status of the corresponding NE F port.
Querying the NE Port Status

This function allows you to query the status of various ports of an NE, including the
status of the MCC channel. Only when the shutdown status of the ports of the two
NEs are set to Enable can they communicate with each other.
The NE port status query function only supports the PTN device and the
prerequisite is that the EMU software of the NE must support this function.
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select Get NE Port Status from the
shortcut menu to open the Get NE Port Status tab.
3.
Version: A
View the port status of the selected NE in the tab.
5-37
Figure 5-10
5.7.4
Querying the NE Port
DCN Alarm Management

The OTNM2000 supports querying the alarms of the MCC channel and the alarms
of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface).
The alarms of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface)
include F_DISABLE, which indicates the F port shutdown alarms.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Alarms to open the Current Alarm tab.
2.
Right-click anywhere in the Current Alarm tab and select Query Condition
3.
In the displayed Set Current Alarm Query Condition dialog box, select the
alarms related to the MCC channel or the F interface in the list under Alarm
Code. The following figure uses querying the MCC shutdown alarms as an
example.
5-38
Version: A
4.
Version: A
Click OK. The matching alarms appear in the Current Alarm tab.
5-39
5.7.5
Automatic Discovery of Topological Links

Using the automatic discovery of topological links can detect whether the specified
NE is fiber-connected so as to create links for the NE quickly in a batch manner in
the OTNM2000.
The automatic discovery of topological links only supports the PTN device and the
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select Topo Link Auto Discovery
from the shortcut menu. The OTNM2000 will issue the query command to
automatically add the detected NE topological links to the topology.
5-40
Version: A
Configuration Management
The configuration management is used to configure the information of the network
and NE devices, which is the core management function of the OTNM2000.
Time Calibration
Management Configuration
Structure Configuration
Device Configuration
Refreshing Configuration Time
Configuration Check
Managing Card
Managing NE Software
NE Communication
Optical Cable Router Settings
Setting the NE to the Not Started Status
Backing Up DCG Files
Version: A
6-1
6.1
Time Calibration
Time calibration synchronizes the time of the equipment and the time of the
OTNM2000.
When the time of the equipment and the time of the OTNM2000 are asynchronous,
the delivering of equipment configuration will fail.
Procedure
1.
In the Logical Tree pane, right-click a network block or an NE and select

ConfigTime Calibration from the shortcut menu to open the Time
Calibration alert box, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1
2.
The Time Calibration Alert Box
Click Yes in the Time Calibration alert box. Query the operation result in the
Command manager window that appears subsequently.
If Command succeed is displayed under the remark column, time

calibration is successful.
If Command return timeout or Polling unregistered is displayed under

the remark column, the time calibration fails and users need to check
whether the connection between the OTNM2000 and the equipment is
normal, and perform the time calibration again after the fault is cleared until
the operation is successful.
6.2
Management Configuration
The following introduces the management configuration function of the OTNM2000.
6-2
Version: A
6 Configuration Management
6.2.1
Downloading the Management Configuration

Download the network blocks management configuration data in the database to
the equipment.
Management configuration designates members for the part and the managermanaged relationships between the members, including EMU configurations and
other configurations, of which:
u
EMU configurations include EMU total number, NE total number, NE address,

EMU type, designated M / A and so on.
Other configurations include EMU switch, configuration time, version number,

domain address and so on.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 6-1, the Management Configuration alert box
appears on the OTNM2000 GUI, as shown in Figure 6-2.
Table 6-1
Access Method of Downloading Management Configuration
Operation
Access Method
Select a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select
Downloading
ConfigurationDownload Management Config in the main
Management
menu.
Configuration
Right-click a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select

ConfigDownload Management Config from the shortcut menu.
Figure 6-2
Version: A
The Management Configuration Alert Box
2.
Click Yes in the Management Configuration alert box.
3.
Query the operation result in the Command manager window that appears.
6-3
If Command succeed is displayed in the remark column, the operation is

successful.
If other contents are displayed in the remark column, the operation fails.
You need to eliminate the failure according to the prompts and download
the equipment configuration again until the operation is successful.
Note:
When downloading the management configuration to a network block, all
the working EMU cards under this network block will restart and the new
data will be written into the EEPROM of each EMU card.
6.2.2
Analyzing the Network Block Management

Configuration
After delivering the management configuration, users can perform the network block
management configuration analysis to view and check the network block
management configuration information.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 6-2 to open the management config data window, as
Table 6-2
Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Management Configuration
Operation
Access Method
Select the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and
Analyzing network block

management
configuration
select ConfigurationNetwork Block Management Config

Analysis in the main menu.
Right-click the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and
select ConfigurationRead Management Config from the shortcut
menu.
6-4
Version: A
Figure 6-3
2.
The management config data Window
Check whether the management configuration data in the window is consistent

with the OTNM2000 configuration data. If not, users need to re-download the
management configuration data.
6.3
The following introduces the structure configuration function of the OTNM2000.
6.3.1
Downloading the Structure Configuration

You can download the network blocks structure configuration to the equipment.
Version: A
6-5
Structure configuration shows the connection relationships between the NEs in the
part and shows the topology of the entire part.
Procedure
1.
Select one method in Table 6-3, the Structure Configuration alert box
Table 6-3
Access Method of Downloading Structure Configuration
Operation
Access Method
Select a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select
Downloading the
ConfigurationDownload Structure Config in the main menu.
Right-click a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select

ConfigDownload Structure Config from the shortcut menu.
Figure 6-4
The Structure Configuration Alert Box
2.
Click Yes in the Structure Configuration alert box.
3.
If Command succeed is displayed under the remark column, the

operation is successful.
If other prompts are displayed under the remark column, the operation fails.
Users should eliminate the fault according to the prompts and deliver the
structure configuration again until the operation is successful.
6.3.2
Analyzing the Network Block Structure Configuration

After delivering the structure configuration, users can perform the network block
structure configuration analysis to view and check the network block structure
configuration information.
6-6
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 6-4 to open the structure config data window, as
Table 6-4
Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Structure Configuration
Operation
Access Method
Select the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and
Analyzing the Network

Block Structure
Configuration
select ConfigurationNetwork Block Structure Config Analysis

in the main menu.
Right-click the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and
select ConfigurationRead Structure Config from the shortcut
menu.
Figure 6-5
Version: A
The structure config data Window
6-7
2.
Check whether the structure configuration data in the window is consistent with
the OTNM2000 configuration data. If not, users need to re-download the
structure configuration data.
6.4
Device Configuration
The following introduces the device configuration function of the OTNM2000.
6.4.1
Downloading the Equipment Configuration

Download the network blocks equipment configuration data in the database to the
equipment.
Usually, the equipment configuration is saved on the basis of each NE and it
includes all the card configurations, cross-connect configurations and so on. The
equipment configuration of NE is saved in EEPROM of that NEs EMU card. If an
EMU card is powered off due to fault, the configuration data will not be lost. When
the EMU card is powered on, the configuration will be read out and the NE will be
initialized.
Procedure
1.
Select one method in Table 6-5, and the Device Configuration alert box
Table 6-5
Access Method of Downloading Equipment Configuration
Operation
Access Method
Select a network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select
Downloading the
ConfigurationDownload Equipment Config in the main menu.
Equipment
Configuration
Right-click a network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select

ConfigurationDownload Equipment Config from the shortcut menu.
6-8
Version: A
Figure 6-6
The Device Configuration Alert Box
2.
Click Yes in the Device Configuration alert box.
3.

Users should eliminate the fault according to the prompts and deliver the
equipment configuration again until the operation is successful.
6.4.2
Reading the Device Configuration

The following introduces how to read the device configuration.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the logical view and
select ConfigRead Device Config.
2.
Version: A
6-9
3.
The device configuration information read appears in the Command Manager

window.
6.5
Refreshing Configuration Time

Refresh the delivering time of the management configuration.
If the management or structure configuration to be downloaded is the same with the
existing one, the OTNM2000 prompts Configuration has no change. To still
download the configuration, you need to refresh the configuration time.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 6-6, the Refresh Config Time alert box appears, as
Table 6-6
Access Method of Refreshing the Configuration Time
Configuration Item
Access Method
Select a network block in the Logical Tree pane and then select
Refreshing
ConfigurationRefresh Config Time in the main menu.
configuration time
Right-click a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Config
Refresh Config Time from the shortcut menu.
6-10
Version: A
Figure 6-7
The Refresh Config Time Alert Box
2.
Click Yes in the Refresh Config Time alert box.
3.

Users should eliminate the fault according to the prompts and refresh the
configuration time again until the operation is successful.
6.6
Configuration Check
The following introduces the configuration check of the OTNM2000.
6.6.1
Configuration Check
The configuration check is a checking mechanism for checking whether the actual
equipment configuration is consistent with the configuration in the database.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 6-7 to open the Check Config tab and bring up the
Check Config Parameter Setting dialog box.
Table 6-7
Access Method of Configuration Check
Operation
Access Method
Select ConfigurationCheck Config in the main menu.
Configuration
Check
Version: A
Right-click the desired project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree

pane and select ConfigurationCheck Config from the shortcut menu.
6-11
Table 6-7
Access Method of Configuration Check (Continued)
Operation
Access Method
Right-click the desired project or NE in the Browse Tree pane and select
Check Config from the shortcut menu.
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool Configuration
ManagementCheck Config.
2.
Set related parameters of configuration check in the Check Config Parameter

Setting dialog box and click OK.
The system selects Compare the database and the EMU card configuration
and Compare the database and the BCT card configuration by default.
Note:
u
Open the Check Config tab in the Logical Tree / Browse Tree
shortcut menu, Step 4.
Follow other paths in Table 6-7, Step 3.
3.
Select the object that needs checking configuration in the Operational Tree
tab.
4.
Click
or right-click anywhere in Check the Configuration tab and select
Start Checking to check the configuration of the selected object.

5.
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Check Config tab to perform the

following operations in the process of checking configuration.
Select Stop Checking to stop the configuration check.
Select Result Auto Scroll to switch the scroll mode of displaying results.
Subsequent Operation
Record the difference between the equipment and the database, and verify the
correctness according to the actual circuit condition.
u
If the configuration on the equipment is correct (there may be some

modification on the OTNM2000 that has not been delivered), users need to
contact the FiberHome engineers to handle onsite.
6-12
Version: A
If the configuration on the OTNM2000 is correct, users should deliver the

equipment configuration again.
6.6.2
Comparing the NE Configuration

You can compare the NE configuration at the OTNM2000 side with that at the
device side to check whether they are consistent.
Only the IPRAN NE supports the NE configuration comparison function.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the IPRAN NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the logical view and
select ConfigNE Config Compare from the shortcut menu to open the NE
Config Compare window.
2.
Click the current configuration block to be compared in the IPRAN configuration

list and click Start Compare to compare the configuration. The comparison
result is as shown in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8
3.
The NE Config Compare Window
(Optional) Click Output Comparison Report to save to comparison result to

the local OTNM2000.
Version: A
6-13
6.7
Managing Card
The following introduces the related functions of card management.
6.7.1
Configuring Card Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the clock and time synchronization as
well as the related services by configuring the card.
Procedure
1.
Double-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the
corresponding card in the subrack view. Then click the Card Configuration on
the Task Panel at the right side of the tab to open the card configuration page,
as shown in Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9
2.
The Card Configuration Page
Configure the specific card parameters in the different tabs of the card
configuration page.
The configuration tabs of the card configuration window vary with the card
types. Please configure the card according to the actual project requirements.
See Configuration Guide and Card Configuration Parameter Reference of the
equipment for detailed instruction.
3.
Right-click the blank area of the card configuration page or click the buttons at
the left part of the page to perform the following operations, as shown in
Table 6-8.
6-14
Version: A
Table 6-8
Operations in the Card Configuration Page
Shortcut Menu Items
Button
Saves the configuration data on the GUI to
Write config
the database without delivering to the
(GUIDatabase)
Write config
(DatabaseDevice)
Description
equipment.
-
Delivers the configuration data in the

database to the equipment.
Saves the configuration data on the GUI to
Write config
the database first and then delivers to the
(GUIDevice)
equipment.
Read config
Reads the configuration data in the database
(DatabaseGUI)
to the GUI.
Reads the configuration data on the
Read config
equipment to the GUI without updating the
(DeviceGUI)
Read config (BCTGUI)
database.
-
Read config
(DeviceGUI block
Reads the configuration data in the BCT to

the GUI without updating the database.
Reads the blocks of card configuration
read)
contents on the GUI from the device without

updating the database.
Checks whether the actual equipment
Configuration Check
configuration is consistent with the

configuration in the database.
Before modifying the configuration items in a
batch manner, click this option to display the
configuration item options, (After clicking, this
Display / Hide config

items
menu option becomes "Hide config items"

-
automatically, click it to cancel the

configuration,) so as to use this entry as the
basis to modify the same configuration item
of the other objects. This function is not often
used now.
Expands the card configuration items and
Expand
the corresponding sub-items in the tree

structure.
Collapse
Version: A
Displays the card configuration items in

outline.
6-15
Table 6-8
Operations in the Card Configuration Page (Continued)
Shortcut Menu Items
Button
Description
Users should save the data to the database
after the card configuration. Then read the
database and click this item, users can
Undo
cancel the previous card configuration

operation in the database.
This item is used together with the "Undo"
item. After clicking "Undo", users can click
Redo
this item to restore the previous card

configuration operation in the database.
-
Task Pane
6.7.2
Click this menu option to display the task

panel.
Copying Card Configuration

Copying card configuration is a fast batch duplication operation. The operation
objects are the cards of the same type within a project / part / NE.
Note:
This operation only modifies the configuration data in the database and
does not deliver the data to the equipment.
Procedure
1.
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolCard management

Copy Board Config.
2.
Select the source card and the target card in the Operational Tree pane, and
click
6-16
to open the Copy Board Config tab.
Version: A
3.
Click the row of the source card, right-click anywhere in the tab and select
Select Current Card as Copy Source from the shortcut menu. The Current
Operation column in the Copy Board Config tab displays Copy Source.
4.
In the right part of the Copy Board Config tab, select the configuration block to
be copied in the Sub Config Block pane and click Start Copying.
5.
In the Batch Modification Config alert boxes that appear, click Yes. Then click
OK in the OTNM2000 alert box that appears subsequently.
6.
(Optional) Click Restore Card Default Config. In the Batch Modification

Config alert boxes that appear, click Yes. Then click OK in the OTNM2000
alert box that appears subsequently.
6.7.3
Delivering Card Control Commands

Configure and deliver the commands such as equipment loopback and provide
supports for the maintenance and troubleshooting of the equipment.
Version: A
6-17
Procedure
1.
Double-click an NE in the Logical Tree pane, click the corresponding card in

the subrack view, and click the Control Command on the Task Panel at the
right side of the tab, as shown in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10
2.
The Card Control Command Page
After configuring the related commands, click
. The Command warning
alert box appears.

3.
According to the prompts, confirm the command is correct and click OK. The
command will be delivered to the equipment.
6.7.4
Checking the Card Status

Via viewing card status, users can check whether the cards are present and the
software / hardware version complies with the planning.
The card status includes the basic card information (such as card number, software
version, activation status) and special status items. Different cards have different
status items.
Procedure
1.
Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the corresponding card
in the subrack view. Click STATUS in the Task Panel pane at the right side of
the GUI to open the card status page, as shown in Figure 6-11.
6-18
Version: A
Figure 6-11
The Card Status Page
Note:
For the EMU card, you need to click STATUS, EMU_STATUS,
EMU_BCT_ADDR, EMU_BCT_DATA, EMU_NE_NETWORK and
EMU_NE_CONFIG_TIME on the Task Panel respectively to open the
corresponding status tabs.
2.
Version: A
Check the current status information of the card in the card status page.
6-19
6.7.5
Synchronizing the Card Configuration

The card configuration of the device can be synchronized to the OTNM2000
database manually or automatically.
Procedure
1.
Select the access method described in Table 6-9 to access the Card Config
Timing Synchronization tab.
Table 6-9
Access Method of Synchronizing the Card Configuration
Operation
Access Method
Select ConfigurationCard Config Timing Synchronization in the
Synchronizing the
main menu.
Card Configuration
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolCard

managementCard Config Timing Synchronization.
2.
Select the desired object in the Operational Tree pane and click Add, or rightclick anywhere of the Card Config Timing Synchronization tab and select
Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in
Figure 6-12.
6-20
Version: A
Figure 6-12
3.
Adding a Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration
See Table 6-10 for setting related parameters of the scheduled synchronization
task of card configuration.
Table 6-10
Description of Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration

Description
Parameter
Task Name
Sets the name of the card configuration synchronization task.
Task Enable
Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default.

Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by
default.
Task Type
Basic
designated time when the Timing Run is selected.

u
setting
The system automatically executes the statistics task at the

The system executes the task immediately after setting the
task when the Manual Run is selected.
Sets the task time only when the Timing Run is selected for the
task type.
Task Time
The Begin Time and the End Time are optional setting items
Setting
and used to set the time range of the scheduled task. The
Running Time is the compulsory item used for setting the time
for running the scheduled task.
Version: A
6-21
Table 6-10
Description of Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration (Continued)

Description
Parameter
Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected for
the task type.
Sets the period of executing the task and there are two types
including Day and Week.
Task Period
Sets the time interval in the Interval (Day) text box when the
Day is selected for the Task Period.
Enters the expected value in the Week text box according to

the format of the informative message when the Week is
selected.
4.
Click OK and then view the added card configuration synchronization task in
the Card Config Timing Synchronization.
5.
(Optional) To modify a task, select the task and click Modify, or right-click the
desired task and select Modify from the shortcut menu. See Table 6-10 to
modify the parameters and click OKTable 6-10.
6.
(Optional) To delete a task, select the task and click Delete, or right-click the
desired task and select Delete from the shortcut menu. Then click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
6.8
Managing NE Software
The following introduces the related functions of managing NE software.
6.8.1
Downloading the Software

Software download is used to deliver the software data from the OTNM2000 to the
card of equipment, so as to upgrade the card software.
Prerequisite
6-22
The card software upgrade package has been prepared.
Services on the card to be upgraded have been switched to other cards.
Version: A
u
When the IPRAN and POTS equipment downloads the software via this
function, the new software will be enabled promptly.
When other equipment downloads the software via this function, the time for
enabling the software needs to be set. This function should be used together
with the card software delay enabling function.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 6-11 to bring up the Open dialog box.
Table 6-11
Access Method of Delivering Software
Configuration Item
Access Method
Select Management ToolCard ManagementSoftware
Download in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired
card in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and drag it to
Downloading Software
the Software Download tab.

Click the NE in the Logical Tree tab and right-click the
corresponding card in the subrack view and select DOWNLOAD_
SOFTWARE from the shortcut menu.
2.
Select the upgrade package in the Open dialog box and click Open and the
card to be upgraded appears in the left side of the Software Download tab.
Version: A
6-23
3.
Select the card in Software Download tab and right-click the blank area of tab,
select Software Download / Force Software Download from the shortcut
menu.
Note:
When selecting Software Download, the system will deliver the selected
software only when it is the later version of the card software on the
equipment. Otherwise the system will reject the delivering request.
4.
6.8.2
Click OK in the alert box that appears.
Setting Delayed Enabling of the Card Software

Use the card software enabling delay function to set the enabling time of the new
version of card software, so as to enhance the upgrade efficiency of the card
software.
6-24
Version: A
Prerequisite
You have downloaded the new version of card software.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolCard ManagementApply the card software

later in the Operational Tree pane.
2.
Select the corresponding card in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane
and click
3.
to open the Apply the card software later tab.
Select the corresponding card in the Apply the card software later tab and
right-click anywhere in the tab to perform the following operations:
Select Set starting board software time, configure the time in the Card
software restart time setting box and click OK.
After configuration, the User Setting Enable Time of the corresponding
card on the tab shows the configured time. If the configuration is
successful, the displayed Equipment Enable Time is the same as the
User Setting Enable Time. If the configuration fails, the Equipment
Enable Time shows the configured time is invalid. Users should check the
configured starting time and see whether it is incorrect.
Select Apply the card software right now to set the enabling time as the
current time plus 3 seconds.
Select Cancel Time Setting to Apply Card Software to cancel the

configured card enabling time.
Select Refresh to refresh the information of all cards in the tab.
Note:
If you fail to select Start board software immediately, please check
whether the EMS time is consistent with the NE BCT time. If not, solve
the problem via NE time calibration.
Operation Result
After successfully configuring the card software enabling time, the system will
enable the new version of card software at the configured time.
Version: A
6-25
6.8.3
Setting the FTP

The FTP setting writes the FTP information of the OTNM2000 server to the NE so
that the NE knows the source of the software.
Only the POTS NE supports the FTP setting function.
Procedure
1.
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolCard Management

FTP Setting to open the FTP Setting window.
2.
Select a POTS NE and set the related parameters of the FTP server in the FTP
Setting window.
The IP address of the FTP server: Enter the IP address of the OTNM2000
server which is the actual FTP server.
Port: Enter the FTP server port, 21 by default.
Username: Enter the username, 1 by default.
Password: Enter the password, 1 by default.
3.
Click Write FTP Setting... and click OK in the dialog box that appears.
4.
(Optional) Select a POTS NE and click Read FTP Setting... to check whether
the FTP settings of the corresponding NE are correct.
6-26
Version: A
6.8.4
Managing Card Software

Users can perform unified management of the NE's card software via the card
software management so that the software loading via the NE software delivering is
more convenient.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolCard ManagementBoard software manager in

the Operational Tree pane to open the Board software manager window, as
Figure 6-13
2.
The Board software manager Window
Import the card software into the software library.

1)
Select the card of the equipment at the left side of the GUI and click Import
Boar....
2)
In the displayed Single disk software set dialog box, click
to select
the corresponding card software and click Open.

Version: A
6-27
3)
Confirm that the selected card is correct and click Imported into the
software library, as shown in Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14
4)
Imported into the Software Library
Click the cross button at the top right corner of the Single disk software
set to close the Single disk software set dialog box.
5)
Check the imported software information in the Board software manager,

6-28
Version: A
Figure 6-15
3.
Checking Card Software Information
(Optional) Export the card software from the software library.

1)
Select the card of the equipment at the left side of the object tree and
select the row where the software is located at the right side of the pane
and click Export Boar.....
2)
Select the path to export the software in the Save as dialog box that
appears and enter the file name. Click Save.
4.
(Optional) Search the card software in the software library.

1)
Click Search to bring up the FTP Search dialog box.
2)
Enter the key word of the card software and click Search.
If the corresponding software exists, the result will display at the right
side of the Single disk software set dialog box.
If the corresponding software does not exist, the OTNM2000 alert box
appears, prompting Can't find the matched object!.
5.
(Optional) Export the card software list.

Click Export to export the card software list to the *.HTML file.
Version: A
6-29
6.8.5
NE Software Download
Users can manage the software and data of the NE, back up the NE data and
upgrade / downgrade the NE software via the NE software download.
Only the IPRAN and POTS NEs support the function of NE software download.
Procedure
1.
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolCard Management

NE Software Download.
2.
Select the NE whose software is to be downloaded in the lower part of the

Operational Tree pane and click
6-30
to open the NE Software Download tab.
Version: A
Note:
u
The source path of the NE prompts that the NE software is obtained

from the "download/software/" directory of the FTP server.
Click Ftp-IP Setting to open the Ftp-IP Setting dialog box and set
the IP address of the FTP server.
3.
Back up the NE configuration.
Note:
The NE data should be backed up before upgrading / downgrading to
avoid data loss or damage caused by the upgrade / downgrade failure of
NE software.
1)
Select the corresponding NE in the NE Software Download tab and click

Backup NE Config.
2)
View the configuration information of the NE in the NE configuration

information tab in the lower part.
3)
Click Save as to save the NE configuration file to the designated directory.
4)
(Optional) In the NE configuration information tab, click Restore the

configuration and click OK in the displayed alert box to restore the NE
configuration.
4.
Download NE Software.
1)
Select the NE whose software is to be downloaded and double-click the

corresponding area in the Src Path column or click
in the Src Path
column to open the NE software set dialog box.
Version: A
6-31
2)
(Optional) If there are no needed files in the software library, click
behind
the "File path" textbox, select the corresponding file and click Import Into
Software Library.
3)
In the NE software set dialog box, click before the NE name to expand
and view the corresponding software of the NE in the software library.
4)
Select the software to be downloaded and click OK to return to the NE

Software Download tab. The selected software name appears in the
source path column.
5)

corresponding area in Start Time column or click
in the Start Time
column to open the Set Time dialog box.
6-32
Version: A
6)
In the Set Time dialog box, set the start time for downloading the NE
software and click OK.
7)

corresponding area in the Reboot Time column or click
in the Reboot
Time column to open the Set Time dialog box.
8)
Set the reboot time of the card in the Set Time dialog box and click OK.
Caution:
The card software is forwarded to the other cards by the EMU card via
the FTP server. When the EMU card software download is completed
and restarted but the other cards' software is not completed downloading,
the download of the other cards' software fails. If the delivered cards
include the EMU card, users should set the reboot time of the EMU card
with care.
Version: A
6-33
9)
Click Start Download at the bottom of the NE Software Download tab

and check the download status of the card software in the Status tab.
6.9
NE Communication
The following introduces the functions related to NE communication.
6.9.1
Pinging the NE
Check whether the communication between the OTNM2000 and an NE is normal.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane to perform the following
operations:
For OTNM2000 server end, select Ping from the shortcut menu to open
the ping window.
For the OTNM2000 client end, select More CommandsOTNM Ping

from the shortcut menu to open the OTNM Ping window.
2.
Check the replied information from the target NE in the window.
If the window displays Reply from *.*.*.*: bytes=32 time=*ms TTL= as

shown in Figure 6-16, the communication between the OTNM2000 and the
NE is normal.
6-34
Version: A
Figure 6-16
The Result of Pinging NE
If the window displays Request timed out, the communication between

the terminal emulation software package (such as Hyper Terminal) and the
NE is abnormal. Users should check the connection between the
OTNM2000 and the NE, and Ping the NE again after users have eliminate
the fault until the connection is normal.
6.9.2
SSH
SSH is a secure remote login protocol developed based on the traditional Telnet
protocol. It greatly enhances the security in terms of authentication mode and data
transmission.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select SSH (IP address) from
the shortcut menu.
2.
Version: A
Click Yes in the displayed alert box to open the command line interface (CLI).
6-35
3.
Enter the login name and password (both are root by default) on the CLI and
press Enter.
4.
6-36
Access the SSH configuration window.
Version: A
6.9.3
Telneting the NE
Procedure
1.
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the logical view and select
Telnet from the shortcut menu. Then configure the NE via the CLI in the
displayed dialog box.
6.10
Optical Cable Router Settings

You can set the information of the same optical cable route and check whether the
active and standby circuits are of the same optical cable route so as to ensure the
availability of the standby circuit.
Procedure
1.
Select ConfigurationOptical Cable Router Setting in the main menu to

open the Optical Cable Router Setting dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-17.
Version: A
6-37
Figure 6-17
The Optical Cable Router Setting Dialog Box
The Optical Cable Router Setting dialog box includes two list boxes.
The Optical Cable Information list box displays the optical cables in the
project and is entered by users.
The Identical Router Information list box displays the actual routing
information in the project and is entered by users. The optical cable
information is imported from the Optical Cable Information list box.
2.
Set the optical cable information.

1)
In the Optical Cable Information list box, click Edit to open the Optical
Cable Settings window.
6-38
Version: A
2)
In the Optical Cable Settings window, click Add and enter the cable
information in the displayed Add dialog box. Then click OK to save the
settings.
Version: A
6-39
3)
(Optional) In the Optical Cable Settings window, click Search and enter
the cable information in the displayed Search Content dialog box. Then
click OK to search for the desired cable.
4)
(Optional) Select the corresponding optical cable and click Delete to delete
the selected optical cable information.
5)
(Optional) Select the corresponding optical cable and click Modify to

modify the selected optical cable information.
6)
(Optional) Click Export to export the optical cable information as a CSV

file.
7)
(Optional) Click Import to import the optical cable information from the
CSV file.
3.
Set the same-route information. The procedure for setting the same-route
information is same as Set the optical cable information.
4.
Set the cable comparison table.

1)
After completing the settings in the Optical Cable Information and

Identical Router Information panes, click Data Sync and then click OK in
the displayed alert box to complete updating the cable and route settings.
2)
Click Next. The Identical Router Information pane changes to the Fiber
and Optical Cable Comparison Table pane.
3)
Select the optical cable in the Optical Cable Information list box
according to the actual project and select the corresponding optical fiber
information in the Fiber And Optical Cable Comparison Table list box.
Click
to add the optical cable information to the corresponding optical
fiber information.
Note:
Isolate the corresponding optical fiber and cable promptly via the Search
Fib function at the bottom of the Fiber And Optical Cable Comparison
list box.
4)
(Optional) Select the corresponding optical cable information in the Fiber

And Optical Cable Comparison list box and click
to delete the
selected optical cable information.
6-40
Version: A
5.
Click Finish to save the information in the Optical Cable Router Setting
dialog box and then click Yes in the displayed alert box.
Note:
If the incorrect information exists in the Optical Cable Router Setting
dialog box, the system will bring up the Configuration data is incorrect
alert box. Users can modify according to the prompt message.
6.11
Setting the NE to the Not Started Status

Set the NE status to "not started", so that users can easily identify it via the NE
status LED.
Procedure
1.
In the Operational Tree, select Management ToolCard ManagementNE

Not Provisioned.
2.
Select the desired NE in the Operational Tree pane, then click
to open the
NE Not Provisioned tab.

3.
Select the NE, right-click anywhere in the tab and select Set the Selected
Nodes to Be Not Setup from the shortcut menu. The Set or not? column of
the selected NE is No, as shown in Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18
Version: A
The NE Not Provisioned Tab
6-41
Operation Result
The status alarm indicator of the NE is
6.12
Backing Up DCG Files

You can set the DCG file backup task to manually or automatically back up the DCG
files of the OTNM2000.
1.
Select ConfigurationBackup DCG File in the main menu or select

Management ToolConfiguration ManagementBackup DCG File in the
Operational Tree pane to open the Backup DCG File dialog box, as shown in
Figure 6-19.
Figure 6-19
2.
Set the backup task.

1)
6-42
The Backup DCG File Dialog Box
In the Backup DCG File dialog box, click Add to open the Add dialog box.
Version: A
2)
In the Add dialog box, enter the relevant information and click Run. The
backup task is added to the Backup DCG File dialog box.
3)
(Optional) Select the corresponding task and click Modify to modify the
selected task.
Version: A
6-43
4)
(Optional) Select the corresponding task and click Delete to delete the
selected task.
5)
(Optional) Select the backup task that has executed backing up files, click
Task Result Files to open the File Result List. Select the desired backup
file, click Save As and select the saving directory. You can go to the
specified directory to view the DCG file.
6)
(Optional) Select the corresponding task and click View Log to query the
task logs.
6-44
Version: A
Service Configuration and

Management
u
The Business Configuration menu contains the configuration access method

of service data, service / routing template management, global service settings,
ASON resource management, displayed route and configuration options. This
menu covers all functions related to service configuration, as shown in the
following figure:
The Business Management menu includes querying of various service data,

managing of broken services and storing of configuring data. as shown in the
figure below:
Version: A
7-1
PTN/IPRAN
POTN/PE-OTN
SDH/MSTP
Service Template
Routing Template
Service Global Settings
7-2
Version: A
7 Service Configuration and Management
ASON Resource Management

Displaying Routes
Options
Querying Services
Managing Broken Services
Saving Configuration Data to the Database
Reading Configuration Data from the Database
Full Download
Version: A
7-3
7.1
PTN/IPRAN
The following introduces the service configuration GUI and parameters of the PTN/
IPRAN device.
The PTN/IPRAN configuration item contains multiple circuit configurations, service
configurations and protection ring configurations, as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1
7.1.1
PTN / IPRAN Configuration Item
Tunnel
The following introduces the Tunnel configuration GUI and related parameters.
Configuration Access Method

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANTunnel(T) in the OTNM2000 main
menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
Set the basic attributes of the static / dynamic tunnel, including the name, type,
direction, etc.
7-4
Configure the circuit basic properties. See Table 7-1.
Version: A
Version: A
Configure the bandwidth. See Table 7-2.
Apply the template.
7-5
Note:
For description of the LSP template configuration, see Service Template.
2.
Set the source / sink nodes, source / sink ports of the static / dynamic tunnel
and BFD. See Table 7-3.
7-6
Version: A
3.
Set the routing policy and intermediate route constraints of the static / dynamic
tunnel. See Table 7-4.
Version: A
7-7
4.
7-8
Confirm the pre-created working circuit. See Table 7-5.
Version: A
5.
Confirm the pre-created protection circuit. See Table 7-6. Compared with the
Precreate circuit pane, this pane contains an extra Revert Properties group
box.
Version: A
7-9
6.
Configure the working path and protection path when the BFD or Proactive
OAM is enabled. See Table 7-7.
Description of GUI Parameters

u
7-10
Description of circuit basic properties.
Version: A
Table 7-1
Description of Circuit Basic Properties
Item
Use VLAN Sub-interface
Description
It is not selected by default. It should be checked when the VLAN
sub-interface is to be used.
Path Name
Enters a name for the path according to the project data.
Signaling
Static / Dynamic
u
Protection
When Signaling is set to Static, the options of this item are:

u
No Protection
1:1 Trail Protection
1+1 Trail Protection
Dynamic LSP 1:1 Protection
SNCP 1+1 Protection
SNCP 1:1 Protection
When Signaling is set to Dynamic, the options of this item

are:
Path
Tunnel
Grooming
EXP
EXP Value
Version: A
No Protection
Dynamic LSP 1:1 Protection
Auto LSP 1:1 Protection
Bidirectional / Unidirectional.
u
Primary
Bypass
Secondary
Secondary auto
elsp: Sets the scheduling type.

u
assign
mapping
The elsp supports setting the EXP priority. Value range: 0 - 15.
Description of bandwidth settings.
7-11
Table 7-2
Description of Bandwidth Settings
Item
Description
Bandwidth
Disable
Enable QoS in work path
Enable QoS in all paths
CIR (M)
Indicates Committed Information Rate.
PIR (M)
Indicates Peak Information Rate.
CBS
Indicates Committed Burst Size.
PBS
Indicates Peak Burst Size.
Description of static / dynamic tunnel settings (source/ sink node, source / sink
port, and BFD).
Table 7-3
Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Source/ Sink Node, Source / Sink
Port, and BFD)

Item
Description
Source / Sink LSP
Source and Sink LSP
Source / Sink Port

Source Add, Sink Drop
Preset Label
Selects the source / sink NE.

Selects the source or sink Add / Drop
ports.
They are automatically selected when
the source / sink LSP is selected.
Forward
Value range: 301 - 8191.
Reverse
Positive Label+1
The Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
(BFD) protocol is a high-speed
independent Hello protocol. When
Enable BFD is selected, the devices
Enable BFD
at both ends periodically send

detection message between them
through the session channel to
implement millisecond-level failure
Enable BFD
detection of the tunnel.

BFD Name
Sets the name of the PW.

The BFD uses the local session ID and
Local / Remote
the remote session ID to differentiate

multiple BFD sessions of a same route
pair.
7-12
Version: A
Table 7-3
Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Source/ Sink Node, Source / Sink
Port, and BFD) (Continued)

Item
Description
Enable Proactive OAM and Enable
Enable Proactive OAM
BFD are alternative.

It is selected by default. When it is not
Auto Allocate
Auto Allocate
selected, you can customize the

positive tunnel ID and reverse tunnel
ID.
Tunnel ID
Enters the ID of the positive tunnel.
Reverse
Enters the ID of the reverse tunnel.
Description of static / dynamic tunnel settings (routing policy and intermediate

route constraints).
Table 7-4
Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Routing Policy and Intermediate
Route Constraints)
Item
Description
Enable CSPF
Strict Routing
Routing Policy Settings
Static Policy
It is available only when Signaling is

set to Dynamic.
It is available only when Signaling is
set to Dynamic.
u
Min. NE Quality
Minimal Length
Lowest Cost
Load Balance
When this option is selected, you can

Find Route by Manual
click the fiber connection in the main

topology to select the specified path.
Click
Routing Constraint
Use Route Template
Operation
Management window and select the

route as needed.
Constrained to Positive
Constrained to Reserve
Version: A
to open the Routing Template
When Signaling is set to Static, the

option is selected.
This option is available only when
Signaling is set to Dynamic.
7-13
Table 7-4
Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Routing Policy and Intermediate
Route Constraints) (Continued)

Item
Description
Configures the NE, Pass LAG Port,
Positive Routing Constraints
Ingress Port and Constraints of the

positive path.
Configures the NE, Pass LAG Port,
Reverse Routing Constraint
Ingress Port and Constraints of the

reverse path.
This option is unavailable for dynamic
Set SNCP Protection
tunnels.
Description of precreated circuit parameters.
Table 7-5
Description of Precreated Circuit Parameters
Item
Description
Precreate circuit
Lists the basic information of the pre-created circuit.
Route Info
Lists the details of the positive / reverse route.
Activate Immediately
This item is available only for the tunnel with the No Protection
after Creation
type.
Search Routing
Template by Manual
It is selected by default.
Routing
Advance Property
Click
Setting
configure the LSP priority and quick re-routing of the dynamic
to open the LSP Advanced Properties dialog box. Then
tunnel.
Description of revert properties.
Table 7-6
Description of Revert Properties
Item
Description
Revert Type
Return / Non Revertive

Indicates the time needed for the
Revert Properties
WTR (m)
service to restore from the protection

path to the working path.
7-14
Version: A
Table 7-6
Description of Revert Properties (Continued)
Item
Description
This item is available only when the
Revert Type is set to Return.
Hold-off Time (10ms)
In case of working channel failure, the

service will switch after the hold-off
time.
Description of the working / protection path properties (when BFD or proactive

OAM is enabled).
Table 7-7
Description of the Working / Protection Path Properties (when BFD or Proactive
OAM is enabled)
Item
Description
FDI Frame Enable
Transfers the alarm indication signal.
APS Enable
CV Frame Enable
CV Frame Sending
Period
7.1.2
Controls the protection switching action, improving the service

reliability.
Detects the connectivity of LSP.
It is 3.33 ms by default.
PW
The following introduces the PW configuration GUI and related parameters.

Click Service ConfigurationPTN/IPRANPW(P) in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
Set the basic attributes, including dynamic / static PW name, type, Tunnel
selection policy and BFD. Then select the source / sink node, ingress / egress
label and next-hop. See Table 7-8.
Version: A
7-15
2.
Select the lower-level tunnel that carries the PW to complete the creation of PW.
See Table 7-9 and Table 7-10.
7-16
Version: A
Note:
For creating the PW template, see Service Template.
u
Description of dynamic / static PW basic properties
Table 7-8
Description of Dynamic / Static PW Basic Properties.
Item
Description
Selects this option when configuring multiple
Multiple PW
PWs.
VC ID
The Auto Allocate is selected by default.

Sets the name of the PW. When this item is
PW Basic
PW Name
Properties
Tunnel Name as the PW Name.

User Label
Version: A
null, the system will take its associated

Enters the user label according to your data
planning.
7-17
Table 7-8
Description of Dynamic / Static PW Basic Properties. (Continued)
Item
Description
VC Type
Tunnel Policy
Signaling
Ethernet
vlantag
no lsp
tunnel
ldp lsp
policy
Static / Dynamic
PW Protection
Network Type
Primary
Secondary
Spoke
Mesh
Source
Indicates the source NE of the VC circuit.
Sink
Indicates the sink NE of the VC circuit.
Forward
The start value is 301.
Source / Sink
When the positive label is set, the reverse
Node Properties
label will be automatically modified. By
Reverse
default, the positive and reverse labels are the

same.
Next Hop
Sets the IP address of the Next Hop.
BFD Settings
Enables the BFD or the OAM.

Selects this option to constrain the PW to be
Carried on unidirectional LSP
Description of lower-level tunnel parameters.
Table 7-9
7-18
carried on the unidirectional LSP.
Description of Lower-level Tunnel Parameters
Item
Description
Tunnel Policy
Sets the positive / reverse tunnel according to your planning.
Select the Service Layer
In the Select the Service Layer (LSP) box, select the tunnel that
(LSP)
bears the PW.
Batch Creation Settings
Modify the Lot Size as needed.
Set Advanced
Click
to open the PW advanced property configuration pane.
Version: A
Description of PW advanced properties.
Table 7-10
Description of PW Advanced Properties
Item
Description
u
Disable: Indicates not enabling the traffic

bandwidth control.
trTCM: Indicates a regulatory mechanism

that differentiates the service traffic.
trTCM determines the transmission
priority based on rate (PIR or CIR) and
Mode
color (green, yellow or red) by measuring

the network traffic.
u
Modified trTCM: Uses the improved Two

Rate Three Color Marker defined in
RFC4115 to conduct traffic control. This
algorithm optimized the usage of
bandwidth.
Dropping PolicerProfile
color-blind: Indicates dyeing the

messages directly according to the
algorithm.
QoS
u
CM
Properties
color-aware: Indicates dyeing the

messages with the darker color after
comparing the color of the messages with
the algorithm result. The colors of the
messages from dark to light are red,
yellow and green.
CIR
Indicates Committed Information Rate.
PIR
Indicates Peak Information Rate.
CBS
Indicates Committed Burst Size.
PBS
Indicates Peak Burst Size.
Policy
PHB to
TMC/TMP EXP
Mapping
Assign
EXP
PHB2EXP_ID
Version: A
Assign EXP
PHB to TMC/TMP EXP Mapping
Value range: 0 - 7.
When the policy is set to Assign EXP, specify
the EXP value of the PW.
When the policy is set to PHB to TMC/TMP
EXP, specify the preset PHB2EXP table ID
that the PW bases on.
7-19
Table 7-10
Description of PW Advanced Properties (Continued)
Item
Description
Policy
Select PHB
TMP EXP to PHB Mapping
TMP EXP to PHB
Select
When the policy is set to Select PHB, specify
Mapping
PHB
the PHB value of the PW.
EXP2PHB_ID
When the policy is set to TMP EXP to PHB,

specify the preset EXP2PHB table ID that the
PW bases on.
The User QoS, Priority Queue and DS
Template three configuration items are
specially applied to the QoS settings of the
PTN690 device or R8000 device.
Positive / Reverse QoS Policy
These three parameters must be configured

first in the NE configuration of the
corresponding device, and then configured in
the subnet configuration by clicking Select to
open the QoS policy template dialog box and
select the desired template.
Template Application
7.1.3
Click
to select the PW template.
L2VPN Service
The following details the L2VPN configuration GUI and related parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANL2VPN Service in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
7-20
Set the L2VPN basic properties. See Table 7-11.
Version: A
2.
Set the node NE and port.
When the service type is set to E-LINE, configure the source / sink NEs
and ports. See Table 7-12.
Version: A
7-21
When the service type is set to E-LAN or E-TREE, configure the source /
sink NEs and ports. See Table 7-13.
7-22
Version: A
When the service type is set to E-CES, configure the source / sink NEs
and ports. See Table 7-14.
Version: A
7-23
When the service type is set to E-Nto1, configure the node NE and port of
the N:1 group service. See Table 7-15.
7-24
Version: A
3.
Select the PW circuit.
Version: A
Select the lower-level PW circuit that bears the E-LINE circuit.
7-25
Select the lower-level PW circuit that bears the E-LAN, E-TREE or ENto1circuit.
a)
7-26
Set the routing topology properties of the E-LAN circuit.
Version: A
b)
Version: A
Set the PW constraints of the E-LAN, E-TREE or E-Nto1 circuit.
7-27
c)
Select the lower-level PW that bears the E-LAN, E-TREE or ENto1circuit.
7-28
Version: A
Version: A
Select the PW circuit that bears the CES service.
7-29
4.
7-30
Set the circuit virtual interface, UNI port and NNI port properties of the service.
Version: A

u
Version: A
Description of L2VPN basic properties.

7-31
Table 7-11
Description of L2VPN Basic Properties
Item
Description
Service Name
Enters the name of the service.
Client Info
Enters the client information related to the service
Port Rate
Options are FE, GE, 40GE and XGE.
Service Type
Includes E-LINE, E-LAN, E-TREE, E-CES and E-Nto1.
Direction
Options are User to User and User to Network.
Protection
Options are No Protection and PW Redundancy+MC LAG.
The circuit source / sink configuration parameters of the E-LINE service are
described in the following table.
Table 7-12
Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the E-LINE
Service
Item
Description
u
Selects the L2VPN source / sink NE.
Selects the L2VPN source / sink port.
Circuit Src and Dst

Config
Caution:
For the User to User service, you can select only
one node and two UNI ports.
Constraints
Sets the routing constraints when selecting the PW. The source
and sink NEs cannot be selected as the constrained NEs.
The circuit source / sink configuration parameters of the E-LAN or E-TREE

service are described in the following table.
7-32
Version: A
Table 7-13
Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the E-LAN or E-
TREE Service
Item
Description
u
Clicks the Select an NE drop-down list to quickly add an NE

and Port.
Click in the topology to select the NE.
Select the NE Remark

1Remark 2
.
Caution:
For the User to User service, you can select only
one node and two UNI ports.
After selecting the NE, select the Set PW Filter option and set the
Other Settings
routing constraints for the PW circuit that bears the E-TREE

service.
Note 1: You can right-click the NE to delete the selected NE.

Note 2: For the E-TREE service, the first NE is used as the root node by default.
The circuit source / sink configuration parameters of the CES service are
Table 7-14
Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the CES Service
Item
Description
Bandwidth Type
Source / Sink NE
Source and Sink Config

Source / Sink Port
Port Type
Constraints
Options are VC12 and VC4.

Click the drop-down box to select the source
or sink NE.
Click the drop-down box to select the source
or sink port.
Options are PDH2M, STM1, STM4 and
STM16.
Indicates the routing constraints that filter the
lower-level bearer PW circuit.
The node NE and port configuration parameters of the N:1 group service are
Version: A
7-33
Table 7-15
Description of Node NE / Port Configuration Parameters of the N:1 Group Service
Item
Description
u
Select the NE Remark

1Remark 2
.
and Port.
u
Other Settings
Clicks the Select an NE drop-down list to quickly add an NE
Click in the topology to select the NE.
After selecting the NE, select the Set PW Filter option and set the
routing constraints for the PW circuit that bears the E-Nto1 service.
Note 1: For the E-Nto1 service with no protection, the first NE is the root node by default.
Note 2: For the E-Nto1 service with protection, the first two nodes are the active / standby
nodes by default.
7.1.4
L3VPN Service
The following details the L3VPN Service configuration GUI and related parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANL3VPN Service in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
7-34
Set the Basic Properties and PE Member. See Table 7-16.
Version: A
2.
Set the network topology of the L3 VPN and the selection policy for the tunnel
that bears the VPN.
Version: A
7-35
3.
Select the tunnel that bears the L3 VPN and the VPN FRR settings.

u
The RD/RT, PE Member and Interface List Information parameters of the L3

VPN are described in the following table.
7-36
Version: A
Table 7-16
Description of the RD/RT, PE Member and Interface List Information Parameters
of the L3 VPN
Item
Description
Service Name
Signaling Type
RD/RT Format
Basic Properties
RD Value
Sets it according to the data planning.

u
Static
Dynamic
AS: Number
IP: Number

Egress Label
Specifies the value for static service.
For dynamic service, it is unconfigurable and the

system automatically generates the data.
Select the PE,
NE
Indicates the IP-type NE.
Interface and
Port
Ingress RT Value
It is the same as the RD value by default.
Ingress / Egress
RT
7.1.5
ATM Service
The following details the ATM Service configuration GUI and related parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANATM Service in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
Version: A
Select the ATM source and sink ports.
7-37
2.
7-38
Select the PW associated with the ATM service.
Version: A
3.
Version: A
For the ATM service cross-connect configuration, see Table 7-17.
7-39

u
The ATM service cross-connect settings are described in the following table.
Table 7-17
Description of the ATM Service Cross-connect Settings
Item
Description
Link Enable
Enable / Disable.
Link Mode
Number of Encapsulated
Signaling Cells
7.1.6
VCC1:1
VPC1:1
N:1
AAL5
Group Service
The following details the Group Service configuration GUI and related parameters.
7-40
Version: A

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANGroup Service in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
7.1.7
Configure the combination service bridging the L2VPN and the L3 VPN.
Protection Ring
The following introduces the Protection Ring configuration GUI and related
parameters.
Version: A
7-41

Click Service ConfigurationPTN/IPRANRing protection in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
7-42
Configure basic properties of the protection ring. See Table 7-18.
Version: A
Caution:
When the ring type is set to Ring_Wrapping_V1, Ring_Wrapping_V2 or
Ring_Sterring, check Cross-EMS. The hidden Cross-EMS Properties
combo box appears under the Basic Properties, as shown in the figure
below:
2.
Create the protection ring.
Check Cross-EMS in Basic Properties, and then configure start NE,

source protection port, sink NE and sink protection port of the cross-EMS
ring.
Version: A
7-43
If Cross-EMS is not selected in Basic Properties, configure the start NE

and start link of the protection ring.

u
7-44
The basic properties of the protection ring are described in the following table.
Version: A
Table 7-18
Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties
Item
Description
Unidirectional 1+1 Trail
Unidirectional 1:1 Trail
Ring_Wrapping_V1
Ring_Wrapping_V2
Ring_Wrapping_V3
Ring_Sterring
MSRPRing
Bidirectional 1+1 Trail
Bidirectional 1:1 Trail
Bidirectional 1+1 Link (Laser-shutdown Deactivated)
Bidirectional 1:1 Link (Laser-shutdown Deactivated)
Unidirectional 1+1 Dual Homing
Unidirectional 1:1 Dual Homing
Bidirectional 1+1 Dual Homing
Bidirectional 1:1 Dual Homing
DNI PW Protect
Bypass Dual-homing Protection Group
Ring Type
Ring Name
User Label
Revert Type
WTR (m)
Indicates the time needed for the service to restore from the
protection path to the working path.
This item is available only when the Revert Type is set to Return.
Hold-off Time (10ms)
In case of working channel failure, the service will switch after the
hold-off time.
APS Enable
Version: A
Enable / Disable.
7-45
7.1.8
VRRP Configuration
The VRRP indicates the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. In normal status, the
active router undertakes the forwarding task while the standby routers are in
monitoring status. Once the active route fails to work, one of the standby routers in
the virtual router will be selected as the new active router according to the priority.
This new active router continues to forward data for the network host.

Click Service ConfigurationPTN/IPRANIPRAN VRRP Config in the
OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
For setting the VRRP parameters, see Table 7-19.
7-46
Version: A

The VRRP configuration parameters are described in the following table.
Table 7-19
Description of VRRP configuration Parameters
Item
Description
Virtual Router ID
The virtual router IDs within an NE must

be unique.
Virtual IP
Indicates the IP address of the virtual
Address
router.
VRRP
Indicates the time interval for sending
Announcement
VRRP messages.
Interval (s)

Indicates the time interval for sending
Free ARP Send
free ARP. This function promptly notifies
Interval (m)
the uplink device to update the ARP

table or MAC address table.
Sets the time period delayed for
Delay
Preemption Time
IPRAN VRRP
Basic
Config
Properties
(s)
preemption. If no VRRP messages are

received after the default waiting time
and the delayed preemption time, the
standby router will switch to the active
router and send VRRP messages.
Indicates the lowered priority level of the
Priority
active router when the primary
Reduction
monitoring port of the active router is

unavailable.
Enable BFD
Sets whether to enable the BFD to

detect VRRP failures.
Options are VRRP Non Preemption
Mode and VRRP Preemption Mode.
In VRRP preemption mode, if the
VRRP Mode
priority of the standby router is higher

than that of the active router, the
standby router will actively upgrade to
be the active router.
VRRP Session
Enabling /
Disabling
Version: A
Sets whether to enable the current

VRRP session.
7-47
Table 7-19
Description of VRRP configuration Parameters (Continued)
Item
Description
Active / Standby
Track ID
Active / Standby
VRRP Router
Active /
Batch Rule
Settings
7.1.9
Standby
Active / Standby
Router
VRRP Port
It is consistent with VRRP TrackID in

TRACK_BFD Config of the router NE
configuration.
Selects the active / standby router.
Selects the port applicable to the virtual
IP address of the active / standby
router.
Active / Standby
Sets it to the uplink port of the active /
Monitor Port
standby router.
Signaling
Sets the port for the active / standby
Declaration Port
VRRP router to send VRRP messages.
Number of Items to Batch-add

Virtual IP Address Step

Sets the virtual IP address step to be
added in batch configuration.
Creating Tunnels Quickly

The following introduces the Quickly Create Tunnel configuration GUI and related
parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANQuickly Create Tunnel in the
OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
For description of the parameters on the Quickly Create Tunnel window, see
Description of GUI Parameters in Tunnel.
7-48
Version: A
7.1.10
Quickly Create Ethernet Service

The following introduces the Quickly Create Ethernet Service configuration GUI
and related parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationPTN/IPRANQuickly Create Ethernet Service
in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
Configure the Ethernet service and PW. For the description of the parameters,
see Description of GUI Parameters in L2VPN Service and PW.
Version: A
7-49
7-50
Version: A
7.2
POTN/PE-OTN
The following introduces the POTN/PE-OTN configuration item in the Service
Configuration tab.
The POTN/PE-OTN configuration item contains multiple channel configurations,
protection ring configurations and service configurations, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Version: A
7-51
Figure 7-2
7.2.1
POTN/PE-OTN Configuration Item
Optical Channel
Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTNOptical Channel to open the
configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-3.
7-52
Version: A
Figure 7-3
OCh Channel Configuration GUI
Multi-Service Configuration
Auto Create All OCH Circuit: This button can be used to automatically generate the
OCh circuits of the entire network, without the need of manual configuration.
Circuit Properties
Circuit Code: Configures the circuit numbering assigned when configuring the OCh
channel.
Circuit Name: Sets a name for the Och channel.
Version: A
7-53
Connection Type:
u
PC: Indicates permanent connection. It refers to the service connection

established by the OTNM200 issuing command to the NE. For the system with
no control plane, it is recommended to select PC.
SPC: Indicates Soft Permanent Connection, which refers to the service

connection between permanent connections and switching connection. The
user-to-transmission-network configuration is directly completed by the
OTNM2000, while the connections within the transmission network are
completed first by the OTNM2000 sending requests to the NE control plane
and then configured by the NE control via signaling. The intelligent services
usually refer to the SPC. For the system with control plane, it is recommended
to select SPC.
Path Direction:
u
Bidirectional: Sets it to bidirectional optical channel.
Unidirectional: Set it to unidirectional optical channel.
Broadcast: Sets it to broadcast optical channel.
Port Type (2.5G, 10G, 40G and 100G): Selects the corresponding rate according to
the card port. If the port selected is inappropriate, the desired card and port cannot
be found in the configuration GUI of next step.
Protection Type (No Protection, SNCP OCh 1+1, SNCP OCh m:n and Card 1+1
Protection): Select the desired protection type. After the protection is selected, the
Protection Parameters are available.
Protection Parameters
Protection Mode:
u
Unidirectional Protection: In case of failures of the working channel, the

receiving end of the local NE will switch to the interface card of the protection
line, with no operation performed to the far end NE.
Bidirectional Protection: In case of failures of the working channel, both the

receiving ends of the local NE and the far end NE will switch to the interface
card of the protection line.
7-54
Version: A
Return Type:
u
Return: In case failures of working channel, the service will switch to the
protection channel. Once the working channel restores, the service will
automatically switch back to the working channel after the time period specified
in WTR Time.
Non Revertive: In case failures of working channel, the service will switch to the
protection channel and will still runn in the protection channel even if the
working channel restores.
Hold-off Timing: In case of working channel failure, the service will conduct
switching after the hold-off time.
WTR Time: Indicates the waiting time for the service to switch from protection
channel to the working channel once the working channels restore from the failure.
Alarm Monitor Type: Sets the monitoring type that triggers switching.
u
Unconfigured: Indicates not configuring any monitoring types.
SNCP/I: Indicates the inherent monitoring. The triggering conditions include the
OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss, and the SM
section overhead alarm.
SNCP/N: Indicates the non-intrusive monitoring. The triggering conditions

include the OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss,
and the overhead alarms of the SM, TCM and PM sections.
SNCP/S: Indicates the sub-layer monitoring. The triggering conditions include

the OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss, and the
overhead alarms of the SM and TCM sections.
OCh: The triggering conditions include the OCh layer alarms, such as card
disabling, optical signaling loss, and the overhead alarms of the SM and PM
sections.
User Properties
Client Name: Sets the username for the channel, which provides convenience for
maintenance.
User Label: Sets the user label for the channel, which provides convenience for
maintenance.
Version: A
7-55
ASON Advanced Settings

When Connection Type under Circuit Properties is set to SPC, the ASON
Advanced Settings button appears. Click this button to open the ASON Advanced
Settings window, as shown in Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5. Before setting the ASON
advanced parameters, select or deselect the Strict Routing as needed.
Figure 7-4
7-56
Selecting SPC
Version: A
Figure 7-5
The ASON Advanced Settings Window
Protection Type:
u
No Protection: Indicates no protection is to be configured. When no protection

is selected here, Return Type can only be set to No Recovery.
1+1 Trail Protection: ASON calculates the active and standby routes from the
source end to the sink end for the service. When this protection is selected,
Return Type can be set to No Recovery, Re-routing Restoration or
Permanent 1+1.
Dynamic Re-routing: When the route that the service uses fails, ASON will
dynamically find other available route. When this protection is selected, Return
Type can be only set to Re-routing Restoration.
Return Type: Selects different return types according to the Protection Type.
Routing Policy: Indicates the policy adopted by the service for first routing. Options
are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load Balance.
Re-routing Policy: Indicates the policy adopted for re-routing when the current route
fails. Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load Balance.
Version: A
7-57
Node Unrelated / Link Unrelated / SRLG: When Protection Type is set to 1+1 Trail
Protection, you can set the irrelevance of the active / standby route.
u
Node Unrelated: The active and standby routes have no coincident

intermediate nodes. The routing module will eliminate the resources of the
intermediate node on the active route and then calculate the standby route.
Link Unrelated: The active and standby routes have no coincident links. The
calculation method is same as "Node Unrelated".
SRLG: The active and standby nodes are in the same shared-risk link group.
The calculation method is the opposite to "Node Unrelated".
CrankBack: When the control plane performs routing according to the routing policy,
it will feed back the prompt information upon node failure or insufficient resource
and perform re-routing until no resources are available.
Prevent Mis-deletion: In project application, once the channel is deleted by mistake
due to the signaling network, the system will lock the resources of the channel to
prevent deletion of the services by mistake.
Make before break: In case that a route passes multiple nodes and one of its SPC
channels fails and is disconnected, the rest SPC channels will be released and
used promptly.
Revert Delay: When the revert delay is configured, the system will start the
protection switching of the corresponding layer after the delay set here once the
protection switching trigger condition is deleted.
Reserve Priority: Indicates the priority level for obtaining the resources. Value range:
0 - 7. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is.
Setup Priority: Indicates the priority level for keeping resources. Value range: 0 - 7.
The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is.
Recovery Priority: Indicates the priority for the service to restore when passing the
same failed link. Value range: 0 - 255. The smaller the value is, the higher the
priority level is.
M: N Priority: Indicates the M:N priority.
M:N ID: Indicates the M: N ID.
7-58
Version: A
Opto-electrical Protection Hold-off Time: Indicates the hold-off time for the protection
and restoration of the optical and electrical layers.
7.2.2
ODUk Channel
Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTNODUk Channel to open the
configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6
ODUk Channel Configuration GUI
Auto Create: In case the circuits of the same ODUk level use the same OCh port,
you can select Auto Create to create ODUk channels in a batch manner.
As Server Layer of LSP:
Batch Configuration, not support rollback to modify:
Low Order Cross:
Single NECross:
Version: A
7-59
Circuit Properties
ODUk Level: Sets the service type used by the port of the source / sink NE line
interface card.
Circuit Code: Sets the circuit numbering assigned when configuring the ODUk
channel.
Circuit Name: Sets a name for the ODUk channel.
Path Direction:
u
Bidirectional: Sets it to ODUk bidirectional optical channel.
Unidirectional: Sets it to ODUk unidirectional channel.
Loopback: Sets it to ODUk loopback optical channel.
Link Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
Protection Info
Protection Type (No Protection, SNCP ODUk 1+1, SNCP ODUk m:n and ETH
Protect over ODUk): Selects the desired protection type. After the protection is
selected, other parameters under Protection Info are available.
Protection Mode: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
Revert Type: See the description of Revert Type in Optical Channel.
Hold-off Time: See the description of Hold-off Time in Optical Channel.
WTR Time: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
Monitor: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
User Properties
Client Name: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
User Label: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
7-60
Version: A

See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
7.2.3
Client Service Channel

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTNClient service channel to open
the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7
Client Service Channel Configuration GUI
Circuit Properties
Low Order Cross: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel.
Single NECross: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel.
Batch Configuration, not support rollback to modify: See the related configuration in
ODUk Channel.
Service Type (GE, GE_GFP_T, FE, ESCON, FICON, DVB, HDTV(1485M), EPON,
GPON or HD_SDI): Selects the service type of client-side port of the source NE
tributary interface card.
Version: A
7-61
Circuit Code: Sets the circuit numbering assigned when configuring the client
service channel.
Circuit Name: Sets a name for the client service channel.
Path Direction:
u
Bidirectional: Sets it to client service bidirectional optical channel.
Unidirectional: Sets it to client service unidirectional channel.
Broadcast: Sets it to broadcast optical channel.
Loopback: Sets it to client service loopback optical channel.
Connection Type:
u
PC: Indicates the permanent connection. It refers to the service connection

established by the OTNM200 issuing command to the NE. For the system with
no control plane, it is recommended to select PC.
SPC: Indicates Soft Permanent Connection, which refers to the service

connection between permanent connections and switching connection. The
user-to-transmission-network configuration is directly completed by the
OTNM2000, while the connections within the transmission network are
completed first by the OTNM2000 sending requests to the NE control plane
and then configured by the NE control via signaling. The intelligent services
usually refer to the SPC. For the system with control plane, it is recommended
to select SPC.
SC: Indicates the switched connection. The service connection established in

the control plane via the signaling by the terminal end user (such as router)
initiating a calling to the ASON control plane.
Protection Type (No Protection, Extra Service, Tributary 1+1 Protection, Optical
Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection and 1+1 Protection In Card): Select the
protection type according to your actual situation.
User Properties
Client Name: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
7-62
Version: A
7.2.4
ODUk Protection Group

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTNODUk protection group to
open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-8
ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI
Basic Information
ODUk Level: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel.
Protection Group Name: Sets a name for the ODUk protection group.
Protection Info
Protection Type (SNCP ODUk 1+1, SNCP ODUk m:n): Selects the desired
protection type.
Protection Mode: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
Revert Type: See the description of Revert Type in Optical Channel.
Hold-off Time: See the description of Hold-off Time in Optical Channel.
Version: A
7-63
Monitor Info: See the description of Monitor Info in Optical Channel.
7.2.5
OCh Ring Protection

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTNOCh ring protection to open
Figure 7-9
OCh Ring Protection Configuration GUI
Cross-EMS Ring: Sets whether it is a cross-EMS ring.

Client Name: Sets the client name for the ring, which provides convenience for
maintenance.
Ring Name: Sets the name of the protection ring.
Ring Type: Set the type of the protection ring to OTN OCH Ring.
Port Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
Return Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
7-64
Version: A
Hold-off Timing: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

Alarm Monitor Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
7.2.6
ODUk Ring Protection

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTNODUk ring protection to open
Figure 7-10
ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI
Cross-EMS Ring: Sets whether it is a cross-EMS ring.

ODUk Level: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel.
Hold-off Timing: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
Version: A
7-65

Alarm Monitor Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.
7.2.7
Tunnel
For the description of the Tunnel configuration GUI and related parameters, see
Tunnel in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)Tunnel(T) in the OTNM2000
main menu.
7.2.8
PW
For the description of the PW configuration GUI and related parameters, see PW in
the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)PW(W) in the OTNM2000
main menu.
7.2.9
L2VPN Service
For the description of the L2VPN configuration GUI and related parameters, see
L2VPN Service in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)L2VPN(L) in the OTNM2000
main menu.
7-66
Version: A
7.2.10
L3VPN Service
For the description of the L3VPN configuration GUI and related parameters, see
L3VPN Service in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)L3VPN(N) in the OTNM2000
main menu.
7.2.11
Group Service
For the description of the Group Service configuration GUI and related parameters,
see Group Service in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)Group Service in the
OTNM2000 main menu.
7.2.12
Ring Protection
The Ring Protection window under POTN/PE-OTN has the extra ERPS
protection ring configuration item, compared with the Protection Ring under PTN/
IPRAN. The ERPS indicates Ethernet Ring Protection Switching, which is ring
network protection protocol developed by International Telecommunication Union
(ITU), also called G.8032. It is a link layer protocol, specially applied to the Ethernet
ring network. This protocol can prevent broadcast storm caused by data loopback
when the Ethernet ring network is complete and quickly restores the communication
among nodes on the ring network when the previous link is disconnected.
For the description of the Ring Protection configuration GUI and related
parameters, see Protection Ring under the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)Ring Protection in the
OTNM2000 main menu.
Version: A
7-67
7.2.13
IPRAN VRRP Config

For the description of the IPRAN VERRP Config configuration GUI and related
parameters, see VRRP Configuration under the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Click Business ConfigurationPOTN/PE-OTN(T)IPRAN VRRP Config (V) in
the OTNM2000 main menu.
7.3
SDH/MSTP
The following introduces the service configuration GUI and parameters of the SDH /
MSTP device.
7.3.1
Circuit
The following introduces the Circuit configuration GUI and related parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationSDH/MSTP (D)Circuit in the OTNM2000 main
menu.
7-68
Version: A
Configuration GUI
1.
Set the basic properties of the circuit, including the connection type, direction,
bandwidth and protection type. For detailed configuration of the parameters,
see Table 7-20 and Table 7-21.
u
When the connection type is set to PC or MIX, the configuration GUI is as

shown below:
Version: A
7-69
When the connection type is set to SPC, the configuration GUI is as shown
below:
7-70
Version: A
2.
Version: A
Set the source / sink NEs and source /sink ports of the circuit working path.
7-71
3.
Set the routing constraints to perform routing for the working path.
4.
Display the information of the working route. You can manually modify part of
all routes of the working path.

u
7-72
The circuit basic properties are described in the following table.
Version: A
Table 7-20
Description of Path Basic Attributes
Item
Description
u
PC: Indicates the permanent connection. The

connection is established by sending the
corresponding configuration command to each NE
that the connection path passes. The configuration
command is sent manually or by the OTNM2000
without the control plane involved.
SPC: Indicates the soft permanent connection. The

permanent connection at the edge of the network is
Connection Type:
configured by the OTNM2000. The switching

Basic
connection is implemented by the control plane
Properties
between the permanent connections at the edge of

the network so as to implement the global end-to-end
connection.
u
MIX: Indicates the lower order service that crosses the

MSTP network and ASON network or established
between intelligent NEs.
Path Direction
Circuit Type
Options are STM, PDM2M, PDM34/45M, PDM140M, ETH

and V35.
Bandwidth Type
Options are VC12, VC4 and VC3.
Cascade Type
Options are No Concatenation and Real Concatenation.
Concatena-
This field is available only when Cascade Type is set to
tion
Parameters
Options are Bidirectional, Unidirectional and broadcast.
Concatenation
Real Concatenation.
Concatenation levels include: VC4_4, VC4_16 and VC4_
64.
Circuit Info
Client Name
Sets it according to the actual situation.
Path Name
Path Code
Protection
Protection
Parameters
No Protection
Tunnel Protected
Extra Service
Revert Type
Revert Type
Options are Non Revertive and Return.
WTR Time
Version: A
Indicates the time needed for the service to restore from

the protection path to the working path.
7-73
Table 7-20
Description of Path Basic Attributes (Continued)
Item
Description
Hold-off Time
7-74
In case of working channel failure, the service will switch

after the hold-off time.
Version: A
Table 7-21
Description of ASON Advanced Parameters
Item
Description
Protection Type
Return Type
ASON
Parameter
Options are No Protection, 1+1 Trail Protection and

Dynamic Re-routing.
Options are Non Revertive and Return.
Indicates the policy adopted by the service for first routing.
Routing Policy
Settings
Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load

Balance.
Indicates the policy adopted for re-routing when the
Re-routing Policy
current route fails. Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link

Cost and Load Balance.
Version: A
7-75
Table 7-21
Description of ASON Advanced Parameters (Continued)
Item
Description
Node Unrelated / Link Unrelated / SRLG: When
Protection Type is set to 1+1 Trail Protection, you can
set the irrelevance of the active / standby route.
u
Node Unrelated: The active and standby routes have

no coincident intermediate nodes. The routing module
will eliminate the resources of the intermediate node
on the active route and then calculate the standby
route.
Link Unrelated: The active and standby routes have

no coincident links. The calculation method is same
as Node Unrelated.
SRLG: The active and standby nodes are in the same

shared-risk link group. The calculation method is the
opposite to Node Unrelated.
CrankBack: When the control plane performs routing

according to the routing policy, it will feed back the prompt
information upon node failure or insufficient resource and
perform re-routing until no resources are available.
Prevent Mis-deletion: In project application, once the
channel is deleted by mistake due to the signaling
network, the system will lock the resources of the channel
Other Parameters
to prevent deletion of the services by mistake.

Make before break: In case that a route passes multiple
nodes and one of its SPC channels fails and is
disconnected, the rest SPC channels will be released and
used promptly.
Revert Delay: When the revert delay is configured, the
system will start the protection switching of the
corresponding layer after the delay set here once the
protection switching trigger condition is deleted.
Reserve Priority: Indicates the priority level for obtaining
the resources. Value range: 0 - 7. The smaller the value is,
the higher the priority level is.
Setup Priority: Indicates the priority level for keeping
resources. Value range: 0 - 7. The smaller the value is, the
higher the priority level is.
Recovery Priority: Indicates the priority for the service to
restore when passing the same failed link. Value range: 0 255. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level
is.
7-76
M: N Priority: Indicates the M:N priority.
Version: A
M:N ID: Indicates the M: N ID.

Opto-electrical Protection Hold-off Time: Indicates the
hold-off time for the protection and restoration of the
optical and electrical layers.
7.3.2
VCG Channel
The following introduces the VCG Channel configuration GUI and related
parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationSDH/MSTP (D)VCG Channel in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
Set or modify the source / sink NEs and source / sink ports of the VCG circuit.
For details, see Table 7-22.
Version: A
7-77
2.
Set or modify the lower-level service circuit of the VCG circuit and then
complete the creation.

u
The source / sink NEs and ports of the VCG circuit are described in the
following table.
Table 7-22
Description of the Source / Sink NEs Ports of the VCG Circuit
Item
Description
Source
Cross-EMS
Sink
7.3.3
When Source is selected, the Source Port parameter is

unavailable.
When Sink is selected, the Sink Port parameter is
unavailable.
Source / Sink NE
Selects the source / sink NE of the VCG circuit.
Source / Sink Port
Selects the source / sink port of the VCG circuit.
Port Type
Options are ALL, FE, GE and XGE.
Path Name
Protection Ring
The following introduces the Protection Ring configuration GUI and related
parameters for the SDH / MSTP device.

Click Service ConfigurationSDH/MSTP(D)Protection Ring in the OTNM2000
main menu.
Configuration GUI
1.
Set the basic properties, such as ring type and return mode. For details, see
Table 7-23.
7-78
Version: A
2.
Specify the start node and link of the ring for routing and then complete the ring
creation.
Version: A
7-79

u
The basic properties of the SDH / MSTP protection ring are described in the
following table.
Table 7-23
Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties
Item
7-80
Description
Basic Ring
Cross-EMS
When this option is selected, the Cross-EMS Properties
Properties
Ring
group box is available.
Version: A
Table 7-23
Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties (Continued)
Item
Description
Protection Ring
Protection Ring
WTR Time
SDH LP Protection Ring
SDH HP Protection Ring
SDH 2F MS SPRING
SDH 4F MS SPRING-Working
SDH 4F MS SPRING-Protection
SDH LINK 1+1 Ring
SDH Bidirectional Link 1+1 Ring
SDH Link 1:1 Ring
SDH Bidirectional Link 1:1 Ring

Indicates the time needed for the service to restore from
the protection path to the working path.
Revert Type
Maximum
Sets the maximum number of nodes for the cross-EMS
Cross-EMS
Node
ring.
Properties
Start Node
Number
7.4
Sets the start node number for the cross-EMS ring.
Service Template
The service templates include the LSP template, PW template, L2VPN template,
flow template, proactive OAM template and on-demand OAM template.
In the Template Management window, you can create, modify, delete and copy
templates as well as set a template as the default one.

Click Business ConfigurationService Template in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
u
Version: A
The Service Template Management Main GUI
7-81
7-82
The Creating LSP Template GUI
The Creating PW Template GUI
Version: A
Version: A
The Creating L2 Service Template GUI
The Creating Flow Template GUI
7-83
7-84
The Creating Proactive OAM Template GUI
The Creating On-demand OAM Template GUI
Version: A

For the description of the service template parameters, see the description of the
parameters on the configuration GUIs of the services under PTN/IPRAN.
7.5
Routing Template
The OTNM2000 supports unified management of tunnel circuits that has generated
routing templates and allows you to Copy, Modify and Delete routing templates.

Click Business ConfigurationRouting Template in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
The routing template management GUI is as shown in the following figure. You can
filter the desired template by setting the parameters under Filter.
Version: A
7-85
7.6
Service Global Settings

The following introduces the GUIs and parameters related to the service global
settings.
7.6.1
PTN NE Global Settings

The following introduces the "PTN NE Global Settings" configuration GUI and
parameters.

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsPTN NE Global
Settings.
7-86
Version: A
Configuration GUI
u
The "PTN NE Global Settings" main GUI is as shown in the following figure. For
the configuration of the global variable parameters, see Table 7-24.
Version: A
The BoardProtect configuration GUI.
The SlotType configuration GUI
7-87

The global variable parameters are described in the following table.
Table 7-24
Description of the PTN Global Variable Parameters
Item
APSReturnTime
Indicates the restoration time of the APS protection.

The value range is 0 to 12 minutes.
MaskCode
Mask: 0 - 16.
Port Type
Options are NNI and UNI.
Board Group, Protect Type, Protect

Slot and Protected Slot
7.6.2
Description
Configures the BoardProtect parameters according

to the type of the configured card and the card
protection type supported by the card.
Enabling the Global Section Layer OAM

The OTNM2000 supports configuring the global section layer OAM. The available TMPLS Section (TMS) provides the section layer function and the OAM monitoring
between two neighboring T-MPLS nodes.

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsGlobal VS OAM
Enable in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
Select the entries in the list to enable the global section layer OAM, as shown in the
figure below:
7-88
Version: A
7.6.3
Enabling the Global Section Layer LM Frame

The OTNM2000 supports configuring the global section layer LM frame. The LM
frame is used for measuring the lost fames of the MEP to determine the time when
the MEP is unavailable. It is implemented by sending the frame with the ETH-LM
information to the peer MEP and receives the frame with the ETH-LM info from the
peer MEP.

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsGlobal LM Frame
Enable in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Configuration GUI
Select the entries in the list to enable the global section layer LM, as shown in the
figure below:
Version: A
7-89
7.6.4
Merging OTN NEs

In case that there are multiple NEs in a station and cross-shelf fiber connections
exists between NEs, you need to merge multiple physical NEs into a logical NE for
convenient management of them via the OTNM2000.
Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsMerge OTN NEs in
the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-11
and Figure 7-12.
7-90
Version: A
Figure 7-11
Version: A
Selecting the OTN NE to Merge
7-91
Figure 7-12
The NE Merge Configuration GUI
Merge the NEs:

In the Merge OTN NEs configuration window, select the NEs to be merged in
the left pane, click Combine and click Yes in the displayed alert box to merge
the NEs, as shown in Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15.
7-92
Version: A
Version: A
Figure 7-13
Merging NEs - Selecting the NE
Figure 7-14
Merging NEs - Confirming the Configuration
7-93
Figure 7-15
Merging NEs - Completing the Configuration
Insert the NEs:

After the NEs are merged, if there are still NEs to be merged into the logic NE,
you can use Insert to merge the NEs. Select the NEs to be inserted and the
desired logic NE, click Insert and then click Yes in the displayed alert box to
complete the insertion, as shown in Figure 7-16, Figure 7-17 and Figure 7-18.
7-94
Version: A
Version: A
Figure 7-16
Inserting the NE - Selecting the NE
Figure 7-17
Inserting the NE - Confirming the Configuration
7-95
Figure 7-18
Inserting the NE - Completing the Configuration
Split the NEs:

To undo the NE merge, click Split. Select the physical NE to be separated from
the logical NE, click Split and then click Yes in the displayed alert box to
complete the splitting, as shown in Figure 7-19, Figure 7-20 and Figure 7-21.
7-96
Version: A
Version: A
Figure 7-19
Splitting the NE - Selecting the Configuration
Figure 7-20
Splitting the NE - Confirming the Configuration
7-97
Figure 7-21
Splitting the NE - Completing the Configuration
Search for NEs:

In a complex network with many NEs, it is not easy to locate the desired NE. In
this situation, you can Search NE by NE name or NE No. to locate your desired
NE. Click the Select an NE drop-down list. The Search NE window appears,
7-98
Version: A
Figure 7-22
7.6.5
The NE Search GUI
Setting the OTN Channel Wavelength

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsOTN wavelength
setup in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in
Figure 7-23 and Figure 7-24.
Version: A
7-99
7-100
Figure 7-23
Accessing the OTN Channel Wavelength Window
Figure 7-24
The OTN Channel Wavelength Window
Version: A
Selecting the NE
Single NE: Configures one NE.
Multiple NE: Configures multiple NEs.
NE (Select an NE): Selects the desired NE. For detailed configuration method, see
Search NE in Merging OTN NEs.
Parameter Configuration
Wave Band: Sets the waveband of the port. You can select the CE, CO, CE+ or CO
+ waveband.
Wavelength: Sets the wavelength of the port. You need to set the waveband before
setting the wavelength.
Interval: It is available for batch configuration. After the interval is set, the
wavelengths of the ports increase in arithmetic progression.
Synchronize Wavelength: Reads the wavelength status from the device and update
the configuration when this item is selected.
Get Status: Reads waveband and wavelength information of the port from the
device card. It is available only when the Synchronize Wavelength option is selected.
Refresh: Updates the configuration to ensure the configuration is consistent with
that on the device in case the configurations are inconsistent. It is available only
when the Synchronize Wavelength option is selected.
Download: Downloads the service properties configured to the device.
Apply: Applies the configuration data.
OK: Saves the configuration.
Cancel: Cancels the configuration.
Version: A
7-101
7.6.6
Setting the OTN NE Optical Link

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsOTN NE Optical Link
in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in
7-102
Figure 7-25
Accessing the OTN NE Optical Link Window
Figure 7-26
The OTN NE Optical Link Window
Version: A
Selecting the NE
NE (Select an NE): Select the desired NE. For detailed configuration method, see
Fiber Connection Parameter Settings

Source Slot: Indicates the card of the transmitting end of the fiber connection.
Source Port: Indicates the port of the transmitting end of the fiber connection.
Sink Slot: Indicates the card of the receiving end of the fiber connection.
Sink Port: Indicates the port of the receiving end of the fiber connection.
Cost: Commonly indicates the attenuation of the fiber connection for calculating the
route. Enters the actual attenuation or select the default value.
DCM (km): Indicates the dispersion compensation distance of the DCM module in
the physical configuration.
Automatic Fiber Connection: Switches between the automatic fiber connection and
manual fiber connection.
7.6.7
Setting the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsOTN OTUk/ODUk
Overhead in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in
Version: A
7-103
7-104
Figure 7-27
Accessing the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window
Figure 7-28
The OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window

Version: A
Selecting the NE
OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead

OTUK Config: Selects this item to configure the OTUk relevant parameters.
ODUk Config: Selects this item to configure the ODUk relevant parameters.
Level: Selects the layer of the configuration overhead.
Configuration Type: Selects the type of the configuration overhead.
7.6.8
Setting the OTN WSS Group

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsOTN WSS group in
and Figure 7-30.
Version: A
7-105
7-106
Figure 7-29
Accessing the OTN WSS Group Window
Figure 7-30
The OTN WSS Group Window

Version: A
Selecting the NE
Name: Sets a name for the OTN WSS group.
Remote Node: Set the remote node for the protection group.
OSC Direction: Sets the OSC direction to eastward or westward.
OSC Slot (Card): Sets the slot for the OSC card.
WSSD Slot (Card): Sets the slot for the WSSD card.
WSSM Slot (Card): Sets the slot for the WSSM card.
Remark: Enters the remark information for the protection group.
7.6.9
Setting the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitor

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsOTN OPM
Wavelength Monitor in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI,
as shown in Figure 7-31 and Figure 7-32.
Version: A
7-107
7-108
Figure 7-31
Accessing the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window
Figure 7-32
The OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window

Version: A
Selecting the NE
Monitored Port
Displays the status of the monitored port.
Refresh: Refreshes the OTNM2000 configuration.
Download Config: Downloads the OTNM2000 configuration to the device.
Cancel: Cancels the operation.
7.6.10
Setting the OTN SAPU Protection

Click Business ConfigurationService Global SettingsSAPU protection in
and Figure 7-34.
Figure 7-33
Version: A
Accessing the OTN SAPU Protection Window
7-109
Figure 7-34
The OTN SAPU Protection Window
Selecting the NE
Protection Type: Selects SAPU 1+1 or SAPU 1:n.
7-110
Version: A
7.7
ASON Resource Management

The OTNM2000 provides the ASON resource management function, including the
SPC resource management and SPC resource synchronization. This function can
be used to divide, synchronize and apply resources to help you understand the
usage of the resources.
7.7.1
SPC Resource Management (SDH/PTN)

This function is used to divide the port resources and link resources of the SDH /
PTN devices.

Click Business ConfigurationASON Resource ManagementSPC Resource
Management (SDH/PTN) in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Note:
In the displayed "Resource Dialog" window, the blue part indicates the
resources of the control plane while the black part indicates the
resources of the OTNM2000. You can select or deselect to divide the
resources of the OTNM2000 and the control plane.
7.7.2
SPC Resource Management (OTN / POTS)

This function is used to divide the port resources and link resources of the OTN /
POTS devices.

Click Business ConfigurationASON Resource ManagementSPC Resource
Management (OTN/POTS) in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Version: A
7-111
Note:
In the displayed "Resource Dialog" window, the blue part indicates the
resources of the control plane while the black part indicates the
resources of the OTNM2000. You can select or deselect to divide the
resources of the OTNM2000 and the control plane.
7.7.3
Synchronizing SPC Port Resources

Synchronizing the SPC port resources at the device side to the OTNM2000 ensures
that the SPC port resources in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent.
This facilitates unified management of the SPC port resources.

Click Business ConfigurationASON Resource ManagementSynchronize
SPC Port Data in the OTNM2000 main menu.
7.7.4
Synchronizing SPC Data

Synchronizing the SPC data at the device side to the OTNM2000 ensures that the
SPC data in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. This facilitates unified
management of the SPC data.

Click Business ConfigurationASON Resource ManagementSynchronize
SPC Data in the OTNM2000 main menu.
7.7.5
Synchronizing SPC Channels

Synchronizing the SPC channel data at the device side to the OTNM2000 ensures
that the SPC circuit statuses in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent.
This facilitates unified management of the SPC channel data.
7-112
Version: A

Click Business ConfigurationASON Resource ManagementForced
Synchronize SPC Path in the OTNM2000 main menu.
7.8
Displaying Routes
During configuring services, you can select the Display Route function. The route
details alert box appears for you to check whether the selected route is in
accordance with the planned route. This section takes the L2VPN service as an
example to introduce the Display Route.

Click Business ConfigurationDisplay Route in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Note:
The Display Route function can be selected only in the process of
configuring the service; otherwise, this function is greyed out.
Configuration GUI
1.
Configure the L2VPN service according to the planning and select the lowerlevel PW circuit that bears the service circuit, as shown in the figure below:
Version: A
7-113
2.
Click Business ConfigurationDisplay Route in the OTNM2000 main menu

to open the route details dialog box, as shown in the figure below:
7-114
Version: A
7.9
Options
The Options function enables you to configure Background Initialization
Parameters, Operation Parameter Settings, Menu, Script Comparer and
Display Settings.
Caution:
The parameters in the Options window are set to factory default values.
Click Business ConfigurationOptions in the OTNM2000 main menu.
Version: A
7-115
Configuration GUI
The Options window is as shown in the following figure.
7.10
Querying Services
The service query window enables you to view the details of services and allows
you to modify or monitor alarms / performance.
7-116
Version: A
The OTNM2000 removes the service query function from the service configuration
function to the Business Management menu. The types of services can be queried
are as shown in the figure below:
Prerequisite
The OTNM2000 has connected to the multi-service management service.
Precautions
This section uses the tunnel as an example. When querying services of other types,
the query procedures are the same except that the contents displayed in the filter
dialog box are different.
Version: A
7-117
Procedure
1.
Click Business ManagementTunnel(T) in the main menu.
2.
Enter the filter information in the Tunnel dialog box according to the service
details. as shown in the figure below:
3.
Click Filter to filter the services.
4.
View the details of the service filtered in the Tunnel tab, as shown in the figure
below:
7-118
Version: A
Filter Condition
Sets the filter condition to query services.
Area
2
Query Result
Displays the results matching the condition. You can right-click a
Area
service in the list and select corresponding menus from the shortcut
menu to perform related operations.
Service Details
By selecting a service in the query result, you can view the detailed
Area
information of the service and modify some service parameters. The

service details tab varies with different services.
7.11
Managing Broken Services

The OTNM2000 merges the Broken Service Management into the Business
Management menu, convenient for you to query and manage the broken or to-berepaired services.
Prerequisite
u
The OTNM2000 has connected to the multi-service management service.
The devices or links in the current network have been adjusted and broken
services exist.
Precautions
This section uses querying the broken tunnel as an example. When querying
broken services of other types, the query procedures are the same except that the
contents displayed in the filter dialog box are different.
Version: A
7-119
Querying the Broken Service

u
Querying via the main menu.

1)
Click Business ManagementBroken data managementBroken

Tunnel(T) in the OTNM2000 main menu, as shown in the figure below:
2)
In the displayed tunnel filter dialog box, enter the filter information and then
click Filter, as shown in the figure below:
7-120
Version: A
3)
Open the Broken Tunnel tab, click any entry and view the relevant
information, as shown in the figure below:
u
Version: A
Querying via the shortcut menu

7-121
1)
Click the Broken business object statistics shortcut menu on the

OTNM2000 main GUI
2)
In the displayed Business object statistics list, click the digit in red of the
Broken Tunnel item, as shown in the figure below:
3)
Open the Broken Tunnel tab, click any entry and view the relevant
information.
Repairing the Broken Service

For the method and procedures of repairing broken services, see "Cutover
Management Operation Guide".
7.12
Saving Configuration Data to the Database

This function saves the current service configuration of the OTNM2000 to the
database.
Prerequisite
u
The current configuration data are correct.
1.
Click Business ManagementSave Config Data to Database in the main
Procedure
menu.
2.
In the displayed Business Management dialog box, click Yes, as shown in the
figure below:
7-122
Version: A
3.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to save the configuration data, as shown in
the figure below:
7.13
Reading Configuration Data from the

Database
This function reloads all service configurations from the database.
Prerequisite
u
The configuration data saved into the database last time are correct.
1.
Click Business ManagementRead Config Data from Database in the main
Procedure
menu.
2.
In the displayed Business Management dialog box, click Yes, as shown in the
figure below:
Version: A
7-123
3.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to read the configuration data, as shown in
the figure below:
7.14
Full Download
The following introduces how to save the NE cross-connect data to the database
and download the NE cross-connect data to the device.
7.14.1
Saving Cross-connect Data (NE)

The following introduces how to save the NE cross-connect script to the database.
Prerequisite
u
1.
Click Business ManagementFull DownloadSave Cross-connect (NE)
Procedure
in the main menu.

2.
In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to open the Save
NE Cross-connect dialog box, as shown in the figure below:
7-124
Version: A
3.
Click Compare the Script to compare whether the new and old scripts are
consistent.
Note:
Whether the new and old scripts are consistent does not influence saving
the NE cross-connect.
4.
Click Compare Board Config to compare whether the card configurations are
consistent.
Note:
Whether the card configurations are consistent does not influence saving
5.
Click Start to save the cross-connect data.
6.
Click Yes in the displayed Saved to the file successfully alert box, as shown
in the figure below:
Version: A
7-125
7.
7.14.2
Click OK in the displayed Note alert box, as shown in the figure below:
Delivering the Cross-connect Data (NE)

The following introduces how to deliver the cross-connect data generated to the
device.
Prerequisite
u
1.
Click Business ManagementFull DownloadDeliver Cross-connect (NE)
Procedure
in the main menu.

2.
In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to open the
Deliver NE Cross-connect dialog box, as shown in the figure below:
7-126
Version: A
3.
Click Compare the Script to compare whether the new and old scripts are
consistent.
Note:
Whether the new and old scripts are consistent does not influence saving
4.
Click Compare Board Config to compare whether the card configurations are
consistent.
Note:
Whether the card configurations are consistent does not influence saving
5.
Version: A
Click Download to deliver the NE cross-connect data.
7-127
Caution:
1.
If the system prompts that non-severe errors occur during the

downloading, check Force or Ignore Error and Continue
download, repeat Step 5.
2.
If the download still fails after checking Force or Ignore Error and
Continue download, you need to eliminate the failure according to
the error note and perform Step 5 again.
6.
In the displayed Close save/download window alert box, click Yes, as shown
in the figure below:
7.
In the displayed Saved to file successfully alert box, click Yes. An alert box
appears, prompting the configuration data are saved successfully, as shown in
the figure below:
7.14.3
Saving SDH NE Cross-connect Data

You can save the SDH NE cross-connect configuration into the database and view
the SDH NEs and the corresponding NE cross-connect save status in the Save NE
Cross tab.
Prerequisite
u
7-128
Version: A
The SDH device and the corresponding NE data have been configured in the
OTNM2000.
1.
Click Business ManagementFull DownloadSave SDH NE Cross-
Procedure
connect (NE) in the main menu.

2.
View the SDH NEs and the corresponding NE cross-connect save status in the
Save NE Cross tab, as shown in the figure below:
Version: A
7-129
Alarm Management
The OTNM2000 network management system provides the alarm management
function of monitoring, displaying, restoring and statistics of the alarm signal. The
alarm management is used in daily maintenance to assist users in finding, isolating
and resolving faults.
Basic Concept
Setting Alarm-related Parameters
Viewing Alarms
Setting the Alarm Template
Handling Alarms
Saving Alarm History Data
Managing the Alarm Filter
Setting Alarm Suppression
Customizing Alarm Levels
Managing Alarm Report
Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder
Version: A
8-1
8.1
Basic Concept
The alarm is the main information source for knowing about the operating condition
of the network and the fault isolation. Users must master related concept of alarms,
so as to manage alarms effectively.
Alarm Browsing
By viewing alarms, you can understand the running status of the network in a timely
manner. The alarm browsing operation includes viewing the current alarms or alarm
history of projects, network blocks, NEs, cards, channels and services and
refreshing, filtering, confirming and locating these alarms.
u
Alarm Browsing: Views the current alarms and alarm history of related
equipment and services in the OTNM2000 to understand the running status of
the network or equipment.
Alarm Confirmation: When an alarm is confirmed, it indicates the alarm is

processed. It includes manual confirmation and automatic confirmation.
Manual Confirmation: You can manually confirm the selected alarm in the
current alarm window and add additional information for the alarm, which
will facilitate subsequent query.
Automatic Confirmation: The OTNM2000 will automatically confirm the

alarms ended 24 hours ago.
Alarm Locating: You can locate the alarm information to NE in the logical tree or
main topology.
Navigate to Logical Tree: Highlights the alarmed NE in the Logical Tree

pane.
Navigate to Main Topology: Circles the alarmed NE in blue in the Main

Topology tab.
Alarm Refreshing: Obtains the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000 alarm
database and display them on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Refresh: Manually obtains the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000
alarm database and displays them on the OTNM2000 GUI.
8-2
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Auto Refresh: The system automatically obtains the latest alarm data
from the OTNM2000 alarm database every 5 seconds and display them on
the OTNM2000 GUI.
Alarm Help Management: Sets the reason that may trigger the alarm and
general processing principle as well as other related information.
Alarm Notification Mode

As obtaining alarm information promptly is important for alarm handling and network
maintenance, the OTNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm notification.
u
Alarm Indicator Color: The OTNM2000 adopts the color changes of the alarm
indicator to help you quickly locate the alarmed object. By default, the alarm
indicator uses grey to indicate the interruption alarm, red to indicate the critical
alarm, orange to indicate the major alarm, yellow to indicate the minor alarm
and blue to indicate the prompt alarm. You can also customize the color of the
alarm indicator for alarms of different levels.
Alarm Animation: When new alarms of the current project occur, the
OTNM2000 prompts OTNM2000 ALARM! animation which provides
equipment alarms for users for the equipment maintenance in a timely manner.
Alarm Flickering: When an new alarm of an NE occurs, the Main Topology tab
flashes the icon of the NE to prompt the occurrence of the new alarm.
Alarm Sound: The OTNM2000 client end connects to the loudspeaker box to
broadcast different sounds to distinguish alarms of different levels. You can
customize sounds for alarms of different levels. See Setting the Alarm Sound
Reminder.
Remote Alarm Notification: Notifies you of the alarms when you are not on site.
There are two ways of remote alarm notification.
Sends alarms via emails automatically to the specified email address.
Sends alarms in the form of SMS automatically to the designated users'

phone.
Note:
Alarm remote notification is realized by the SmsAgent software
developed by Fiberhome.
Version: A
8-3
Alarm Level
Alarm levels are used to identify the severity, importance and urgency of the alarms.
The OTNM2000 classifies the alarms into the following four levels in terms of
severity: critical alarm, major alarm, minor alarm and prompt alarm. The alarms of
different levels have different meanings and should be processed differently, as
shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1
Meaning and Severity of Alarm Levels
Alarm Level
Interruption alarm
Meaning
Indicates the alarms on interruption of
network blocks, NEs and cards.
Processing Principle
Processed immediately.
Indicates the alarms on the failures

Critical alarm
that are global or may cause
Processed urgently.
corruption of NEs and services.

Major alarm
Minor alarm
Indicates the alarms on the failures of

cards or services in a certain range.
Processed timely.
Indicates the alarms on failures of
Alarm reason should be found
general cards or services.
timely to eliminate the failure.
Indicates the alarms that may

influence the service quality of devices
Prompt alarm
or resources other than system

performance and service. Some of
Processed accordingly.
them are just information prompting

the devices are back to normal.
Alarm Status
Alarms can be divided into different status according to whether the alarm has been
ended or confirmed.
u
Unended and unconfirmed: Alarms are not confirmed and ended by users.
Unended but confirmed: Alarms are confirmed but not ended by users.
Ended but unconfirmed: Locking alarm, alarms are not confirmed but ended by
users.
Ended and confirmed: Alarms are confirmed and ended by users.
The switch of alarm status is triggered by the alarm ending and identifying.
8-4
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Alarm ending refers to the causes of alarm disappear and the NE monitors that
the alarm ends and reports to the network management to refresh the alarm
status.
Alarm identifying provides the function that an alarm is whether to be processed

by users. Users process two types of alarms differently according to the status
whether the alarm is confirmed.
Alarm Type
Alarms can be divided into five types according to the different causes.
u
Equipment alarm: Alarms of the equipment hardware.
Quality of Service (QoS) alarm: Alarms of service status and network QoS.
Communication alarm: Alarms of NE communication and optical signal

communication.
Environmental alarm: Alarms of power supply system and equipment room

environment.
Processing failure alarm: Alarms of software processing and abnormal

situation.
Current Alarm and Alarm History

Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history according to the time of
occurrence.
u
Current alarm: An alarm that exists and has not been ended in current network
or equipment.
To meet different requirements, the current alarm tab allows you to view the
alarms already ended but unconfirmed.
Alarm history: An alarm that is ended in the network or the equipment.
Alarm and Event

When detecting the status changes of objects, the OTNM2000 presents them via
alarms or events according to the preset definition.
Version: A
8-5
Any changes to managed objects are called events. The occurrence of events
only indicates the changes to managed objects, not necessarily resulting in
service anomaly.
Alarms are exceptions of events. The occurrence of alarms indicates

anomalies or failures of managed objects and need to be processed.
Alarm Saving
When the alarm history saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it will
influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The alarm saving function
can be used to remove the alarm history data from the database to a specified file,
which improves the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000
supports triggering the alarm saving function by the number of records or saving
time.
u
Alarm saving triggered by number of records: You can set the alarm history
threshold and the OTNM2000 will regularly check the alarm history data. When
the alarm history data reach the preset capacity, the OTNM2000 will save the
data to a designated file in the specified time.
Alarm saving triggered by saving time: You can set the saving period (days) of
alarm history data. When the alarm history data saved in the database reach
the preset the time period, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated
file in the specified time.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is composed of the main indicator, frame and prompt icon. The
main indicator of the main topology and logical tree differs from the main indicator of
the subrack and card in that the former displays object types using different icons.
Location
Alarm Indicator
Main Topology
Logical Tree
Subrack
8-6
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Location
Alarm Indicator
Vertically plugged card
Horizontally plugged card
Main indicator: The color of the main indicator depends on the color of the
highest priority level of the unfinished alarms (excluding interruption alarms).
Frame: The color of the frame depends on the color of the highest priority level
of the unconfirmed alarms (excluding interruption alarms).
Prompt icon: Prompts the focused alarm and interruption alarm information. In
case of coexisting of focused alarms and interruption alarm, the defined icon for
focused alarms will be displayed preferentially. If there are no customized
alarms or interruption alarms, the prompt icon will be not displayed.
Note:
The icon for focused alarms is set in the Alarm Report Settings dialog
box according to Setting the Alarm Reporting.
8.2
Setting Alarm-related Parameters

You can set the alarm-related parameters, including alarm sound, alarm animation
and whether to save the alarm query conditions.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemOptions to open the System Option Settings dialog box.

This dialog box includes the Query Condition, Automatic Function and
Sound Option tabs.
Version: A
8-7
2.
Click the tab name on the left and the corresponding settings appear on the
right. For details, see Table 8-2.
Table 8-2
Tab
Query
Description of Alarm-related Parameters

Menu Option
Description
Save Current Alarm
When the item is selected, the system will
Query Condition
automatically save the corresponding conditions
Save History Alarm
configured during the current query. The two
Query Condition
options are selected by default.
Set History Alarm
When this item is selected, you need to set the
Query Condition First
query condition before querying alarm history.
Condition
Current Alarm In Front
When this item is selected, the added current alarm

will display at the top of the Current Alarm tab.
Set the query time-out duration so that the system
Interval of Query Time
will end the query thread timed out and clear the
Out
related resource to improve the running efficiency

of the OTNM2000.
8-8
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Table 8-2
Description of Alarm-related Parameters (Continued)
Tab
Menu Option
Description
Automatically refresh
When this item is selected, the OTNM2000 will
the current alarm initial
refresh the current alarms of the project
value of the project
automatically.
Automatic
Function
Automatically refresh
other current alarm
initial values
Enable Sound

refresh the current alarms of all objects except the
project (including network block, NE, bureau, shelf
and card) automatically.
Selects it to enable the alarm sound.
When Alarm Sound is selected, the OTNM2000
will play alarm sound once an alarm occurs; when
Sound Play Options
Loop Play is also selected, and the sound will not

stop till the alarm disappears unless the play time
limit is set.
Selects Time Limit to set the play duration of the
Play Time Settings
alarm sound. It is available only when the Sound

Play Option is set to Loop Play.
When New Alarm Sound Overrides the Previous
Alarm Sound is selected, the sound of the new
alarm will take place of the sound of the previous
Sound Option
Sound Priority
alarm once a new alarm occurs. When Play the

Audio based on the Alarm Severity is selected,
the OTNM2000 will play the sound of the alarm with
higher priority once an alarm occurs.
AVI StartUp
display the alarm information dynamically once an

alarm occurs.
When this item is selected, a dynamic prompt of the
new alarm that scrolls from left to right will appear
AVI Scrolling
on the GUI once an alarm occurs.

Note: The AVI StartUp item should be selected
together.
3.
Version: A
Click OK.
8-9
8.3
Viewing Alarms
Network maintenance engineers can know about the network operating status in a
timely manner via viewing the alarm.
8.3.1
Viewing Current Alarms

Users can know about the current operating status of the network via viewing
current alarm. Users can refresh, confirm and filter alarms when viewing the current
alarm.
Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history according to their status.
u
or equipment.
1.
Select the path in Table 8-3 to open the Current Alarm tab.
Procedure
Table 8-3
Access Method of Viewing the Current Alarm
Operation
Access Method
Select AlarmCurrent Alarm in the main menu and select the desired
project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane,
and click

Viewing Current
pane and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.
Alarms
Right-click the desired card or shelf in the shelf view or rack view and select
Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.
Select Management ToolAlarm ManagementCurrent Alarm in the
Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE in
the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
8-10
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Table 8-3
Operation
Access Method of Viewing the Current Alarm (Continued)

Access Method
Select relevant submenus under the Business Management menu to open
the service management tab, right-click the desired circuit or service and
select Alarm/Performance QueryQuery Current Alarm from the
shortcut menu. In the displayed Operation Object Selection dialog box,
select the desired object and click OK.
2.
In the Current Alarm tab, view the current alarm information of the selected
object, as shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1
3.
Checking the Current Alarm Information
(Optional) Right-click the alarm list title bar to bring up the title bar option list to
select the title to be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Version: A
8-11
Figure 8-2
Option List of the Alarm Title Bar
Other Operations
In the Current Alarm tab, right-click in the alarm display area and select the
corresponding shortcut menu to refresh alarms, confirm alarms or filter alarms. For
details, see Handling Alarms.
8.3.2
Viewing Alarm History

Users can know about the faults of network via viewing alarm history, so as to
facilitate the fault analysis. Users can refresh and filter alarms when viewing the
alarm history.
8-12
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history according to the time of
occurrence.
u
or equipment.
1.
Select the path in Table 8-4 to open the Alarm History tab.
Procedure
Table 8-4
Access Method of Viewing the Alarm History
Operation
Access Method
Select AlarmAlarm History in the main menu, select the desired
project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree
pane, and click
Right-click the desired project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree tab
and select Alarm History from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the desired card or shelf in the shelf view or rack view and
Viewing the alarm
history
select Alarm History in the shortcut menu.

Select Management ToolAlarm ManagementAlarm History in the
Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE in
the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
Select relevant submenus under the Business Management menu to

open the service management tab, right-click the desired circuit or service
and select Alarm/Performance QueryQuery Current Alarm from the
2.
View the alarm history information of the selected objects in the Alarm History
tab, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Version: A
8-13
Figure 8-3
3.
Viewing the Alarm History
(Optional) Right-click the alarm list title bar to bring up the title bar option list to
select the title to be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-4.
8-14
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-4
Option List of the Title Bar
Other Operations
In the Alarm History tab, right-click anywhere in the tab and select the
corresponding shortcut menu to refresh, confirm or filter alarms. For details, see
Handling Alarms.
8.3.3
Viewing Reported Events

Users can know about the equipment current operating status via viewing report
events.
Version: A
8-15
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityView Report Event in the main menu to open the Report
Event tab and view the events related to the ASON equipment.
2.
(Optional) Right-click any area in the Report Event tab and select Query
Condition from the shortcut menu to set the reporting time range of the events
and click Query to display the reported events in the specified time range.
Note:
You can select SystemNetwork Status Monitor in the main menu and
click Event in the Network Status Monitor tab to view the information of
related events.
8.3.4
Viewing Environmental Monitoring Alarms

You can monitor the environment of the specified object via the function of viewing
environmental monitoring alarms.
Procedure
1.
Select AlarmHouse-keeping Alarm in the main menu to open the Housekeeping Alarm window.
2.
Right-click Network in the left pane of the window and select Add NE Group
3.
Enter the NE group name in the Add NE Group dialog box that appears and
click OK.
4.
Drag the corresponding NE in the Logical Tree pane to the NE group in the
House-keeping Alarm window.
8-16
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Note:
u
Users can drag the NE from one NE group to the other NE group.
Right-click the NE group and select Del Group from the shortcut
menu. Click Yes in the alert box that appears to delete the selected
NE group.
Right-click the NE and select Del NE from Group from the shortcut
menu to delete the selected NE.
5.
See Step 2 to 4 to set the monitoring object and click the corresponding
monitoring object to check the environment monitoring alarm information at the
right side of the pane.
Other Operations
In the Current Alarm tab, right-click in the alarm displaying area and select the
corresponding shortcut menu to refresh alarms, confirm alarms or filter alarms. For
details, see Handling Alarms.
Version: A
8-17
8.4
Setting the Alarm Template

The OTNM2000 supports the setting of alarm query template, alarm statistical
templates and alarm level templates. You can use the preset alarm template to set
the alarm query conditions, alarm statistical conditions and alarm levels quickly.
8.4.1
Setting the Alarm Query Template

To avoid setting conditions repetitively, users can save the set alarm query
conditions as the template for convenience of querying alarms via the template in
the future.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Alarms and Viewing Alarm History to open the Current
Alarm / Alarm History tab.
2.
Right-click anywhere in the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab and select
Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Set Current Alarm
Query Condition or Set Alarm History Query Condition dialog box.
Figure 8-5 is the Set Current Alarm Query Condition dialog box. You can set
Oscillation Status, End Time and Duration in the Set Alarm History Query
Condition dialog box. The Alarm Status of the current alarm is different from
that of the alarm history.
8-18
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-5
3.
The Set Current Alarm Query Condition Dialog Box
Set query conditions and click Export... to open the dialog box as shown in
Figure 8-6.
Version: A
8-19
Figure 8-6
4.
Defining the Alarm Profile Name
Enter the template name and click OK.
Note:
u
The check box Only for this card is active only for defining the
alarm query template of the card; otherwise it is greyed out.
If the Only for this card check box is selected, the query template
can be imported only when querying alarms of this card.
8.4.2
Managing Alarm Statistical Templates

The OTNM2000 supports the customized alarm statistic template and the setting of
the statistic range of the current alarm by switching the template.
Procedure
1.
Select AlarmCustom Alarm Static Template in the main menu or select

Management ToolAlarm ManagementCustom Alarm Static Template
in the Operational Tree tab of the object tree pane to open the Custom Alarm
Static Template tab, as shown in Figure 8-7.
8-20
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-7
The Alarm Statistical Template Tab
Note:
The Alarm Statistical Template tab's shortcut menu includes all
functions of the following buttons.
2.
Add the template.

1)
Select the corresponding network block, NE or subnet in the Operational

Tree tab in the object tree pane.
2)
Click Add to open the Custom Alarm Static Template Name Setting
dialog box.
3)
Version: A
Set the relevant information of the template and click OK.
8-21
4)
3.
View or modify the template.
Note:
Do not modify the Set panel indicator display template.
1)
Select the desired template and click Modify.
2)
View or modify the template settings in the displayed Modify Custom

Alarm Statistical Template dialog box.
4.
8-22
3)
Click OK.
4)
Delete the template.
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Note:
Do not delete the Set panel indicator display template.
Click Delete All and click OK in the dialog box that appears.
Select the template to be deleted and click Delete Select Row and click
OK in the dialog box that appears.
5.
Switch statistic object of the current alarm panel.
Click Global panel indicator display and the entire network alarm
statistics displays in the current alarm panel.
Select the corresponding template and click Panel indicator display. The
alarm statistics of the corresponding template displays in the current alarm
panel in the toolbar.
Other Operations
u
Export customized alarm statistical template.

Select the alarm statistical template to be exported. Right-click any area in the
Custom Alarm Static Template tab and select Export to File from the
shortcut menu. The customized alarm statistical template can be exported to
the designated directory in the form of *.xml file.
Import customized alarm statistical template.

Right-click anywhere in the Custom Alarm Static Template tab and select
Import from File from the shortcut menu. The backed up alarm statistical
template can be imported.
Refresh customized alarm statistical template.

Right-click any area in the Custom Alarm Static Template tab and select
Refresh from the shortcut menu. The system reads the alarm statistical
template from the database and displays the template in the GUI.
8.4.3
Managing Alarm Level Templates

The OTNM2000 supports customizing alarm levels and defining them as templates,
which is convenient for you to quickly adjust alarm levels as needed.
Version: A
8-23
Procedure
1.
Select AlarmCustom Alarm Level in the main menu or select Management

ToolAlarm ManagementAlarm Level Template in the Operational Tree
pane to open the Alarm Level Template tab, as shown in Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8
The Alarm Level Template Tab
Note:
The Alarm Level Template tab's shortcut menu includes all functions of
the following buttons.
2.
Add the template.

1)
Select the corresponding network block, NE or subnet in the Operational

Tree tab in the object tree pane.
2)
Click Add to open the Customize Alarm Level dialog box.
3)
Select the corresponding alarm code and set the alarm level in the
Customized Grade column.
8-24
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
4)
See Table 8-5 to perform the corresponding operation.
Note:
The Custom Alarm Level tab's shortcut menu includes all functions of
the above menus.
Table 8-5
Description of the Menus in the Customize Alarm Level Dialog Box
Menu
Export
Description
Export to
Saves the current alarm level settings as a template and
Server
uploads it to the server.
Export to Local
Saves the current alarm level settings as a template and
File
exports as an XML file.
Import from
Import
Local File
Import from DB
Modify
Edit
Template
Description
Version: A
Imports the alarm level template saved on the local computer.

Imports the alarm level settings from the database.
Modifies the description information of the current alarm level
template.
Apply to DB
Saves the current alarm level settings to the database.
Exit
Exits from the Customize Alarm Level dialog box.
8-25
3.
View or modify the template.

1)
Select the desired template and click Modify in the Alarm Level Template
tab.
2)
View or modify the template settings in the displayed Custom Alarm

Level dialog box.
3)
4.
See Table 8-5 to perform the corresponding operation.
Delete the template.

1)
Select the desired template and click Delete in the Alarm Level Template
tab.
2)
Other Operations
u
Refresh the alarm level template.

Click Refresh in the Alarm Level Template tab. The system reads the alarm
level templates from the database and displays them on the GUI.
Restore to factory defaults.

Click Factory Reset in the Alarm Level Template tab. The system restores
the alarm level settings to the factory defaults.
8.5
Handling Alarms
Users should handle alarms to eliminate faults after alarm information is detected
according to specified flow. Alarm handling includes isolating alarm, confirming
alarm, refreshing alarm, etc.
8.5.1
Alarm Processing Flow

The following introduces the alarm processing flow. When you detect alarms in the
OTNM2000, see Figure 8-9 to handle them.
8-26
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-9
Version: A
Alarm Handling Process
8-27
Table 8-6
Description of the Alarm Processing Flow
Operation
Description
Obtains the alarm information and then starts the alarm
processing flow. The OTNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm
Obtain alarm information
notification. To obtain alarm information in time, see Managing

Alarm Report and Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder to
complete the settings in advance.
View the alarm and related

information
Confirm the alarm
Views the alarm and related information, including the alarm

location, correlated alarms, alarm-related service and alarm help
information.
Confirms the alarm, indicates the alarm is being traced and
processed.
Collect the failure
Locates the alarm to query the alarm information and collect the
information
failure information.
Analyze the reason of the
Analyzes the specific reason of the failure according to the failure
failure
information.
Make a failure processing

scheme
Makes the failure processing scheme according to the alarm

information and referring to related manuals of the corresponding
NE and maintenance expertise.
Implement the failure
Eliminates the failure that triggers the alarm based on the failure
processing scheme
processing scheme.
Once the failure that results in the alarm is eliminated, the
Clear the alarm
OTNM2000 will receive that notification prompting that the alarm

is cleared. If the alarm does not exist on the NE, you can
manually clear the alarm.
Verify whether the failure is
After clearing the alarm, you need to verify the failure processing
eliminated or not
result.
Record the alarm

maintenance experience
8.5.2
After processing the failure, you can record the alarm

maintenance experience to facilitate troubleshooting of similar
alarms.
Synchronizing Alarms
The OTNM2000 synchronizes with the equipment alarm via the function of
synchronizing the NE alarm.
Only the IPRAN NE supports the NE alarm synchronization.
8-28
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Procedure
1.
Right-click the IPRAN NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the Main Topology
tab and select AlarmNE Alarm Sync from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click
on the toolbar to open the Command Manager window to confirm the
NE Alarm Sync command is executed successfully.

3.
8.5.3
Close the Command Manager window.
Isolating Alarm
The alarm isolation function helps users isolate the alarmed object.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Alarms and Viewing Alarm History for opening the
Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.
2.
Select one alarm and right-click anywhere in the tab and perform the following
operations:
Select Navigate to Logic Tree. The Logical Tree pane appears with the
alarmed NE highlighted.
Select Navigate to Main Topo. The Main Topology tab appears with the
alarmed NE circled in blue.
8.5.4
Confirming Alarms
The following introduces how to confirm alarms manually.
When an alarm is confirmed, it indicates the alarm is processed. It includes manual
confirmation and automatic confirmation.
u
Manual Confirmation: You can manually confirm the selected alarm in the
Current Alarm tab and add additional information for the alarm, which will
facilitate subsequent query.
Version: A
8-29
Automatic Confirmation: The OTNM2000 will automatically confirm the alarms

ended 24 hours ago.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Alarms for opening the Current Alarm tab.
2.
Confirm alarm information.
Execute the following procedures to confirm a single alarm.

a)
Select the alarm to be confirmed and right-click anywhere in the tab to

select Confirm Selected Alarms from the shortcut menu.
b)
Enter the additional information for the alarm in the displayed Confirm
Alarm dialog box and click Confirm Alarm.
Execute the following procedures to confirm the alarm information in a

batch manner.
a)
Right-click anywhere in the Confirm Alarm tab to select Batch

Confirm Alarms from the shortcut menu.
Note:
pane and select Batch Confirm Alarm from the shortcut menu to confirm
the alarms in a batch manner.
b)
Select All Alarms or Alarm Severity or the specific alarm code in the
Confirm Alarm dialog box.
8-30
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
c)
Enter the additional information of the alarm confirmation and click

Confirm Alarm.
Note:
Select the Cover check box. The current additional information will
overwrite the existing one.
8.5.5
Querying Correlated Alarms

The root alarm usually derives some alarms in low level, which interfere with the
isolation and processing of the alarms by the users. Users can filter the derivative
alarm, reduce the quantity of alarms and isolate the fault promptly via the alarm
relevance analysis.
The alarm correlation analysis function is mainly used in the following two situations:
u
Version: A
The correlation among the alarms on a same line under the same card.
8-31
The relevance among the alarms on two ends of a same optical fiber.
1.
Select Management ToolAlarm ManagementAlarm Correlation
Procedure
Analysis in the Operational Tree pane, and select the corresponding object in
the lower part of the Operational Tree tab to open the Alarm Correlation
Analysis tab, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Note:
Right-click in the alarm display area of the Current Alarm tab and select
Alarm Correlation Analysis from the shortcut menu to open the Alarm
Correlation Analysis tab.
Figure 8-10
Querying Correlated Alarms
Figure 8-10lists the correlated alarms, among which the PK_LOS indicates the
root source alarm that derives the BMC_LOS alarm. Users should pay special
attention to the PK_LOS root alarm when handling alarms.
2.
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Alarm Correlation Analysis tab and

select Output Report from the shortcut menu to export the information in the
tab as an HTML file.
8-32
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
8.5.6
Viewing Alarm-related Services

Viewing the alarm-related services helps quickly locate and eliminate failures.
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Query Related Business to

open the Navigate to Business tab to view the services corresponding to the
alarm.
8.5.7
Alarm Statistics
Users can know about the network overall faults and obtain related data via the
alarm statistics, so as to facilitate the troubleshooting and network optimization.
8.5.7.1
Gathering Statistics of Alarms via the Alarm Panel

You can view alarm statistics of different alarm levels or different statuses via the
alarm panel.
Procedure
1.
Click
to the right of the alarm indicator on the toolbar to open the current
alarm panel, as shown in Figure 8-11.

The current alarm panel displays the alarm statistical information on the current
project by default. See Managing Alarm Statistical Templates for switching the
statistical object of the current alarm panel.
Version: A
8-33
Figure 8-11
8.5.7.2
The Current Alarm Panel
Viewing the Current Alarm Statistical Report

The OTNM2000 supports querying the number of current alarms in specified
conditions and exporting the statistical result as an XML, Txt, CSV or XLS file.
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click in the alarm display area of the Current Alarm tab and select Query
Condition from the shortcut menu.
3.
In the displayed Set Current Alarm Query Condition dialog box, set query
conditions and click OK.
4.
Right-click in the alarm display area of the Current Alarm tab and select
Export from the shortcut menu.
5.
Enter the report statistical range in the Set Range dialog box that appears and
click OK to open the Chart dialog box.
8-34
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
6.
Click Preview Report to open the Output Report tab and view the alarm
information in the tab.
7.
Click the button at the bottom of the Output Report tab to set the page format
and export the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.
Version: A
8-35
8.5.7.3
Viewing the Alarm History Statistical Report

The OTNM2000 supports querying the number of alarm history entries in specified
conditions and exporting the statistical result as an XML, Txt, CSV or XLS file.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Alarm History to open the Alarm History tab.
2.
Right-click in the alarm display area of the Alarm History tab and select Query
Condition from the shortcut menu.
3.
In the displayed Set Alarm History Query Condition dialog box, set query
conditions and click OK.
4.
Right-click in the alarm display area of the Alarm History tab and select
ExportSelect Row from the shortcut menu.
5.
Enter the report statistical range in the Range dialog box that appears and click
OK to open the Chart dialog box.
6.
Click Preview Report to open the Output Report tab and view the alarm
information in the tab.
8-36
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
7.
Click the button at the bottom of the Output Report tab to set the page format
and export the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.
8.5.7.4
Exporting All Alarm History Data

The OTNM2000 supports exporting all alarm history data as a CSV report,
convenient for you to view the data.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Alarm History to open the Alarm History tab.
2.
Right-click anywhere in the tab and select ExportAll from the shortcut menu.
3.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to generate the task of exporting all alarm
history.
Note:
Go to the D:\OTNM\md\task_result directory to view the exported alarm
history report according to the prompt information in the alert box.
Version: A
8-37
4.
Select Management ToolStatisticsAlarm StatisticsAlarm History

Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Statistics
tab and view the export task of all alarm history already generated, as shown in
Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-12
5.
The History Alarm Statistics Tab
Select the task and click Task Result Files to open the File Result List dialog
box, as shown in Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13
8-38
File Result List of Alarm History Statistics
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
6.
Select the desired file and click Save As to save the selected file to the
specified directory.
Other Operations
Delete a task or result report.
1.
Select the corresponding task and click Delete, or right-click the task to select
Delete from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task.
3.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the result file of the task
simultaneously.
Note:
Click No to save the result file of the task.
8.5.8
Refreshing Alarms
You can refresh alarms to make the alarm data displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI
consistent with that in the OTNM2000 alarm database.
Procedure
1.
2.
Right-click the alarm displaying area in the tab and perform the following
operations:
Select Refresh to obtain the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000 alarm
database and display these data on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Select Auto Refresh to obtain the newest alarm data from the alarm
database in the OTNM2000 every 5 seconds and display these data on
the OTNM2000 GUI.
Version: A
8-39
8.5.9
Printing Alarm Data

Print the queried alarm data.
Procedure
1.
2.
Print alarm data.
Print the selected data. Right-click the selected alarm data and select Print
Print Selected from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print
dialog box and click OK .
Print all. Right-click in the alarm displaying area of the tab and select Print
All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box
and click OK.
8.5.10
Manage alarm help

Users can check the alarm help information and record the alarm maintenance
experience to facilitate troubleshooting of alarms in the same type.
The OTNM2000 presets some common failure diagnosis rules such R_LOS,
TU_AIS, HP_TIM and B1_EXC.
Procedure
1.
2.
Select the alarm to be queried and check the alarm details and troubleshooting
suggestions at the bottom of the tab, as shown in Figure 8-14.
8-40
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-14
3.
Checking Alarm Help
(Optional) Right-click the alarm information that needs to customize help and
select Customize Help from the shortcut menu and open the dialog box as
shown in Figure 8-15. Type the user maintenance experience and click OK.
Version: A
8-41
Figure 8-15
4.
The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box
(Optional) Select HelpAlarm and Performance Help in the main menu to

open the Alarm and Performance Help tab. Select the type of the alarm in the
left pane and the reasons and solutions of the selected alarm will appear in the
right pane, as shown in Figure 8-16.
8-42
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-16
Viewing the Alarm Help
Note:
Click Change custom content... to record the user maintenance
experience.
8.6
Saving Alarm History Data

When the alarm history data stored in the database meet the save conditions, the
system will delete the data from the database and save it to the hard disk as files, so
as to improve the operating efficiency of the OTNM2000.
Version: A
8-43
Prerequisite
The EMS_Dumper service is started up.
Procedure
1.
Select SystemSave Data to open the Save Data tab.
2.
Click OK in the displayed alert boxes.
Note:
The alert box prompts the number of remaining entries for each save item
that will reach the save threshold.
3.
See Table 8-7 to set the save parameters in the Save Data tab.
Table 8-7
Data Save Parameters - Alarm History
Configuration Item
Start Time to
Save
End Time to
Save
Save
Path to Save
Settings
Description
Sets the save start time. The value range is 0 to 23. It is 3 by
default, indicating the data saving will start from three oclock in
the morning.
Sets the save end time. The value range is 0 to 23. It is 7 by
default, indicating the data saving will end at seven oclock in the
morning.
The path of data save.
Three file types are supported.
u
Save File
type
Default text: The data after save are in a TXT file, which
cannot be imported into the database.
DbBackup text: The data after save are in a script file, which
can be imported into the database.
Both: The data are saved according the default text and
DbBackup text type simultaneously.
Type of Save
Sub-item of
save
Save
Threshold
Current
Capacity
8-44
It is Alarm History by default, which cannot be edited.

If the number of alarm history data stored in the database
reaches this value (an integer, greater than 0 entries), the data
will be saved to another location in the specified period of time.
Displays the number of alarm history entries in the database.
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Table 8-7
Data Save Parameters - Alarm History (Continued)
Configuration Item
Description
Number of
Displays the number of alarm history entries that will be deleted
Entries to
from the database and saved to a hard disk when the save
Save
condition is met.
Single File
Capacity
Number of
Save Files
Time limit of
Transfer
(days)
Configures the number of information items saved in each file.

Sets the maximum number of files to be saved. When the
number of files exceeds the value, the earliest file of this type will
be overwritten automatically.
Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of alarm
history. When the duration of the alarm history data saved in the
database exceeds the value set here, the data will be saved to
another location in the specified period of time.
Caution:
If the quantity of actual save entries in the system is more than the Single
File Capacity the Number of Save Files, the data will be lost.
4.
After completing the above configuration, click the Settings at the bottom of the
Save Data tab.
5.
8.7
Click OK in the Command Warning alert box that appears.
Managing the Alarm Filter

Users can focus on the important alarms via filtering some designated alarms so as
to facilitate the management.
8.7.1
Setting the Current Alarm Filter

Users can filter some irrelevant alarms. After setting the report filter of the current
alarms, the filtered alarms will be saved into the alarm database and will not display
on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Version: A
8-45
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 8-8 to open the Current Alarm tab.
Table 8-8
Access Method of Setting the Current Alarm Filter
Operation
Access Method
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select AlarmCurrent
Alarm Filter from the shortcut menu. Then select the desired project,
network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
.
Setting the
Current Alarm
Filter
Select Management ToolAlarm ManagementCurrent Alarm Filter in

the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE
in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
Right-click the corresponding NE in the Main Topology tab, select Current

Alarm Filter from the shortcut menu and select the desired project, network
block or NE in the Operational Tree pane and click
2.
Select the alarm name to be filtered in the Current Alarm Filter tab, as shown
in Figure 8-17.
Figure 8-17
3.
Setting the Current Alarm Filter
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Set Alarm Filter tab to perform the
4
8-46
Click Select All to select all alarms in the current page.
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Click Cancel All to clear all alarms in the current page.
Click Select the Selected Items to select the selected alarms in the
current page.
Click Select the not Selected Items to select the alarms that are not
selected in the current page.
Select Save Current Alarm Filter Setting to save the filtering

configurations on the current tab.
Select Refresh Current Alarm Filter Setting to refresh the filter setting in
the current tab.
8.7.2
Setting the Card Alarm Filter

After setting the card alarm filter, the filtered alarms will not be reported to the
OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Prerequisite
The desired card supports the filter setting function.
Procedure
1.
Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane, click the shelf in the rack view
and click the corresponding card in the shelf view. Click MASK_SETTING in
the Task Panel to open the card filter window, as shown in Figure 8-18.
Version: A
8-47
Figure 8-18
2.
Setting the Card Alarm Filter
See Table 8-9 for setting the card alarm filter.
Table 8-9
Descriptions of Items in the Card Alarm Filter
Parameter
Description
There are three filter modes, namely, Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter,
Alarm- / PM-based Filter and Line Filter.
u
Select Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter, select the line name and
specific alarm code at the right side of the pane to filter the specific
Filter Mode
alarm code of the selected line.

u
Click Alarm- / PM-based Filter and select the alarm code and the
corresponding line at the right side of pane to filter the alarm code
of the selected line.
Click Line Filter and select the line name at the right side of pane
to filter the alarm and performance of the selected line.
Filter all Alarms
Filters all alarms of the selected card.
Filter all Lines
Filters the alarm and performance on all lines of the selected card.
Clear Alarm Mask
Clears all alarm filters of the selected card.

Clears the line filter of the selected card, that is, clearing the filter
Clear Line Filter
setting completed in the Line Filter mode. The filter setting completed
in the Line-based Filter mode will not be influenced.
8-48
Clear All Filter
Clears all alarm and performance filters of the selected card.
Save to the database
Saves the filter setting to the database.

Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Table 8-9
8.7.3
Descriptions of Items in the Card Alarm Filter (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Read from Device
Reads the filter setting of the selected card from the equipment.
Save to the device
Saves the filter setting to the equipment.
Setting the NE Alarm Filter

After setting the NE alarm filter, the filtered alarms will not be reported to the
OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Only the IPRAN NE supports the NE alarm filter function.
Procedure
1.
tab and select AlarmNE Mask Alarm from the shortcut menu to open the NE
Mask Alarm window.
2.
Set the card alarm filter.
4
Version: A
Filter all alarms of the card.
8-49
a)
Select Mask All of the corresponding card and click Write To Device.
b)
Filter card alarms according to line and alarm codes.

a)
Select the corresponding card and click Add.
b)
Set the line type, the line range and the filter code in the Add Item
dialog box that appears and click OK.
Note:
Mouse over the rules in the Line Range at the right side of the text box
and check the setting rules of the line range in the alert box that appears.
8-50
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
c)
Confirm filter parameters are set correctly in the NE Mask Alarm

window and click Write To Device.
Version: A
8-51
d)
8.7.4
Managing Alarm Filter Rules

After the alarm filter rules are set, the system processes the reported alarms
according to these alarm filter rules. The filtered alarms will neither be saved in the
database nor displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.
The filter operation only applies to the alarms reported when the filter rules are
enabled and valid; It does not apply to the alarms reported before setting the filter
rules.
Procedure
1.
Select AlarmAlarm Filtering Rule Management to open the Alarm

Filtering Rule Management tab.
2.
Click Create at the lower right of the tab or right-click in the right pane and
select Create to open the Add Alarm Filtering Rule dialog box.
8-52
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-19
3.
Adding a Alarm Filter Rule
See Table 8-10 to set the alarm filter rule and click OK.
Table 8-10
Description of Items in the Card Alarm Filter Tab
Parameter
Description
Rule Type
Basic
Information
Rule Name
Rule
Remark
Enable or
not
Version: A
It is Current Alarm Filtering Rule by default, without the need

to set.
Specify the name of the current alarm filter rule.
Set the description information of the current alarm filter rule.
Check Enable to enable the current alarm filter rule.
8-53
Table 8-10
Description of Items in the Card Alarm Filter Tab (Continued)
Parameter
Description
It supports selecting the alarm source via the following three
ways.
Alarm
Alarm
All Objects: Select all alarm sources.
Select Equipment: Click
select the alarm object from the project tree with the
Source
Filtering
smallest granularity being card.

u
Information
behind Object Name to
Select Equipment Type: Click
behind Object Name
and enter the keyword to search for the desired object by

NE type or card type. Fuzzy search is supported.
Click
Alarm Code
behind Alarm Code to select the alarm codes to be
filtered. It supports entering multiple keywords to filter the alarm

codes and quickly locate the desired one.
4.
(Optional) Quickly filter the current alarm. In the current alarm tab, right-click the
corresponding alarm and select Filter Alarm. Then select the filter rule as
needed and click OK. In the Filtering Rule Management tab, you can view the
added alarm filter rule.
Other Operations
Right-click any alarm filter rule and select Delete, Refresh, Modify Alarm Filtering
Rule, Start Task or End Task to perform the corresponding operation.
8-54
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
8.7.5
Setting the History Alarm Filter

You can filter some irrelevant history alarms. After the history alarms are filtered
according to the alarm history filter, the database will no longer collect the
information of these alarms.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolAlarm ManagementAlarm History Filter in the

Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Filter tab.
2.
Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select Setting
History Alarm Filter to open the Alarm History Filter of the Filter Settings
window, as shown in Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20
The Filter Window - Alarm History
3.
Select the alarm code to be filtered in the Alarm History Filter tab.
4.
Select ActionSave the current filter settings or click
on the toolbar and
click OK in the displayed alert box.
Other Operations
Select the submenus under the Action main menu or right-click anywhere in the
Filter Settings window to perform the following operations:
Version: A
8-55
Select Refresh to refresh the data in the tab.
Select Filter All to select and filter all codes in the current tab.
Select Filter None to deselect all codes in the current tab.
Select Filter the Selected Items to filter the selected codes in the current tab.
Select Unfilter the Selected Items to not filter the selected codes in the current
tab.
Select Save Current Alarm Filter Setting to save the filtering configurations in
the current tab.
8.7.6
Select Save All to save the filtering configurations on all pages.
Select Exit to exit the Filter Settings window.
Viewing History Alarm Filter

You can view the alarm codes already set in the alarm history filter to avoid the
influence on the equipment alarm monitoring caused by misconfiguration.
Procedure
1.

Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Filter tab, as shown in
Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-21
Viewing History Alarm Filter
Other Operations
Right-click any area in the Alarm History Filter tab to perform the following
operations:
8-56
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Select View Alarm History Filter to view the filter information of alarm history.
Select Setting History Alarm Filter to open the History Alarm Filter tab of the
Filter Setting window and reset the alarm history filter rule.
Select View History Performance Filter to view the filter information of

performance history.
Select Performance History Mask to open the History Performance Filter

tab of the Filter Setting window.
Select View Command Log Filter to view the filter information of command
logs.
Select Set Command Log Filter to open the Command Log Filter tab of the
Filter Setting window.
8.8
Select Collapse All Nodes to collapse all nodes in the tab.
Select Expand All Nodes to expand all nodes in the tab.
Setting Alarm Suppression

After setting the alarm suppression, the alarm and the affected alarm will not be
reported. The alarm and the affected alarm will be reported when it occurs again.
The alarm suppression function is used in the NE start-up stage. A series of alarms,
such as LOS alarms, occur because the NE service is not started up. In this case,
the maintenance staff can ignore these alarms. However, after the service is started
up, the NE should report the alarms normally.
Prerequisite
The corresponding card supports the alarm suppression function.
Procedure
1.
Double-click the corresponding NE in the Logical Tree tab and select the
desired card in the shelf view. Then click ALARM_INHIBIT on the Task Panel to
open the Alarm Suppression tab.
Version: A
8-57
2.
Select the corresponding line in the Line Name column. Select the
corresponding suppressed alarm in the Inhibited Alarm column. Right-click the
upper part of the tab and select Save from the shortcut menu.
3.
Right-click the newly-added suppressed alarm items in the lower part of the tab
and select Set Affected Alarm from the shortcut menu and the Inhibited
Alarm column changes into the Affected Alarm column.
4.
Select the corresponding line in the Line Name column. Select the
corresponding affected alarm in the Affected Alarm column. Right-click the
upper part of the tab and select Save from the shortcut menu.
8-58
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
5.
Select the corresponding item in the lower part of the pane and right-click
anywhere in the lower pane and select Save to the device from the shortcut
menu.
6.
Other Operations
Right-click in the lower pane and select the shortcut menus to perform the
corresponding operations:
u
Select Export to Template from the shortcut menu to export the alarm
suppression items as an INH file to the designated directory.
Select Import from File from the shortcut menu to import the alarm
suppression template previously backed up to the OTNM2000.
8.9
Customizing Alarm Levels

Users can adjust the alarm level of the alarm code as needed so as to facilitate the
management and improve the alarm monitoring efficiency.
Version: A
8-59
Procedure
1.
Select AlarmCustom Alarm Level in the main menu to open the Customize
Alarm Level dialog box.
2.
In the Customize Alarm Level dialog box, select the row where the
corresponding alarm code is located and select the new alarm level in the dropdown box of the Customized Grade, as shown in Figure 8-22.
Figure 8-22
3.
Customizing the Alarm Level
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Customize Alarm Level dialog box and
select Restore Default Level from the shortcut menu to restore to the system
default settings.
4.
Select ActionSave in the main menu or click
on the toolbar to save the
customized alarm levels.
8.10
Managing Alarm Report

Users can set the alarm report conditions of the current project and the OTNM2000
will display the report content according to the alarm report conditions, so as to
facilitate the users to know about the equipment alarm directly.
8-60
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
8.10.1
Setting the Alarm Reporting

You can set the focused alarms to have them reported. After setting the alarm
reporting, the alarms will appear in the reported content tab upon occurrence.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 8-11 to open the Set Report Condition window, as
Table 8-11
Access Method of Setting the Alarm Reporting
Operation
Access Method
Setting the Alarm

Reporting
Select AlarmAlarm Report Settings in the main menu.

Right-click a card in the shelf view and select Alarm Report Settings
Figure 8-23
2.
Version: A
Setting the Reporting Condition
Set alarm report conditions according to Table 8-12.
8-61
Table 8-12
Parameter
Switch
Description of Alarm Reporting Conditions

Description
If the Switch of an alarm is selected, the alarm will be displayed in the report
window when it occurs.
Click the down button in the Select Sound list box of an alarm to bring up two
optional items.
Select Sound
Optional file: Select the sound file (*.wav) for the alarm. The system will
generate a particular prompt sound when the alarm occurs.
No sound prompt: No alarm sound exists when the alarm occurs.
Selects an alarm report icon for the alarm. The alarm indicator of the alarmed
Icon
object displays the icon when the alarm occurs. If more alarm icons are set
and these alarms occur at the same time, the displaying priority of these
alarm icons descends from the top down.
Line Number
Included
Line Number
Excluded
Double-click the Line Number Included of an alarm and enter the line
number. Only the alarm of the designated line number is reported. Use
comma to separate multiple line numbers.
Double-click the Line Number Excluded of an alarm and enter the line
number or separate multiple line numbers by comma. All alarms except the
alarm of the designated line number will be reported.
Duration
Sets whether the sound of the alarm report sustains.
Time Filter
Sets the filtering time of the alarm report.
3.
Click
on the toolbar and click OK in the displayed Command Warning alert
box.
8.10.2
Viewing Alarm Report

View the current alarm report content.
Procedure
1.
Select AlarmView Report Alarm in the main menu or click
on the toolbar
to open the Report Content Display tab, as shown in Figure 8-24.
8-62
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Figure 8-24
2.
Viewing the Reported Content
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the tab to perform the following operations:
Select Alarm Report Settings to open the Set Report Condition window
to reset the reporting conditions.
Select Print All to print all information in the Report Content Display tab.
Select Clear All Items to delete all information in the Report Content
Display tab.
Select Output Report to open the Output Report tab and export the
reported alarms as a report. You can also set the format of the page and
export the information as a XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.
3.
Click Filter Content View to open the Filter Content View tab, as shown in
Figure 8-25.
Figure 8-25
Viewing the Filter Content
The tab displays the alarm report contents according to the filtering conditions
set by users. The related information of the alarm is identical with that in the
Report Contents Display tab.
Version: A
8-63
4.
(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Filter Content View tab to perform the
Select Alarm Report Settings to open the Set Report Condition window
to reset the reporting conditions.
Select Set Filter Condition to open the filter condition dialog box. You can
set filter conditions according to the alarm level. The system selects
Communication interrupted and Critical Alarm by default, as shown in
Figure 8-26.
Figure 8-26
8.10.3
Setting the Filter Condition
Setting the Alarm Remote Notification

After the alarm remote notification is set, the OTNM2000 will send the alarms
matching the alarm reporting rules to the maintainers via email or SMS so that the
maintainers can timely understand the alarm information and take measures
accordingly when they are not on site.
SmsAgent is a proxy tool for SMSs and emails. It connects to the SMS center, SMS
card, website or mail server and notifies the user of the alarm via SMS or email. The
SmsAgent tool is embedded in the OTNM2000 and is installed upon the OTNM2000
installation.
8-64
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
Prerequisite
To send the alarms to the maintainer by SMS via the SMS card, you need to install
the wireless Modem first. For the installation procedures, see the documentation in
the Modem accessory.
Procedure
1.
Configure the proxy service.

1)
Open the otnm.ini in the d:\OTNM\ui\ini\ directory.
2)
Set DTServerAddr under [OtnmSms] to the IP address of the OTNM2000

server and set OtnmSms_Run_Enable to 1.
3)
2.
Start the EMS_OtnmSms_Agent service.
Start the SmsAgent proxy software.

Open the D:\OTNM\ui\bin\smsagent directory and double-click the SmsAgent
file to start the SmsAgent proxy software.
Version: A
8-65
3.
To send the reported alarms to the maintainer via SMS, you need to set the
SMS device.
1)
In the fiberhome - SmsAgent window, select SettingsSetting SMG or

Card to open the SMS Device Settings dialog box.
8-66
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
2)
See Table 8-13 to set the SMS device parameters in the SMS Device
Settings dialog box.
Version: A
8-67
Table 8-13
Description of the SMS Device Parameters
Parameter
Description
The SMS device supports the following three types of settings:
SMS Device Settings
SMG
SMS Card
HTTP
Only when SMG is selected can the SMS gateway parameters be

SMS gateway
parameters
set.
Select the SMS gateway type according to the gateway type
applied. Other parameters are specified when applying for the SMS
gateway.
Only when SMS Card is selected can the SMS card parameters be
set.
Select the serial port No. from the COM No. drop-down list
SMS card parameters
according to the physical connection, enter the Telecom number in

the Area Code text box, and set Baud Rate and Byte Size
according to the mapping serial port properties of the device
manager.
Only when HTTP is select can the website parameters be set.
Website parameters
Specify the IP address and port of the proxy server for the SMS
group-sending website as well as the username and password of
the website account.
3)
4.
After completing the settings, click OK.
To send the reported alarms to the maintainer via email, you need to set the
mail device.
1)
In the fiberhome SmsAgent window, select SettingsSetting Mail

Parameter to open the Mail Settings dialog box.
8-68
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
2)
Set the mail server parameters.
Select LAN, set the mail server, mailbox username and password,
and then click OK.
Select RAS Dial-up, set the telephone number, dialing account and
password, and then click OK.
5.
Connect to the gateway or SMS card manually.
Note:
The SMS gateway may interrupt the service due to timeout, while the
SMS modem interrupt the service due to hardware failure. In this situation,
you can connect to the SMS device again manually.
In the fiberhome SmsAgent window, select ConnectionConnect SMG or
Card. A prompt appears, displaying it is connecting to the device. After the
device is connected, the SMS notification is available.
8.11
Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder

Users can set the customized alarm audio-video reminder in the OTNM2000 to
facilitate the maintenance.
Version: A
8-69
8.11.1
Setting the Alarm Sound Reminder

Users can set different alarm sound reminders for alarms in various levels. When
the new alarms occur in the OTNM2000, different alarm sounds prompt users that
alarms in the corresponding levels are reported.
Procedure
1.
Click
to the right of the alarm indicator on the toolbar to open the current
alarm panel, as shown in Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27
2.
The Current Alarm Panel
Right-click the buzzer before the alarm indicator and select Change voice file
3.
Select the corresponding sound file and click Open.
Note:
The alarm sound setting is only valid for the current client end.
Other Operations
Click the buzzer at the top of the current alarm panel to open the System Option
Settings dialog box. See Setting Alarm-related Parameters for setting the sound
broadcast strategy.
8-70
Version: A
8 Alarm Management
8.11.2
Setting the Alarm Indicator Color

Users can modify the alarm indicator color of the designated alarm type to highlight
the important alarms.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolAlarm ManagementAlarm Indicator Settings

in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm Indicator Settings tab, as
2.
Select the row of the alarm type whose alarm indicator color is to be modified
and click
Figure 8-28
3.
in the Current colors column to select the desired color.
Setting the Alarm Indicator Color
Right-click anywhere in the Alarm Indicator Settings tab and select Save
Settings from the shortcut menu.
Other Operations
Right-click anywhere in the Alarm Indicator Settings tab and select Reset from the
shortcut menu to restore color of the alarm indicator to the default color.
8.11.3
Setting the Alarm Flickering

After the alarm flickering is set, the Main Topology tab flashes the icon of the NE
upon the occurrence of the new alarm.
Version: A
8-71
Procedure
1.
Click
to enable the alarm flickering function.
Note:
The alarm flickering function is disabled by default. When the alarm
flickering icon appears as
8-72
, the alarm flickering function is enabled.
Version: A
Performance Management
With powerful performance management function, the OTNM2000 can store various
types of performance information of equipment in the network. Users can monitor
the performance data to eliminate the potential problems in a timely manner and
reduce the risks that will affect the reliable operation of the equipment.
Basic Concept
Setting Performance-related Parameters
Setting the Performance Parameter Collection
Viewing Performance
Setting Performance Query Profile
Managing Performance
Managing Performance History Data
Managing Performance Filter
Gathering Statistics of Optical Power Information
Traffic Management
Version: A
9-1
9.1
Basic Concept
Current Performance and Performance History

The performance includes the current performance and performance history.
u
Current Performance: divided as 15-minute performance and 24-hour

performance according to different monitoring periods.
15-minute performance: the latest 15-minute performance and the 1st to

the 16th 15-minute performance.
24-hour performance: the latest 24-hour performance and the 1st 24-hour
performance.
Performance history: The performance data of a period of 15 minutes or 24

hours before the query time, which is sent to the database according to the
performance gathering settings.
Saving Performance
When the performance history saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it
will influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The performance saving
function saves the performance history data in the OTNM2000 to a specified file,
improving the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000 supports
manual saving and automatic saving of performance history.
u
Automatic Saving: You can set the performance history threshold and saving
period (days) limit and the OTNM2000 will regularly check the performance
history data. When the performance history data reaches the preset capacity or
its saving period reaches the preset limit, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a
designated file in the specified time.
Manual Saving: You can save the performance history data as a TXT file to the
OTNM2000 server anytime.
9.2
Setting Performance-related Parameters

You can set the performance-related parameters, including whether to save history
performance query condition and whether to set the query condition before querying
the performance history.
9-2
Version: A
9 Performance Management
Procedure
1.
Select SystemOptions to open the System Option Settings dialog box.
2.
Click Query Condition and see Table 9-1 to set the performance-related
parameters in the right pane.
Table 9-1
Description of Performance-related Parameters
Menu Option
Save History Performance
Query Condition
When the item is selected, the system will automatically save

the corresponding conditions configured during the current
query. The two options are selected by default.
Set History Performance
When this item is selected, you need to set the query condition
Query Condition First
before querying performance history.
3.
Version: A
Description
Click OK.
9-3
9.3
Setting the Performance Parameter

Collection
The OTNM2000 only collects the performance history of the NE that has been set
the performance parameter collection. To view the equipment performance history,
users should set the performance parameter collection method of this equipment
first.
Procedure
1.
Select PerformanceCollection Task Settings in the main menu or select

Management ToolPerformance ManagementCollection Task Settings
in the Operational Tree pane to open the Performance Collection tab.
2.
Select the desired NE or the network block in the lower part of the Operational
Tree pane.
3.
Click Add in the PM Collection tab.
Note:
Select the NE in the PM Collection tab and click Delete to delete the
selected NE. Click Delete All to delete all NEs in the PM Collection tab.
4.
Set the time and type of the performance parameter collection in the PM
Collection tab, as shown in Figure 9-1.
9-4
Version: A
Figure 9-1
Setting the Performance Collection Mode
Note:
The Copy and Paste in the shortcut menu of the PM Collection tab can
simplify the setting.
5.
9.4
Click Save and then Yes in the displayed Command Warning alert box.
Viewing Performance
Users can know whether the equipment or service in the network is abnormal or not
by viewing performances. Viewing performance also help the maintainers to handle
the faults in a timely manner and prevent faults.
9.4.1
Viewing Current Performance

View the performance status of equipment or service in the current network to
conduct the current maintenance. Users can refresh, filter performance and check
the related reports when viewing the current performance.
Version: A
9-5
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 9-2 to open the Current Performance tab.
Table 9-2
Access Method of Viewing the Current Performance
Operation
Access Method
Select PerformanceCurrent Performance in the main menu and select
the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the
Operational Tree pane, and click
Right-click the desired network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and
select Current Performance from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the desired card in the shelf view and select Current
Performance from the shortcut menu.
Viewing Current
Select Management ToolPerformance ManagementCurrent
Performance
Performance in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project,

network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and
click

select Alarm/Performance QueryQuery Current Performance from the
2.
View the current performance information of the selected object in the Current
Performance tab.
3.
(Optional) Right-click the title bar of performance list to bring up the title bar
option list to select the item to be displayed, as shown in Figure 9-2.
9-6
Version: A
Figure 9-2
Option List of the Performance Title Bar
Other Operations
In the Current Performance tab, right-click anywhere in the tab and select the
corresponding shortcut menu to locate the performance, query accumulative
performance and detect the real-time performance. For details, see Managing
Performance.
9.4.2
Viewing Performance History

View the performance history to obtain the abnormal performance data, so as to
instruct the current routine operations. While viewing the performance history, users
can refresh, filter and isolate the performance.
Prerequisite
The performance collection task is set and at least one collection period (15 minutes
or 24 hours) has passed.
Procedure
1.
Version: A
Select the path in Table 9-3 to open the performance history tab.
9-7
Table 9-3
Access Method of Viewing the Performance History
Operation
Access Method
Click PerformanceHistory Performance in the main menu, select the
corresponding project, network block or NE in the lower pane of the
Operational Tree tab and click .
Select Management ToolPerformance ManagementHistory

Performance in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project,
Viewing the
Performance
History
network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
.
Right-click the project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and
select Performance History from the shortcut menu.
select Alarm/Performance QueryQuery Performance History from the
2.
Set filter conditions in the displayed Set Performance Query Condition dialog
box and click OK.
Note:
By default, you need to set the query condition before querying the
performance history. See Setting Performance-related Parameters to
modify the settings.
9-8
Version: A
Figure 9-3
3.
Setting the Performance Query Condition
View the performance history information of the selected object in the

Performance History tab.
4.
(Optional) Right-click the title bar of performance list to bring up the title bar
option list to select the item to be displayed, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Version: A
9-9
Figure 9-4
Option List of the Performance History Title Bar
Other Operations
In the Performance History tab, right-click anywhere in the tab and select the
corresponding shortcut menu to refresh, gather statistics of or analyze performance
data. For details, see Managing Performance.
9.5
Setting Performance Query Profile

To avoid setting conditions repetitively, users can save the set performance query
conditions as the template for convenience of querying performance events via the
template in the future.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Performance and Viewing Performance History for

opening Current Performance / Performance History tab.
2.
Right-click anywhere in the current performance / performance history tab and

select Modify Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Set
Performance Query Condition dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-5.
9-10
Version: A
Figure 9-5
The Set Performance Query Condition Dialog Box
The performance in the current performance's query conditions is grayed-out,

which is different from the above image.
3.
Set query conditions in the Set Performance Query Condition dialog box.
Click Export... after completing setting to open the dialog box as shown in
Figure 9-6.
Version: A
9-11
Figure 9-6
4.
Defining the Performance Profile Name
Enter the template name and click OK.
Note:
u
The check box Only for this card can be selected when users
define the performance query template of the card. The check box
Only for this card is grayed out in other situations.
If users select the Only for this card check box, the query template
can be imported only when users query the card performance.
9.6
Managing Performance
After browsing the performance information, you can perform related operations as
need to conveniently monitor the performance data.
9.6.1
Locating the Performance

The performance locating function helps navigate to the object that generating the
performance data.
Procedure
1.

opening the Current Performance / Performance History tab.
9-12
Version: A
2.
Right-click the performance data and select Navigate to Logic Tree from the
shortcut menu. The Logical Tree pane appears, highlighting the NE
corresponding to the performance data.
9.6.2
Viewing the Accumulative Performance

Accumulative performance indicates the accumulative performance value of an
object since the latest power-on or performance clearing.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Performance for opening the Current Performance tab.
2.
Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Accumulative
Performance from the shortcut menu to view the accumulative performance of
the object, as shown in Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7
9.6.3
Viewing the Accumulative Performance
Refreshing the Performance

You can refresh performance data to make the performance data displayed on the
OTNM2000 GUI consistent with that in the OTNM2000 performance database.
Procedure
1.

Version: A
9-13
2.
Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select the shortcut
menus to perform the corresponding operations:
Select Refresh to obtain the newest performance data from the

OTNM2000 performance database and display these data on the
OTNM2000 GUI.
Select Auto Refresh to obtain the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000
performance database every 5 seconds and display these data on the
network management GUI.
9.6.4
Filtering the Zero-value Performance

You can filter the zero-value performance, that is, filter the performance whose
value is 0.
Procedure
1.

2.
Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Do not
display performance data whose value is 0 from the shortcut menu. The
Current Performance / Performance History tab will not display the
performance data whose value is 0.
9.6.5
Printing Performance Data

You can print the performance data to save and analyze the device performance
information.
Procedure
1.

2.
Print the performance data.
Print the selected rows. Right-click the selected performance data and
select PrintPrint Selected from the shortcut menu to print the selected
performance data.
9-14
Version: A
Print all. Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select
PrintAll from the shortcut menu to print all performance data in the tab.
9.6.6
Detecting the Real-time Performance

With the real-time performance detection, you can monitor the performance data of
the selected resources in real time.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Current Performance for opening the Current Performance tab.
2.
Right-click in performance display area of the tab and select Real Time
Performance Check from the shortcut menu.
3.
In the displayed Real Time Performance Check window, view the real-time
performance of the selected object, as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8
Version: A
Detecting the Real-time Performance
9-15
Other Operations
On the menu bar and toolbar of the Real Time Performance Check window, you
can select the display mode of the real-time performance data (pie chart or wave
form graph) and output mode to conveniently gather statistics and analyze the realtime performance value.
9.6.7
Viewing Performance Reports

You can view performance reports, set the report format and export them as an
XML, TXT or CSV file.
Procedure
1.

2.
Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Export from
the shortcut menu.
3.
In the displayed Range Settings dialog box, enter the report display range,
which determines the number of performance entries to be displayed in the tab.
4.
In the Output Report tab, view the generated performance report, as shown in
Figure 9-9.
9-16
Version: A
Figure 9-9
5.
Viewing Performance Reports
(Optional) Click the button at the bottom of the Output Report tab to set the
page format and export the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.
9.6.8
Gathering Statistics of and Analyzing Performance

History
With the performance history statistics and analysis, you can understand the
historical running status of the objects directly.
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Performance History for opening the Performance History tab.
2.
Right-click in the performance display area of the Performance History tab

and select Performance Statistics and Analysis from the shortcut menu to
open the Performance Statistics and Analysis tab.
3.
In the object query pane of the tab, select the desired object and view the
performance statistics and analysis of the object, as shown in Figure 9-10.
Version: A
9-17
Figure 9-10
Viewing the Performance History Statistical and Analytical Report
Other Operations
Select the shortcut menus to perform the corresponding operations.
u
Right-click in the left pane of the Performance Statistics and Analysis tab
and select Output Report from the shortcut menu to export the performance
history statistics and analysis as an XML file.
Right-click in the right pane of the Performance Statistics and Analysis tab to
set the display attribute of the performance history statistical and analytical
chart.
9.6.9
Clearing Performance Data

The following introduces how to clear the performance data. Clearing the
performance data and then querying the performance data of the monitored object
helps confirm whether the failures are eliminated.
Procedure
u
9-18
Clear the performance of the network block.
Version: A
1)
Right-click the network block in the Logical Tree pane and select More
OperationsClear Part Performance Data from the shortcut menu.
2)
u
Clear the NE performance.

1)
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree tab or the Browse Tree tab or the
Main Topology tab and select PerformanceClear NE Performance
2)
u
Clear the card performance.

1)
Double-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the
corresponding card in the subrack view. Then click the MASK_SETTING
in the Task Panel pane on the right to open the Filter Settings.
2)
In the left lower part of the Filter Settings tab, select the type of
performance to be cleared and click Clear PM.
The performance types include 15-minute Performance, 24-hour
Performance and Accumulative Performance.
3)
Version: A
9-19
9.6.10
Managing the Performance Help

View the performance help information and customize the performance definition,
so as to provide references for the maintenance engineers to deal with the
performance events of the same type.
Procedure
1.

2.
Select the performance to be checked and view the information such as

performance detail and performance explanation in the lower part of the tab, as
Figure 9-11
3.
Checking the Performance Help
(Optional) Right-click the desired performance information and select

Customize Help from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box as shown in
Figure 9-12. Then enter the customized help information in the dialog box and
click OK.
9-20
Version: A
Figure 9-12
4.
The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box
(Optional) Select HelpAlarm and Performance Help in the main menu to

open the Alarm and Performance Help tab. Select the type of performance in
the left pane and the related information will display on the right, as shown in
Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13
Version: A
Checking All the Performance Help Information
9-21
Note:
Click Change custom content... to record the user maintenance
experience.
9.7
Managing Performance History Data

When the performance history saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it
will influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The performance saving
function saves the performance history data in the OTNM2000 to a specified file,
improving the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000 supports
manual saving and automatic saving of performance history.
9.7.1
Saving Performance Data

When the historical performance data meet the configured memory transfer
conditions, the system will delete the data from the database and save it to the hard
disk as files, so as to improve the operation efficiency of the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
2.
Note:
3.
9-22
Version: A
Table 9-4
Data Save Parameters - Performance History
Configuration Item
Start Time to
Save
End Time to
Save
Save
Path to Save
Settings
Description
the morning.
morning.
u
Save File
type
Type of Save
It is 15-min Performance History by default, which cannot be

edited.
If the 15-minute historical performance data quantity in the
Save
database reaches this number, the data will be transferred within
Threshold
the configured time. (Unit: entry. Users can set any integer
number above 0.)
Current
Displays the number of 15-minute performance history entries in
Capacity
the database.
Number of
Displays the number of 15-minute performance history entries
Entries to
that will be deleted from the database and saved to a hard disk
Sub-item
Save
when the save condition is met.
of save
Single File
Capacity

Sets the maximum number of 15-minute historical performance
Number of
files to be transferred and stored. When the number of files
Save Files
crosses this number, the earliest file of this type will be

overwritten automatically.
Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of 15-minute
Time limit of
performance history. When the duration of the 15-minute
Transfer
performance history data saved in the database exceeds the
(days)
value set here, the data will be saved to another location in the
specified period of time.
Sub-item
of save
Version: A
Type of Save
It is 24-hour Performance History by default, which cannot be

edited.
9-23
Table 9-4
Data Save Parameters - Performance History (Continued)
Configuration Item
Description
If the 24-hour historical performance data quantity in the
Save
database reaches this number, the data will be transferred within
Threshold
the configured time. (Unit: entry. Users can set any integer
number above 0.)
Current
Displays the number of 24-hour performance history entries in the
Capacity
database.
Number of
Displays the number of 24-hour performance history entries that
Entries to
will be deleted from the database and saved to a hard disk when
Save
the save condition is met.
Single File
Capacity

Sets the maximum number of 24-hour historical performance files
Number of
to be transferred and stored. When the number of files crosses
Save Files
this number, the earliest file of this type will be overwritten

automatically.
Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of 24-hour
Time limit of
performance history. When the duration of the 24-hour
Transfer
performance history saved in the database exceeds the value set
(days)
here, the data will be saved to another location in the specified

period of time.
Caution:
4.
Save Data tab.
5.
9.7.2
Saving the Performance History Data Manually

You can save the specified performance history data that are stored in the
OTNM2000 database to the hard disk on the OTNM2000 server as a TXT file. The
data saved will not be deleted from the database
9-24
Version: A
Procedure
1.
See Viewing Performance History for opening the Performance History tab.
2.
Right-click anywhere in the Performance History tab and select PM Data

Dump from the shortcut menu. The Send command successfully. alert box
appears. Click OK to generate the performance data save task.
Note:
You can view the generated task name in the d:\otnm\ui\job directory.
3.
Select Management ToolPerformance ManagementPM Backup

Management in the Operational Tree pane to open the PM Backup
Management tab, as shown in Figure 9-14.
Figure 9-14
4.
The PM Backup Management Tab
Select the task and click Task Result Files to open the File Result List dialog
Version: A
9-25
Figure 9-15
5.
File Result List
Other Operations
Delete a task or result report.
1.
Select the corresponding task and click Delete, or right-click the task to select
Delete from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task.
3.
Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the result file of the task
simultaneously.
Note:
Click No to save the result file of the task.
9-26
Version: A
9.7.3
Managing Performance Reports

Viewing the performance reports exported regularly help understand the mostconcerned performance in specified time.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolPerformance ManagementPM-REPORT in the

Operational Tree pane, select the desired object in the lower part of the
Figure 9-16
to open the PM-REPORT dialog box.
The PM-REPORT Dialog Box
2.
Set the relevant parameters in the dialog box as needed and click OK.
3.
After the task execution time is reached, go to the specified performance report
save directory to view the exported performance report.
9.8
Managing Performance Filter

Users can focus on the important performance events and filter some designated
performance events to facilitate the management.
Version: A
9-27
9.8.1
Setting the Card Performance Filter

After setting the card performance filter, the filtered performance will not be reported
to the OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Prerequisite
The desired card supports the filter setting function.
Procedure
1.
Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane, click the shelf in the rack view
and click the corresponding card in the shelf view. Click MASK_SETTING in
the Task Panel to open the card filter window, as shown in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17
2.
9-28
Setting the Card Performance Filter
See Table 9-5 for setting the card performance filter.
Version: A
Table 9-5
Description of Items in the Card Performance Setting
Parameter
Description
There are three filter modes, namely, Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter,
Alarm- / PM-based Filter and Line Filter.
u
Select Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter, select the line name and
specific performance code at the right side of the pane to filter the
Filter Mode
specific performance code of the selected line.

u
Click Alarm- / PM-based Filter and select the performance code

and the corresponding line at the right side of pane to filter the
performance code of the selected line.
Click Line Filter and select the line name at the right side of pane
to filter the alarm and performance of the selected line.
Filter all Pm
Filters all performance events of the selected card.
Filter all Lines
Filters the alarm and performance on all lines of the selected card.
Clear Pm Filter
Clears all performance filters of the selected card.

Clears the line filter of the selected card, that is, clearing the filter
Clear Line Filter
setting completed in the Line Filter mode. The filter setting completed
in the Line-based Filter mode will not be influenced.
9.8.2
Clear All Filter
Clears all alarm and performance filters of the selected card.
Save
Saves the modification and clears the current GUI settings.
Cancel Modification
Cancels the modification and clears the current GUI settings.
Save to the database
Saves the filter setting to the database.
Read from Device
Reads the filter setting of the selected card from the equipment.
Save to the device
Saves the filter setting to the equipment.
Setting NE Filter Performance

After setting the NE performance filter, the filtered performance events will not be
reported to the OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.
Only the IPRAN device supports the NE performance filter function.
Version: A
9-29
Procedure
1.
tab and select PMNE Mask PM from the shortcut menu to open the NE Mask
PM window.
2.
Set card performance filter.
Filter all performance events of the card.

a)
Select Mask All of the corresponding card and click Write To Device.
b)
Filter card performance according to line and performance codes.

a)
Select the corresponding card and click Add.
b)
Set the line type, the line range and the filter code in the Add Item
dialog box that appears and click OK.
Note:
Mouse over the rules in the Line Range at the right side of the text box
and check the setting rules of the line range in the alert box that appears.
9-30
Version: A
c)
Confirm filter parameters are set correctly in the NE Mask PM window

and click Write To Device.
Version: A
9-31
d)
9.8.3
Setting the Performance History Filter

You can filter the irrelevant performance history. After the performance history filter
is set, the database will no longer collect the information of the related performance.
Procedure
1.
Select PerformancePerformance History Filter in the main menu to open

the History Performance Filter tab of the Filter Setting window, as shown in
Figure 9-18.
9-32
Version: A
Figure 9-18
2.
The Filter Settings Window - Performance History
Select the performance code to be filtered in the History Performance Filter

tab.
3.
Select ActionSave the current filter settings or click
on the toolbar and
click OK in the displayed alert box.
Other Operations
u
tab.
the current tab.
u
Version: A

9-33
9.8.4
Viewing History Performance Filter

You can view the performance codes already set in the performance history filter to
avoid the influence on the equipment performance monitoring caused by
misconfiguration.
Procedure
1.

2.
Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select Performance
History Mask to open the History Performance Filter of the Filter Settings
window, as shown below.
Figure 9-19
Viewing History Performance Filter
Other Operations
Right-click any area in the Performance History Filter tab to perform the following
operations:
9-34
Version: A
Filter Settings window.


tab of the Filter Settings window and reset the performance history filter rule.
logs.
Filter Settings window.
9.9
Gathering Statistics of Optical Power

Information
You can gather statistics of optical power information of the query object and export
the statistics as an HTML file.
Procedure
1.
Select the path in Table 9-6 to open the optical power information statistics
Table 9-6
Access Method of the Optical Power Statistics
Operation
Access Method
Right-click the network block in the Logical Tree pane and select More
OperationsOptical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.
Viewing optical
power information
statistics
Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Performance

Optical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the NE in the Main Topology tab and select Performance
Optical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.
Version: A
9-35
Table 9-6
Access Method of the Optical Power Statistics (Continued)
Operation
Access Method
Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and then right-click the
corresponding card in the Shelf View on the right and select Optical
Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.
Figure 9-20
Viewing the Optical Power Statistics
Note:
When the optical power exceeds the specified threshold, it will be
highlighted in red, convenient for you to locate the anomaly.
2.
(Optional) Click Output Report to export the optical power information

statistics as an HTML file.
9-36
Version: A
9.10
Traffic Management
The OTNM2000 supports the general management of device traffic. You can query
the current traffic, traffic history and real-time traffic of the ports, fiber sections and
services to analyze the bandwidth usage of the entire network, observe the network
load increasing trend and make a plan for network capacity expansion and
optimization in advance.
The OTNM2000 traffic management includes the following functions:
u
Queries the maximum and minimum traffic of the monitored object by browsing
the performance history.
Monitors the performance of the NE at various layers, including the secondlevel performance of the port, VP layer (LSP) and VC layer (PW).
Supports second-level monitoring of the real-time traffic and displaying query

and statistical results in table or line chart.
Supports long-term traffic monitoring and exporting long-term traffic monitoring

data as a report or image.
Supports statistics of bandwidth usage, 15-minute traffic and 24-hour traffic and
exporting as reports, which include the corresponding maximum, minimum and
average values.
Supports setting the traffic thresholds and viewing the alarms of the port
triggered by threshold-crossing traffic.
9.10.1
Querying the Traffic Values

By browsing the current performance and performance history data, you can
understand the current traffic and traffic history of the monitored object. When
browsing the performance data, you can pay attention to the performance values of
the following performance codes.
Version: A
TX_FLOW: Indicates the sent traffic.
MIN_TX_FLOW: Indicates the minimum sent traffic.
MAX_TX_FLOW: Indicates the maximum sent traffic.
AVERAGE_TX_FLOW: Indicates the average sent traffic.

9-37
RX_FLOW: Indicates the received traffic.
MIN_RX_FLOW: Indicates the minimum received traffic.
MAX_RX_FLOW: Indicates the maximum received traffic.
AVERAGE_RX_FLOW: Indicates the average received traffic.
The performance collection function is set for the monitored object.
The corresponding device supports this function.
Prerequisite
Procedure
The following uses the 15-minute performance history as an example to introduce
how to query the maximum and minimum traffic.
1.
Right-click the desired card and select Performance History.
Note:
For the CiTRANS 630, CiTRANS 640 and CiTRANS 660 devices, you
can query the device traffic performance on the cross-connect card.
2.
In the displayed Set Performance Query Condition dialog box, enter flow in
the PM Code text box, and select the traffic-related performance codes in the
Performance Code list. Then select the desired Start Time range, select the
15-minute Performance in the Performance Timestamp list and click Query.
9-38
Version: A
Figure 9-21
3.
Setting the Performance Query Condition
View the history sent / received traffic of the monitored object in the
Performance History tab.
9.10.2
Monitoring the NE Traffic

The OTNM2000 supports monitoring the traffic of the NE at various layers, including
the port, section, LSP, PW and L2VPN. The real-time traffic, the 15 minutes or 24
hours history traffic can be monitored. The second-level monitoring is also provided
as long as the card supports.
Version: A
9-39
Procedure
1.
Select PerformanceFlow Monitor in the main menu or select Management

ToolPerformance ToolFlow Monitor in the Operational Tree pane. Then
select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and
click
to open the Flow Monitor window.
The Flow Monitor window contains five tabs. You can switch the tabs to view
the traffic of different monitored objects.
2.
Right-click in the tabs and select the corresponding shortcut menus to query
the current traffic or traffic history of different monitored object.
The following example is to query the current transmitting traffic of the
corresponding port in the Port Traffic Monitoring tab, and the query result is
Note:
u
If the query object is the LSP, PW or L2VPN service, the bandwidth

usage = Traffic / (PIR x 1000000) x 100%. The unit of PIR is M,
which needs to be converted to byte.
If the query object is the section or port, the bandwidth usage =

Traffic / (Port bandwidth x 1000000) x 100%. The GE port bandwidth
is 1,000M and the XGE port bandwidth is 10,000M.
9-40
Version: A
Figure 9-22
3.
Viewing the Port Traffic
(Optional) Enable the second-level sending / receiving traffic collection.

1)
Right-click in the tabs and select to enable collection of the second-level

Tx / Rx traffic from the shortcut menu to open the Performance Collection
Settings dialog box.
Figure 9-23
Version: A
The Performance Collection Settings Dialog Box
9-41
2)
Set the start time, end time and time interval (1 to 10 seconds are
supported by the card at present) of the collection and set whether to
enable the collection.
3)
Click OK. An alert box appears prompting the settings are saved
successfully. Then click OK.
4.
(Optional) Right-click in the tabs and select the corresponding shortcut menus
to query the second-level Tx / Rx traffic of different monitored object.
Select Query Performance to set the start time and time range, and click
Query HistoryData to view the collected second-level history performance
traffic data.
Deselect Query Performance to view the second-level real-time traffic

data of the corresponding line.
Click Output Report to generate a statistical report for the traffic data and
save it to the specified directory.
9-42
Version: A
9.10.3
Monitoring the Second-level Traffic

The OTNM2000 supports monitoring the second-level performance of the NE at
various layers, including querying the performance values of the port, VP layer
(LSP) and VC layer (PW).
Prerequisite
u
The EMS_PmDataGather service has been started.
1.
Set the second-level real-time performance collection task.
Procedure
1)
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolPerformance

ManagementCard Performance Collection Settings.
2)
3)
Select the corresponding card in the lower part of the Operational Tree
pane according to the prompt information and click
to open the Card
Performance Collection Settings tab. The Card Performance

Collection Settings tab lists the real-time performance and line No.
information of the selected card(s).
4)
In the Card Performance Collection Settings tab, set the start / end time
and duration of the card real-time performance collection. In the real-time
performance list that the card supports, select the Switch of the desired
performance.
Version: A
9-43
5)
Right-click anywhere in the Card Performance Collection Settings tab

and select Save Condition Settings from the shortcut menu.
6)
2.
View the second-level real-time performance collection data.

1)
In the Operational Tree pane, select Management ToolPerformance

ManagementView Card Performance Collection to open the View
Card Performance Collection tab.
2)
Right-click the corresponding line and select View Chart of Collected

Performance from the shortcut menu.
3)
9-44
View the collected data of the selected line in the displayed window.
Version: A
Select View History Collection Data to set the start time and time
range, and click View History Statistical Data to view the collected
second-level history performance traffic data.
Deselect View History Collection Data to view the second-level realtime traffic data of the corresponding line.
Click Generate Statistical Report to generate a statistical report for

the traffic data and save it to the specified directory.
9.10.4
Monitoring the Port Real-time Traffic

The following introduces how to monitor the real-time traffic of the port.
Procedure
1.
Click the desired card in the shelf view and select Card Description in the
Rack View pane on the right. Then right-click the port in the Port List and
select the corresponding shortcut menu to query the current sent / received
traffic of the port. The following introduces how to query the current Tx traffic of
a port.
Version: A
9-45
Note:
The CiTRANS 640 supports the performance mapping function. If the
function is enabled, you can query the traffic information on the actual
card.
Related Operations
Enable the performance mapping function.
1.
Open the otnm.ini in the d:\otnm\ui\ini\ directory.
2.
Set PERFORMANCE_MAPPING_ENABLE to 1, and then save and close the

otnm.ini file.
3.
9-46
Restart the EMS_Dtserver service.
Version: A
9.10.5
Monitoring the Long-term Traffic

The OTNM2000 supports monitoring the long-term traffic and exporting long-term
traffic monitoring data as a report or image.
Procedure
1.
Set the long-term traffic monitoring task. Select PerformanceLong-term

traffic monitoring settings to open the Long-term traffic monitoring
settings tab, and then set the monitoring conditions, including monitored object
range, saving period of monitoring and saving path of the long-term traffic data.
Version: A
9-47
Note:
u
After the above settings are completed, the system will obtain the
performance history data of the previous day from the database at 4
o'clock every morning according to the specified monitoring
conditions. Then it computes the daily, weekly and monthly data and
then save the data into files.
The file saving path cannot be modified once set. As modifying the
file saving path will cause loss of previous data, the Saving path
drop-down list will be greyed out after it is set.
2.
View long-term traffic and export it into a report / image.

1)
Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the corresponding
card in the shelf view.
2)
Click the Card Description tab in the right pane.
3)
In the Card Description tab, right-click a port in the Port List textbox and
select View Long-term Receive Flow or View Long-term Send Flow.
4)
View the long-term traffic monitoring data in the displayed window. Select
the submenus under OperateGo to view the 15-minute traffic, daily
traffic, weekly traffic or monthly traffic respectively.
5)
Select the submenus under the Output menu to export the traffic data as a
report or an image.
9.10.6
Setting the Traffic Threshold

The CiTRANS 600 series devices support setting traffic thresholds and reporting
alarms triggered by threshold-crossing traffic.
Prerequisite
9-48
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Click the desired card in the shelf view and click Card Configuration in the
Task Panel pane.
2.
In the card configuration pane, select the corresponding tab to open the Traffic
Threshold Settings window according to Table 9-7.
Table 9-7
The Traffic Threshold Setting Access Method of the Card
Card
Access Method
XSJ2
Line-Phy-Other-Config
GSJ2
LINE-Physical-Interface-Config
XCUJ2
GE-Port-Config
MPTN1
WAN-Config, LAN-Port-Config
XCUM2, XCUM1, XCUK1 and XCUK2
SYS-Interface-Senior-Config
3.
Set the traffic threshold as needed, as shown in the following figure:

The unit of traffic threshold is Percent. If the traffic threshold is set to 1, the
XSJ2 card is the 10GE card and 1% indicates 100M. For the MPTN1 card, the
WAN interface is 1000M and 1% indicates 10M, while the LAN interface is
100M and 1% indicates 1M.
Figure 9-24
4.
Setting the Traffic Threshold
In the card configuration pane, select the Global-Config tab to set the "FlowExceed-Alarm-Delay-Time", as shown in the following figure.
Version: A
9-49
When "Flow-Exceed-Alarm-Delay-Time" is set to 0, the threshold-crossing

alarm will be reported right after its occurrence; when the parameter is set to 10,
the threshold-crossing alarm will be reported 10 seconds after its occurrence.
Figure 9-25
5.
Setting the Delayed Time to Report the Threshold-crossing Alarm
Click Write to Device and click OK in the displayed Command Warning alert
box.When the settings are completed, the device will report the thresholdcrossing alarm once the traffic of the port exceeds the specified threshold, as
Figure 9-26
9-50
Viewing Threshold-crossing Alarms
Version: A
10
Log Management
The log records the operation information and important events in the OTNM2000.
Users can query and output log information via the log management function.
Log Management Policy

Viewing Command Logs
Viewing User Logs
Viewing Business Logs
Viewing EMU Logs
Uploading NE Device Logs
Managing the Command Log Filter
Saving Command Logs
Version: A
10-1
10.1
Log Management Policy

The security management of logs includes command log management, user log
management, service log management, EMU log management, command log filter
and command log save management.
Command Logs
The command logs records the server operations performed in the OTNM2000
client and the operations that may influence the OTNM2000 security, such as
creating NEs and confirming alarms. By viewing the OTNM2000 operation logs, you
can accurately understand the operations performed in the OTNM2000 client,
convenient for you to trace and check the user operations. This provides support to
eliminating misoperations.
User Logs
The user logs record the operations performed in the OTNM2000 that influence the
OTNM2000 security, such as login, exit and unlocking. By viewing the OTNM2000
security logs, you can precisely understand the operations performed in the
OTNM2000 client that influence the OTNM2000 security. Querying user logs
regularly effectively ensures the security of the OTNM2000.
Business Logs
The business logs record the service-related operations performed in the
OTNM2000, such as querying service data and creating circuits. By viewing the
OTNM2000 business logs, you can accurately understand the service-related
operations performed in the OTNM2000 client, convenient for you to trace and
check the user operations. This provides support to eliminating misoperations.
EMU Logs
The EMU logs record the delivering object, time, command name and other
information of the EMU commands, which facilitate the tracing, checking and fault
isolating of the user operations. Only a part of the OTN equipment supports the
function of viewing EMU log.
10-2
Version: A
10 Log Management
Command Log Filter

The filtered command logs will not be saved into the database.
Command Log Saving

When the command logs saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it will
influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The command log saving
function can be used to remove the command logs from the database to a specified
file, which improves the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000
supports triggering the alarm saving function by the number of records or saving
time.
u
Saving triggered by number of records: You can set the command log threshold
and the OTNM2000 will regularly check the command logs. When the
command log data reach the preset capacity, the OTNM2000 will save the data
to a designated file in the specified time.
Saving triggered by saving time: You can set the saving period (days) of
command logs. When the command log data saved in the database reach the
preset the time period, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated file in
the specified time.
10.2

The command logs record the user operations, facilitating tracing, checking and
fault isolating of the user operations.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityView Command Log in the main menu or select

Management ToolSystem ManagementLog ViewView Command
Log in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower
part of the Operational Tree pane and click
to open the View Command
Log tab.
Version: A
10-3
Figure 10-1
2.
(Optional) Set the query conditions to find out the command log which accords
with the set conditions.
1)
Right-click the log displaying area in the View Command Log tab and
select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Query
Condition dialog box.
2)
Set the new query conditions as needed, and click OK.
Other Operations
u
Delete command logs.

Right-click the log to be deleted and select Delete from the shortcut menu to
delete the selected log.
Note:
Only the users having the Delete Logs authority can delete command
logs and the operation of deleting logs will be recorded in the command
log.
10-4
Version: A
10 Log Management
Output the command log information.
select Output Report from the shortcut menu to display the log information
in the current page in the form of report. You can set the format of the page
and output the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XSL file.
select Print All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print
dialog box and click OK to print the all command log information.
Right-click the command log to be printed and select Print the Selected
from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and
click OK to print the selected command log information.
Refresh the command logs.

Right-click the log displaying area in the View Command Log tab and select
Refresh from the shortcut menu to refresh the command logs.
10.3
Viewing User Logs

The user logs enables you to understand the security operation information of the
OTNM2000. Querying user logs regularly effectively guarantees the security of the
OTNM2000.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityView User Log in the main menu or select Management

ToolSystem ManagementLog ViewView User Log in the Operational
Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational
Tree pane and click
Version: A
to open the View User Log tab.
10-5
Figure 10-2
2.
Viewing User Logs
(Optional) Set the query conditions to find out the user log which accords with
the set conditions.
1)
Right-click the log displaying area in the View User Log tab and select
Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Query Condition
dialog box.
2)
Other Operations
u
Delete user logs.

Right-click the log to be deleted and select Delete from the shortcut menu to
delete the selected log.
Note:
Only the users having the Delete Logs authority can delete user logs and
the operation of deleting logs will be recorded in the command log.
10-6
Version: A
10 Log Management
Output the user log information.
Output Report from the shortcut menu to display the log information in the
current page in the form of report. You can set the format of the page and
output the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XSL file.
Print All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog
box and click OK to print the all user logs.
Right-click the user log to be printed and select Print the Selected from
the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK
to print the selected user log.
Refresh user logs.

Refresh from the shortcut menu to refresh the user logs.
10.4

By viewing the OTNM2000 business logs, you can accurately understand the
service-related operations performed in the OTNM2000 client, convenient for you to
trace and check the user operations. This provides support to eliminating
misoperations.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityView Business Log in the main menu to open the View
Business Log tab.
2.
Version: A
View the service logs in the View Business Log tab.
10-7
Figure 10-3
10.5
Viewing EMU Logs

The EMU logs record the delivering object, time, command name and other
information of the EMU commands, which facilitate the tracing, checking and fault
isolating of the user operations.
Only a part of the OTN equipment supports the function of viewing EMU log.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityView EMU Log in the main menu or select Management

ToolSystem ManagementLog ViewView EMU Log in the Operational
Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational
Tree pane and click
2.
to open the View EMU Log tab.
(Optional) Set the query conditions to find out the EMU command log which
accords with the set conditions.
1)
Right-click the log displaying area in the View EMU Log tab and select
Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Query Condition
dialog box.
10-8
Version: A
10 Log Management
2)
Other Operations
u
Output the EMU command log information.
Output Report from the shortcut menu to display the log information in the
current page in the form of report. You can set the format of the page and
output the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XSL file.
Print All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog
box and click OK to print all EMU command logs.
Right-click the EMU log to be printed and select Print the Selected from
the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK
to print the selected EMU command log.
Refresh the EMU command logs.

Refresh from the shortcut menu to refresh the EMU logs.
10.6

Users can know about the equipment current operating status via viewing report
events.
Procedure
1.
Select SecurityView Report Event in the main menu to open the Report
Event tab and view the events related to the ASON equipment.
Version: A
10-9
2.
(Optional) Right-click any area in the Report Event tab and select Query
Condition from the shortcut menu to set the reporting time range of the events
and click Query to display the reported events in the specified time range.
Note:
You can select SystemNetwork Status Monitor in the main menu and
click Event in the Network Status Monitor tab to view the information of
related events.
10.7
Uploading NE Device Logs

You can view the NE device logs to isolate the device failures.
Only the IPRAN NE supports uploading NE device logs.
Procedure
1.
Right-click the corresponding NE and select ConfigNE Device Log to

upload the NE device logs.
10.8
Managing the Command Log Filter

Managing the command log filter includes setting the command log filter and
viewing the command log filter.
10.8.1
Setting the Command Log Filter

You can filter the alarms no longer needed. The filtered command logs will not be
saved into the database.
Procedure
1.

10-10
Version: A
10 Log Management
2.
Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select Set the
Command Log Filter to open the Command Log Filter of the Filter Settings
Figure 10-4
The Filter Settings Window - Command Logs
3.
Select the command types to be filtered in the Command Log Filter tab.
4.
Select ActionSave the current filter settings click
on the toolbar and click
OK in the displayed alert box.
Other Operations
u
tab.
the current tab.
Version: A
10-11
10.8.2
Viewing the Command Log Filter

You can view the command types already set in the command log filter to avoid the
influence caused by misconfiguration on the equipment security monitoring.
Procedure
1.

2.
Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select View
Command Log Filter. In the Command Log Filter window, view the command
log filter information.
Other Operations
Right-click anywhere in the Command Log Filter tab to perform the following
operations:
u


tab of the Filter Setting window and reset the performance history filter rule.
logs.
10-12

Version: A
10 Log Management
10.9
Saving Command Logs

When the command logs meet the configured memory transfer conditions, the
system will delete the data from the database and save it to the hard disk as files, so
as to improve the operation efficiency of the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1.
2.
Note:
3.
Table 10-1
Description of the Parameters in the Save Data Tab - Command Logs
Configuration Item
Start Time to
Save
End Time to
Save
Save
Path to Save
Settings
Description
the morning.
morning.
u
Save File
type
Sub-item of
save
Version: A
Type of Save
It is Command Log by default, which cannot be edited.

10-13
Table 10-1
Description of the Parameters in the Save Data Tab - Command Logs (Continued)
Configuration Item
Save
Threshold
Current
Capacity
Description
If the command log quantity in the database reaches this
number, the data will be transferred within the configured time.
(Unit: entry. Users can set any integer number above 0.)
Displays the number of alarm history entries in the database.
Number of
Displays the number of command logs that will be deleted from
Entries to
the database and saved to a hard disk when the save condition
Save
is met.
Single File
Capacity

Sets the maximum number of command log files to be
Number of
transferred and stored. When the number of files crosses this
Save Files
number, the earliest file of this type will be overwritten

automatically.
Time limit of
Transfer
(days)
Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of command
logs. When the duration of the command logs saved in the
database exceeds the value set here, the data will be saved to
another location in the specified period of time.
Caution:
4.
Save Data tab.
5.
10-14
Version: A
11
Statistical Management
The OTNM2000 provides the statistical management and supports the setting of
task statistics of the equipment status, the bandwidth utilization ratio and traffic.
Access Method of the Menu
Service Data Query Report

Stock Statistics
Alarm Statistics
Version: A
11-1
PM Statistics
Managing VOA Status Statistics
IP Statistics
Viewing the Opposite End Port Information
Viewing Software Version
Viewing IP Configuration
11-2
Version: A
11 Statistical Management
11.1
Service Data Query Report

The Statistics menu provides the Service Data Query Report function, which
enables you to query various data statistics related to configured services and
export the statistical information as a report in the specified format.
11.1.1
Gathering Statistics of Link Resource Usage

The Link Resource Usage window includes the Timeslot Usage, Bandwidth
Usage and Wavelength Usage.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportLink Resource Usage in the

main menu, as shown in the following figure:
2.
Select the desired link in the left pane of the Link Resource Usage window.
If you select All Links, the system will query the resources of all links.
Click
of Start NE to select the start NE. The link resource list displays
the links related to the start NE, as shown in the following figure:
Version: A
11-3
3.
In the link resource list, select the desired link and click
, as shown in
the following figure:
11-4
Version: A
4.
Click the Export Report button, as shown in the following figure:
5.
Click the
drop-down list of Transfer Type and select the file type.
Note:
Click Preview to view the file pattern of the selected transfer type.
6.
11.1.2
Enter File Name and click Save.
Gathering Statistics of Circuits on the Link

You can gather statistics of the circuit information on the selected link, including
Link Name, Cross-connect Resource, Path Code, Path Name, Path Direction,
Network Type, Service Layer, Client Name and Route Info.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportCircuit Statistics on Link in

the main menu, as shown in the following figure:
2.
Select the desired link in the left pane of the Circuit Statistics on Link window.
If you select All Links, the system will query the resources of all links.
Click
of Start NE to select the start NE. The link resource list displays
the links related to the start NE, as shown in the following figure:
Version: A
11-5
3.
In the link resource list, select the desired link and click
, as shown in
the following figure:
4.
11-6
Version: A
5.
Click the
Note:
6.
11.1.3
Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Usage of the

NE
You can gather statistics of the tributary port usage of the NE, including NE, Slot,
Port, Port Type, Timeslot Usage and Bandwidth Usage.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportNE-Tributary-Port Usage in

2.
Version: A
Select the desired NE and click
, as shown in the following figure:
11-7
Note:
In case there are massive data, click Previous Page or Next Page to
view all data.
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
11.1.4
Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Circuit of the

NE
You can gather statistics of basic information and related circuit information of the
NE tributary port.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportTributary-Port Circuit

Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:
11-8
Version: A
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
Version: A
11-9
11.1.5
Gathering Statistics of Circuits Between NEs

You can gather statistics of circuit information between the source NE and the sink
NE, including the SDH Circuit Type, PTN Circuit Type and OTN Circuit Type.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportPaths Between NEs in the

2.
11-10
Version: A
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
11.1.6
Gathering Statistics of NE Cross-connect Capacity

The following introduces how to gather statistics of the cross-connect capability of
the online NE.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportNE Cross-connect

Capacity in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:
2.
Version: A
11-11
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
11.1.7
Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Usage

You can gather statistics of the NE port usage, including the Port Type, Total Ports,
Idle Ports and Port Usage.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportNE Port Usage Statistics in

11-12
Version: A
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
Version: A
11-13
11.1.8
Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Protection LSP

The following introduces how to query the quantity of the NE port protection LSP.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportNE Port Protection LSP in

11-14
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Version: A
Note:
5.
11.1.9
Gathering Statistics of the NE VPWS

The following introduces how to query the quantity of the NE VPWS.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportNE VPWS Statistics in the

2.
Version: A
11-15
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
11.1.10
Gathering Statistics of the NE VPLS

The following introduces how to query the quantity of the NE VPLS.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportNE VPLS Statistics in the

11-16
Version: A
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
Version: A
11-17
11.1.11
Gathering Statistics of the Port Service Traffic

The following introduces how to gather statistics of the service traffic of the port.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportPort Flow Statistics in the

2.
Select the desired NE port in the left pane of the Port Flow Statistics tab.
If you select All NE Ports, the system will gather statistics of the traffic of
all NE ports.
Click the NE and Port drop-down lists to select the desired NE and port, as
shown in the following figure:
11-18
Version: A
3.
Version: A
Click
11-19
4.
5.
Click the
Note:
6.
11.1.12
Gathering Statistics of the PTN Services /Labels

The following introduces how to gather statistics of the ingress or egress PTN
services / labels.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportPTN Service/Label

Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:
11-20
Version: A
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
Version: A
11-21
11.1.13
Querying Services at L2 / L3 Bridge Point

The following introduces how to query the services at L2 / L3 bridge point.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportL2/L3 bridge access point

in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:
2.
For procedures of querying services and exporting reports, see Step 2 to 5 in

Gathering Statistics of the PTN Services /Labels.
11.1.14
Querying PTN NE LSR ID Addresses

The following introduces how to query the PTN NE LSR ID addresses.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportQuery PTN NE LSR ID in

11-22
Version: A
2.
Select the desired PTN NE and click
, as shown in the following
figure:
3.
Version: A
Modify the IP Address of the NE.

1)
Double-click the IP Address entry of the NE.
2)
Re-enter the IP address.
11-23
3)
Click Duplicate Detection to detect whether conflicting LSR ID exists, as

4)
11-24
Click Modify, as shown in the following figure:
Version: A
Caution:
When the IP address conflicts after being modified, click Duplicate
Detection. The NEs with conflicting LSR IDs will be highlighted in green.
In this situation, the modification operation cannot be performed, as
4.
5.
Click the
Note:
6.
11.1.15
Querying the Used Labels

This function is used to gather statistics of labels used by the configured circuits.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportUsed Label Information in

the main menu, as shown in the figure below:
Version: A
11-25
2.
Export the Label Continuous Interval Report.

1)
In the Used Label Information tab, click the Label Continuous Interval
Report button, as shown in the figure below:
2)
Click the
Note:
3)
3.
Adjust the label.

1)
In the Used Label Information tab, click the Adjust Label button, as
shown in the figure below:
11-26
Version: A
2)
In the Adjust Label dialog box, click the radio button
to select the Path
Type.
3)
Enter the To be Adjusted Label according to the exported Label

Continuous Interval Report information.
4.
4)
Enter the Adjusted Label Start according to the requirement planning.
5)
Click the Adjusted Label and Report Export button.
Export the Used Label Information Report.

1)
In the Used Label Information tab, click the Export Report button.
2)
Click the
Note:
3)
11.1.16
Querying L2VPN Reports

You can query the L2VPN data information, including Path Name, Path Basic
Attributes, Circuit Flow Properties and Circuit Tunnel/PW Properties.
Version: A
11-27
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportL2VPN in the main menu, as

2.
In the L2VPN filter dialog box, enter the filter information according to your
needs and click Filter, as shown in the following figure:
11-28
Version: A
3.
In L2VPN Report tab, click
4.
Click the Export Report button.
5.
Click the
to filter the L2VPN entries again.
Note:
6.
11.1.17
Gathering Statistics of the OAM&BFD Enabling

Reports
The following introduces how to gather statistics of the OAM&BFD enabling
information of the protected tunnel.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportOAM&BFD Enable Report

Version: A
11-29
2.
3.
Click the
Note:
4.
11.1.18
Gathering Statistics of the OTN Station Capacity

The following introduces how to gather statistics of the OTN station capacity.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportOTN Station Capacity in the

11-30
Version: A
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Note:
5.
Version: A
11-31
11.1.19
Gathering Statistics of OTN Wavelength Resources

The following introduces how to gather statistics of OTN wavelength resources.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportOTN Wavelength Resource

11-32
2.
3.
4.
Click the
Version: A
Note:
5.
11.1.20
Querying the Protection Information

You can query the details of protection circuits.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsService Data Query ReportProtection Information in

2.
3.
Click the
Note:
4.
Version: A
11-33
11.2
Stock Statistics
You can gather statistics of data in use at a specified time.
11.2.1
Gathering Statistics of NEs

You can gather statistics of basic information of all NEs in the OTNM2000 system,
including NE Name, NE Type, EMU Card Type, NE No., Switch, NEIP, etc.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsNE Statistic in the main menu to open the NE Statistic tab,
which displays the data of all NEs, as shown in the following figure:
2.
Click Filter and enter the keyword in the Text Filter text box. The system
automatically lists the NEs related to the keyword, as shown in the following
figure:
11-34
Version: A
3.
Click Export and enter the output information in the Option dialog box, as
4.
Click OK to export the report.
5.
In the NE Statistics tab, select any NE entry and click Locate Shelf. The NE
Information tab appears, locating the subrack of the selected NE.
6.
In the NE Statistics tab, select any NE entry and click Locate Topo. The Main
Topology tab appears, locating the selected NE.
11.2.2
Gathering Statistics of Cards

You can gather statistics of basic information of all cards in the system, including
Card Name, Card Type, Card Address, Rack Name, Shelf Name, etc.
Version: A
11-35
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsBoard Statistic in the main menu to open the Board

Statistic tab, which lists the card information of all cards, as shown in the
following figure:
2.
See Gathering Statistics of NEs to perform Steps 2 to 6 to exporting the

statistical report.
11.2.3
Gathering Statistics of Slots

You can gather statistics of slot information of all NEs in the system, including
Object Name, Slot Total Counts and Idle Slot Counts.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsSlot Used Statistic in the main menu to open the Slot
Used Statistic tab, which lists the slot information of all NEs, as shown in the
following figure:
11-36
Version: A
2.

statistical report.
11.2.4
Gathering Statistics of Serial Numbers

The SN Statistics allows you to only export the device SNs read by the system as
reports, but also perform the Expand/Collapse OP, Sync, Download, Read, Write
and Import operations.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsSN Statistics in the main menu to open the SN Statistics

tab, which lists the SNs of all the devices. as shown in the figure below:
Version: A
11-37
2.

statistical report.
Extended Functions
The extended functions in the SN Statistics tab are described in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1
Introduction to Extended Functions
Button
Expand / Collapse OP
Expand or collapse the module SN in the

statistics list.
Sync
Read SN from the device.
Download
Write the SN into the device.
Read
Read data from the database.
Write
Write data into the database.
Import
11.2.5
Function
Import the SN report file exported previously

into the OTNM2000.
Gathering Statistics of NE Fiber Connections

The statistics of NE fiber connections includes Source/Destination NE, Source/
Destination Port and Source/Destination Port Mark.
11-38
Version: A
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsNE Link Info Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the
following figure:
2.
Select the desired NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click
Version: A
11-39
3.
In the NE Link Information List tab, click the Export to CSV File button.
4.
Select the save path and enter the file type in the displayed Save as dialog box,
and then click Save.
11.3
Alarm Statistics
The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of device-related alarms and
outputting reports.
11.3.1
Alarm Filter Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of lines whose alarms are filtered and
outputting the CSV reports.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsAlarm Filter Statistics in the main menu or select

Management ToolStatisticsAlarm StatisticsAlarm Filter Statistics in
the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm Filter Statistics tab.
2.
Select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and
click Add or right-click anywhere in the Alarm Filter Statistics tab and select
Figure 11-1.
11-40
Version: A
Figure 11-1
3.
The Add Dialog Box - Alarm Filter Statistics
See Table 11-2 to set the statistical task parameters.
Table 11-2
Description of Alarm Filter Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Task Name
Task Enable
Sets the name of the statistics task.

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is
by default.
Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and
Timing Run is by default.
u
Basic setting
The system automatically executes the

statistics task at the designated time when the
Task Type
Timing Run is selected.

u
The system executes the statistics task in the

Running Time when the Manual Run is
selected.
File Output
Version: A
Sets the output format of the file and CSV is by

default.
11-41
Table 11-2
Description of Alarm Filter Statistics Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
Description
u
If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the

Begin Time and the End Time are used to set
the time range of the timing task and show the
statistics time range of the alarm filter
information.
Task Time Setting
If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the

Begin Time and the End Time should not be
later than the current time and are used to set
the statistics time range of the alarm filter
information.
Running Time is the time for executing the Timing

Run task and Manual Run task.
Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is
selected for the task type.
Sets the period of executing the task and there are
two types including Day and Week.
Task Period
Sets the time interval in the Interval (Day) text

box when the Day is selected for the Task
Period.
Enters the expected value in the Week text box

according to the format of the informative
message when the Week is selected.
Sets the desired alarm filter type, including Line No

Filter Type Setting
with all the alarms filter and Line No with part of

alarms filter.
4.
Click OK and view the statistical task in the Alarm Filter Statistics tab.
5.
(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Modify or rightclick the desired task and select Modify from the shortcut menu. See
Table 11-2 to modify the parameters and click OKTable 11-2.
6.
(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Delete or rightclick the desired task and select Delete from the shortcut menu. See the alert
box to select the corresponding operation.
11-42
Version: A
Click Yes in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task and its
result report.
7.
Click No in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task only.
Click Cancel in the displayed alert box to cancel the operation.
Select the desired statistical task and click Task Result Files or right-click the
desired task and select Task Result Files from the shortcut menu to open the
File Result List dialog box.
8.
Select the file to be checked and click OK to save the selected file to the
designated directory.
11.3.2
Gathering Statistics of Alarm History

The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of alarm history and outputting the
CSV reports.
Prerequisite
The task of exporting all alarm history is set. See Exporting All Alarm History Data.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolStatisticsAlarm StatisticsAlarm History

Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Statistics
tab, as shown in the following figure:
Version: A
11-43
2.
Select any entry in the Alarm History Statistics tab and click Task Result
Files, as shown in the following figure:
3.
11-44
Select the file and click Save as.
Version: A
11.4
PM Statistics
The OTNM2000 supports the performance statistics of the equipment and outputs
the related report.
11.4.1
Managing Bandwidth Usage Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of device bandwidth usage and outputs the
report in the format of CSV or HTML.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsPM StatisticsBandwidth Utilization Statistics Management in

the main menu or select Management ToolStatisticsPM Statistics
Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Management in the Operational Tree tab in
the object tree pane to open the Bandwidth Utilization Statistics
Management tab.
2.
Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane. Click Add
or right-click any area of the Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Management
tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as
Version: A
11-45
Figure 11-2
3.
The Add Dialog Box - Bandwidth Utilization Ratio Statistics
See Table 11-3 to set the statistical task parameters in the Add dialog box.
Table 11-3
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the Bandwidth Usage
Statistics
Description
Parameter
Task Name
Task Enable

Basic
default.
setting
Task Type

The system executes the statistics task in the Running

Time when the Manual Run is selected.
11-46
Version: A
Table 11-3
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the Bandwidth Usage
Statistics (Continued)
Description
Parameter
File Output
Sets the file output formats and includes CSV and HTML; CSV is
by default.
u
If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time
and the End Time are used to set the time range of the
timing task and show the statistics time range of the
bandwidth utilization ratio.
Task Time
Setting
If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time
and the End Time should not be later than the current time
and are used to set the statistics time range of the history
data of the bandwidth utilization ratio.
Running Time is the time for executing the Timing Run task and
Manual Run task.
the task type.
Task Period

selected.
Only displays
the fiber-
When this item is selected, the Object Selection List dialog box
Object type
connected
only displays the fiber-connected port.
setting
port.
4.
Packet loss
Sets the type of the port whose packet loss rate is to be included
rate statistics
in the statistics.
Click Run and select the object in the Object Selection List dialog box, as
Version: A
11-47
5.
Click OK and check the statistics task in the Bandwidth Utilization Statistics
Management tab.
6.
Table 11-3 to modify the parameters and click Run.
7.
(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Delete or rightclick the desired task and select Delete from the shortcut menu. See the
following alert box to select the corresponding operation.
Click OK in the displayed Delete the selected task? alert box. The Delete
the result file simultaneously? alert box appears, as shown in the
following figure:
11-48
Version: A
Note:
u
Click Yes to delete both the task and result file.
Click No to delete the task only, with the result file reserved.
Click Cancel in the displayed Delete the selected task? alert box to
cancel the operation.
8.
9.
11.4.2
Managing 15-minute Traffic Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of equipment 15-minute traffic and outputs
the report in the format of CSV or HTML.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsPM Statistics15min Traffic Statistics Management in the main

menu or select Management ToolStatisticsPM Statistics15min Traffic
Statistics Management in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane to
open the 15min Traffic Statistics Management tab.
2.
Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane and click
Add or right-click any area of the 15min Traffic Statistics Management tab
and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown
in Figure 11-3.
Version: A
11-49
Figure 11-3
3.
The Add Dialog Box - 15min Traffic Statistics
Table 11-4
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 15min Traffic Statistics
Description
Parameter
Task Name
Task Enable

Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is
Basic
by default.
setting
Task Type
The system automatically executes the statistics task at

the designated time when the Timing Run is selected.

11-50
Version: A
Table 11-4
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 15min Traffic Statistics
(Continued)
Description
Parameter
File Output
Sets the file output formats and includes CSV and HTML;
CSV is by default.
u
If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin

Time and the End Time are used to set the time range
of the timing task and show the statistics time range of
the 15-minute traffic.
Task Time
Setting
If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin

Time and the End Time should not be later than the
current time and are used to set the statistics time range
of the history data of the 15-minute traffic.
Running Time is the time for executing the Timing Run task
and Manual Run task.
Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected
for the task type.
Task Period
Sets the time interval in the Interval (Day) text box when
the Day is selected for the Task Period.

according to the format of the informative message when
the Week is selected.
Only displays
Object type
setting
4.
the fiberconnected port.
When this item is selected, the Object Selection List dialog

box only displays the fiber-connected port.
Packet loss rate
Sets the type of the port whose packet loss rate is to be
statistics
included in the statistics.
Version: A
11-51
5.
Click OK and check the statistics task in the 15min Traffic Statistics
Management tab.
6.
7.
following figure:
11-52
Version: A
Note:
u
8.
9.
11.4.3
Managing 24-hour Traffic Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of equipment 24-hour traffic and outputs the
report in the format of CSV or HTML.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsPM Statistics24hour Traffic Statistics Management in the main

menu or select Management ToolStatisticsPM Statistics24hour
Traffic Statistics Management in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree
pane to open the 24hour Traffic Statistics Management tab.
2.
Add or right-click any area of the 24hour Traffic Statistics Management tab
and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown
in Figure 11-4.
Version: A
11-53
Figure 11-4
3.
The Add Dialog Box - 24hour Traffic Statistics
Table 11-5
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 24-hour Traffic Statistics
Description
Parameter
Task Name
Task Enable

Basic
default.
setting
Task Type

The system executes the statistics task in the Running Time

when the Manual Run is selected.
11-54
Version: A
Table 11-5
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 24-hour Traffic Statistics
(Continued)
Description
Parameter
File Output
by default.
u
timing task and show the statistics time range of the 24-hour
traffic.
Task Time
Setting
data of the 24-hour traffic.
Manual Run task.
Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected for the
task type.
Task Period

selected.
Only displays
Object
type
setting
4.
the fiber-
When this item is selected, the Object Selection List dialog box
connected
only displays the fiber-connected port.
port.
Packet loss
Sets the type of the port whose packet loss rate is to be included
rate statistics
in the statistics.
Version: A
11-55
5.
Click OK and check the statistics task in the 24hour Traffic Statistics
Management tab.
6.
7.
following figure:
11-56
Version: A
Note:
u
8.
9.
11.4.4
Managing Device Environment Parameter Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of device environment parameters and
outputs the report in the format of CSV.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsDevice Environment Parameters Statistics in the main

menu or select Management ToolStatisticsPM StatisticsDevice
Environment Parameters Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open
the Device Environment Parameters Statistics tab.
2.
click Add or right-click anywhere in the Device Environment Parameters
Statistics tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog
Version: A
11-57
Figure 11-5
3.
The Add Dialog Box - Device Environment Parameter Statistics
Table 11-6
Description of Device Environment Parameters Statistics

Description
Parameter
Task Name
Basic setting
Task Enable
11-58

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by
default.
Version: A
Table 11-6
Description of Device Environment Parameters Statistics (Continued)

Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing
Run is by default.
u
The system automatically executes the statistics

task at the designated time when the Timing Run
Task Type
is selected.
u
The system executes the statistics task in the

Running Time when the Manual Run is
selected.
File Output
Sets the output format of the file to CSV.

u
If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the

Begin Time and the End Time are used to set
the time range of the timing task and show the
statistics time range of the device environment
parameters.
Task Time Setting
If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the

Begin Time and the End Time should not be
later than the current time and are used to set the
statistics time range of device environment
parameters.
Running Time is the time for executing the Timing

Run task and Manual Run task.
Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is
selected for the task type.
Sets the period of executing the task and there are two
types including Day and Week.
Task Period
Sets the time interval in the Interval (Day) text

box when the Day is selected for the Task Period.

according to the format of the informative
message when the Week is selected.
Device Environment Parameter

Settings
4.
Select the device environment parameters to be

included in the statistics, including TEMP, BOARD_
TEMP and POWER.
Click Run and view the statistical task in the Device Environment Parameters
Statistics tab.
5.
Version: A
11-59
6.
following figure:
Note:
u
7.
8.
11-60
Version: A
11.4.5
Managing Optical Power Performance Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of optical power performance and outputs
the report in the format of CSV.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsOption of Power Statistics in the main menu or select

Management ToolStatisticsPM StatisticsOption of Power Statistics
in the Operational Tree pane to open the Option of Power Statistics tab.
2.
Add or right-click any area of the Option of Power Statistics tab and select
Figure 11-6.
Figure 11-6
Version: A
The Add Dialog Box - Optical Performance Statistics

11-61
3.
Table 11-7
Description of Optical Power Performance Statistics

Description
Parameter
Task Name
Task Enable

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by
default.
Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is
by default.
Task Type
The system automatically executes the statistics task at

the designated time when the Timing Run is selected.

File Output
Sets the output format of the file and CSV is by default.

u
If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin

Time and the End Time are used to set the time range
of the timing task, which indicates the statistics time
range of the optical power performance.
Basic setting
Task Time
Setting
If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin

Time and the End Time should not be later than the
current time and are used to set the statistics time
range of the optical power performance.
Running Time is the time for executing the Timing Run task
and Manual Run task.
Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected
for the task type.
Sets the period of executing the task and there are two
types including Day and Week.
Task Period
Sets the time interval in the Interval (Day) text box

when the Day is selected for the Task Period.

according to the format of the informative message
when the Week is selected.
Setting the Optical Power
Select the desired optical power performance parameters,
Performance
including IOP and OOP.
4.
Click Run and select the object in the displayed Object Selection List dialog
box, as shown in the following figure:
11-62
Version: A
5.
Click OK and view the statistical task in the Option of Power Statistics tab.
6.
7.
following figure:
Version: A
11-63
Note:
u
8.
Select the corresponding statistics task and click Task Result Files to open the
9.
11.4.6
Gathering Statistics of NE CPU and Memory Usage

The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of NE CPU and memory usage as well
as exporting CSV reports.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsCPU MEM Statistics in the main menu or select

Management ToolStatisticsPM StatisticsCPU MEM Statistics in the
Operational Tree pane to open the CPU MEM Statistics tab.
2.
click Add or right-click anywhere in the CPU MEM Statistics tab and select
Figure 11-7.
11-64
Version: A
Figure 11-7
3.
The Add Dialog Box - NE CPU and Memory Usage Statistics
Table 11-8
Description of NE CUPU and Memory Usage Statistical Parameters.

Description
Parameter
Task Name
Task Enable

Basic
default.
setting
Task Type


Version: A
11-65
Table 11-8
Description of NE CUPU and Memory Usage Statistical Parameters. (Continued)

Description
Parameter
File Output
by default.
u
timing task and show the statistics time range of the
bandwidth utilization ratio.
Task Time
Setting
data of the bandwidth utilization ratio.
Manual Run task.
the task type.
Task Period

selected.
Statistics of
NE CPU
NE CUPU
and
and Memory
Memory
Usage
Select the statistical data type, including CPU and MEM.
Usage
4.
Click Run. View the statistical task set in the CPU MEM Statistics tab.
5.
6.
11-66
Version: A
following figure:
Note:
u
7.
8.
11.5
Managing VOA Status Statistics

The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of the VOA status of the WDM / OTN
equipment and outputs the report in the format of CSV.
Version: A
11-67
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsVOA Status Statistics Management in the main menu or

select Management ToolStatisticsDevice Status StatisticsVOA
Status Statistics Management in the Operational Tree pane to open the
VOA Status Statistics Management tab.
2.
Add or right-click any area of the VOA Status Statistics Management tab and
select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in
Figure 11-8.
Figure 11-8
3.
11-68
The Add Dialog Box - VOA Status Statistics
See Table 11-9 for setting related parameters of the statistics task.
Version: A
Table 11-9
Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the VOA Status Statistics
Description
Parameter
Task Name
Task Enable

default.
Task Type

The system executes the task immediately after setting the

task when the Manual Run is selected.
File Output
Sets the output format of the file and CSV is by default.

Sets the task time only when the Timing Run is selected for the
task type.
Basic
setting
Task Time
The Begin Time and the End Time are optional setting items
Setting
and used to set the time range of the scheduled task. The
Running Time is the compulsory item used for setting the time
for running the scheduled task.
the task type.
Task Period

selected.
Object type setting
4.
Sets the card type.
Click Run and check the statistical task in the VOA Status Statistics
Management.
5.
6.
Version: A
11-69
the result file simultaneously alert box appears. as shown in the figure
below:
Note:
u
7.
8.
11.6
IP Statistics
The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of the IP addresses of the devices in
the entire network, which is convenient for you to perform unified management of IP
addresses.
11-70
Version: A
11.6.1
Statistics of Management Interface IP Addresses

The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of the device management interface
IP addresses and exporting a CSV report.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsIP StatisticsManagePort IP Statistics in the main menu

or select Management ToolStatisticsIP StatisticsManagePort IP
Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the ManagePort IP Statistics
tab.
2.
Select the corresponding object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane
and click
to import the management interface IP data, as shown in the figure
below:
3.
In the Filter text box, enter the keyword and click Filter to filter the IP data
entries matching the keyword.
4.
Click Save As to save the statistical data to the specified directory.
5.
(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to NE Config. The NE Config
tab appears.
6.
(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Shelf. The corresponding
shelf view appears.
7.
(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Topo. The Main Topology
tab appears.
Version: A
11-71
11.6.2
Statistics of Logical Interface IP Addresses

The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of the device logical interface IP
addresses and exporting a CSV report.
Procedure
1.
Select StatisticsIP StatisticsLogicPort IP Statistics in the main menu or select

Management ToolStatisticsIP StatisticsLogicPort IP Statistics in the
Operational Tree pane to open the LogicPort IP Statistics tab.
2.
Select the corresponding object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane
and click
3.
to import the logical interface IP data, as shown in the figure below:
In the Filter text box, enter the keyword and click Filter to filter the IP data
entries matching the keyword.
4.
Click Save As to save the statistical data to the specified directory.
5.
(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to NE Config. The NE Config
tab appears.
6.
(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Shelf. The corresponding
shelf view appears.
7.
(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Topo. The Main Topology
tab appears.
11-72
Version: A
11.7

You can view the information of the opposite end port of the NE, including the local
port, the card that the local port belongs to, the opposite end port, and the card and
NE that the opposite end port belongs to.
Procedure
1.
Right-click an NE in the Logical Tree tab or logical view and select Show
Opposite End Port Information to open the Show Opposite End Port
Information dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-9. You can view the information
of the opposite end port.
Figure 11-9
11.8

By browsing the software version, you can obtain the related NE information, such
as the card type and software /hardware version number.
Procedure
1.
Select Management ToolCard ManagementSoftware Version View in

the Operational Tree pane.
2.
Select NE whose software version you want to view in the lower part of the
3.
View the software version and other related information of the selected NE in
the Software Version View tab that appears, as shown in Figure 11-10.
Version: A
11-73
Figure 11-10
4.
(Optional) Click Re-Query Failed Object to query the object whose query
status is Failure again.
5.
(Optional) Click Export to CSV File to save the software version information as
the *.Csv file in the designated directory.
11.9
Viewing IP Configuration
Check the IP addresses of the NEs.
Procedure
1.
In the Operational Tree, select Management ToolCard Management

Browse IP Configuration.
2.
Select the NE whose IP address is to be viewed in the pane under the

Operational Tree and click
11-74
Version: A
3.
View the IP address of the selected NE in the Browse IP Configuration tab

that appears, as shown in Figure 11-11.
Figure 11-11
Version: A
The Browse IP Configuration Tab
11-75
12
Data Management
Backing Up / Restoring the OTNM2000 Data
Managing Data Sources
Backing Up / Restoring Service Data
Version: A
12-1
12.1
Backing Up / Restoring the OTNM2000 Data

To ensure the security of the network data, the OTNM2000 provides the backup and
restoration function for the network data.
The backup and restoration functions provided by the OTNM2000 are described in
Table 12-1. You can select the backup and restoration functions according to the
actual situation.
Table 12-1
Description of the OTNM2000 Backup and Restoration
Backup / Restoration Mode
Description
The OTNM2000 supports manual or automatic backup of
the OTNM2000 configuring data. The configuration to be
Back up / restore the OTNM2000

configuration data
backed up includes the OTNM2000 configuring data and

service configuration data.
For manual backup procedures, see Backing Up the
OTNM2000 Configuration Data Manually. For automatic
backup procedures, see Backing Up DCG Files.
The OTNM2000 supports importing / exporting
configuration data through the network management tool.
See Network Management Tool.
Import / export configuration data
It supports setting the backup server. You can select

the local backup or the FTP backup and set the
through the network management
parameters related to the backup server, including
tool
backup folder on the local server and the IP address /

port of the FTP server.
u
You can also set a timer to export the OTNM2000

configuration automatically.
12-2
Version: A
12 Data Management
Table 12-1
Description of the OTNM2000 Backup and Restoration (Continued)
Backup / Restoration Mode
Description
When backing up the cross-connect data of service
management, the service management data will be saved
Back up / restore the cross-
as a SNC file.
connect data of service
For detailed procedures, see Backing Up the
management
Configuration to the File and Restoring the Configuration

from the File.
The OTNM2000 provides the import / export of dynamic
data, including the alarm history, performance history,
command logs, alarm reporting settings and performance
collection settings. This function implements the smooth
Back up / restore dynamic data
upgrading of the configuration data upon OTNM2000

version upgrading.
For detailed procedures, see Exporting the Dynamic Data
and Importing the Dynamic Data.
12.1.1
Backing Up the OTNM2000 Configuration Data

Manually
The following introduces how to back up the configuration data of the OTNM2000
manually through the Devcfg. In case of loss of the OTNM2000 data, you can use
the data backed up to restore the system data quickly.
When the configuration data is saved to the database by default, the OTNM2000
will automatically back up the original data in the database to the D:\OTNM\ui
\backup directory.
Procedure
1.
Double-click the
icon to open the Devcfg window.
2.
Select FileLogin or click
3.
In the displayed User Login dialog box, enter the username and password
on the toolbar.
(both are admin by default) and click Login.

Version: A
12-3
4.
Click
on the toolbar to read the information from the database to
the Devcfg configuration GUI.

5.
Select FileSave As to save the information in the database to the file,

convenient for invoking and querying later on.
Other Operations
Restore the OTNM2000 configuration data.
1.
In the Devcfg window, select FileOpen to select the OTNM2000

configuration file backed up previously and click Open.
2.
12.1.2
Click
to restore the configuration file backed up to the database.
Backing Up Configuration Data via the Network

Management Tool
The OTNM2000 supports backing up and restoring the configuring data through the
network management tool.
The OTNM2000 supports backing up and restoring the configuring data through the
u
Supports setting the backup server to select local backup or FTP backup.
Supports exporting the OTNM2000 configuration data manually or setting the

timer to automatically export the configuration data.
12-4
Version: A
12 Data Management
Prerequisite
The EMS_unmcmagent and EMS_unmcmservice services have been started up
at the server end.
Procedure
1.
Enter "http://IP:52302/nmtool" in the address bar of the browser (here, IP refers

to the IP address of the computer running the OTNM2000 server) to open the
login GUI as shown in the figure.
2.
Enter the username and password, and click Login to access the GUI of the
Note:
The system provides two users by default:
u
The username and password of the administrator are Admin.
The username and password of the ordinary query user are Query,
which only has the authority to view and export data.
Version: A
12-5
3.
On the GUI of the network management tool, click Import/Export to open the
import / export GUI.
4.
Set the timer.

You can set a timer to export the OTNM2000 configuration data automatically.
1)
Click set timer to set whether to enable the timer and set the backup
interval and backup time.
2)
After completing the settings, click OK and then click OK in the displayed
alert box.
5.
Set the backup server.

1)
Click set backup server to select the local backup or the FTP server and
set the parameters related to the backup server, including backup folder on
the local server and the IP address / port of the FTP server.
2)
After completing the settings, click OK and then click OK in the displayed
alert box.
6.
Export the configuring data manually.

1)
Click Export, enter the file description information in the file description
text box and click OK.
2)
When exporting is completed, click OK in the displayed alert box.
Other Operations
Import the configuring data manually.
12-6
Version: A
12 Data Management
1.
Click Process, select all OTNM2000 processes and click Stop.
2.
When all the processes are stopped, click Import/Export to select the file type
and the file to be imported. Then click OK.
3.
12.1.3
Backing Up the Configuration to the File

To prevent configuration loss caused by misoperation. you can generate the service
configuration as an SNC file and back it up to the specified directory.
Prerequisite
u
The configuration data to be backed up are correct.
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreBackup to File in the
Procedure
main menu.
2.
In the displayed Save As dialog box, enter the Filename, specify the saving
directory and then click Save.
12.1.4
Restoring the Configuration from the File

In case of service configuration loss caused by EMS failures or misoperation, you
can restore the data to the normal status via the configuration file backed up
previously.
Prerequisite
Version: A
The configuration data to be restored are correct.
The OTNM2000 is switched to the offline mode.
12-7
Procedure
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreRecovery from File in

the main menu.
2.
In the displayed Open dialog box,select the service configuration file and click
Open.
12.1.5
Exporting the Dynamic Data

The OTNM2000 supports exporting data history in the database through the
Dtbackup tool and saving them on a hard disk as a file.
Prerequisite
You have logged out of the OTNM2000.
Procedure
1.
Select StartProgramsOTNM2000Dtbackup to open the dialog box as

Figure 12-1
2.
Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool
Select the Data export radio option and click Browse to select the save
directory of the data history. The save directory is D:\Otnm2000DataBck by
default. It is not recommended to modify the save directory for convenient
search.
3.
12-8
Click the Table options button to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-2.
Version: A
12 Data Management
Figure 12-2
4.
Selecting Items to Be Exported
Click the >> button to move all the items from the left list to the right list. To
move a certain item from the left list to the right list, double-click the item, or
select the item and click >. The items available in the left list are described in
Table 12-2.
Table 12-2
Version: A
Description of the Items in the Left List
Name
Description
alarmhis
Alarm history.
pmhis15
15-minute performance history.
pmhis24
24-hour performance history.
commandlog
Command logs.
userlog
User logs.
nofaulttype
Alarm history filter settings.
nopmtype
Performance history filter settings.
nocommandlog
Command log filter settings.
filedatasource
Service data.
asonalarm
ASON alarms.
alarmdetailcond
Alarm reporting settings.
pmtask
Performance collection settings.
alarmnewgrade
Alarm level settings.

12-9
Table 12-2
Description of the Items in the Left List (Continued)
Name
Description
cmdauthorize
Command authorization settings.
t_dcndev
DCN network device.
t_dcntopolink
DCN topology fiber connection.
t_userinfo
User information.
The unended and unconfirmed current alarms and the
newalarm
confirmed but unended current alarms.
newalarmmonth
The ended but unconfirmed current alarms.
5.
Click OK to return to the Dynamic data import/export tool dialog box.
6.
Click Begin to start exporting the data history.
7.
When the export is completed, the alert box as shown in Figure 12-3 appears.
Click Finish and then Quit.
Figure 12-3
8.
Export Success Alert Box
(Optional) When exporting data in versions later than Version 05.28, the export
logs will be generated. Go to the log directory displayed on Figure 12-3 to view
the logs. If no error appears in the log, the data is exported successfully.
12.1.6
Importing the Dynamic Data

The OTNM2000 supports importing the data history backed up previously through
Dtbackup tool to implement smooth upgrading of configuration data upon the
OTNM2000 version upgrading.
12-10
Version: A
12 Data Management
Prerequisite
You have logged out of the OTNM2000.
Procedure
1.
Select StartProgramsOTNM2000Dtbackup to open the dialog box as

Figure 12-4
2.
Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool
Select the Data Import radio option. Click Browse to select the file folder
saving the data history backup and then click OK.
3.
Version: A
Click the Table options button to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-5.
12-11
Figure 12-5
4.
Selecting Items to be Restored
Click the >> button to move all the items from the left list to the right list. To
move a certain item from the left list to the right list, double-click the item, or
select the item and click>. The items available in the left list are described in
Table 12-2.
5.
Click OK to return to the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-4.
6.
Click Begin to import the data history to the OTNM2000 database.
7.
When the import is completed, the alert box as shown in Figure 12-6 appears.
Click Finish and then Quit.
12-12
Version: A
12 Data Management
Figure 12-6
8.
Import Success Alert Box
(Optional) Go to the log directory displayed on Figure 12-6 to view the logs. If
no error appears in the log, the data is imported successfully.
9.
Restart the related services of the OTNM2000 to validate the imported data
history.
1)
Open the D:\OTNM\ui\sbin\service directory and double-click

stop_ems_main_service to stop the OTNM2000 relevant services.
2)
When the services are stopped, double-click start_ems_main_service to

start the OTNM2000 relevant services again.
12.2
Managing Data Sources

This version places the submenus Import from File, Merge Config and Clear
Config Data under Datasource, used for configuring the data source (such as files).
12.2.1
Importing Configuration from the File

The multi-service management platform adopts the Import from File to import the
data source file.
Version: A
12-13
After the multi-service management platform of the OTNM2000 is introduced and
applied, the service configuration efficiency concerns users. The multi-service
management platform adopts the Import from File, effectively improving the
efficiency of configuring the circuit data.
Prerequisite
u
Make sure the imported configuration data file will not influence the normal
communication of the current network.
Procedure
1.
Select Business ManagementDatasourceImport from File in the main

menu.
2.
In the displayed Open dialog box, select the desired file and click the Open
button to import the file.
Note:
The type of the imported / exported circuit data file is *.dat by default.
12.2.2
Clearing the Configuration Data

This function is used to clear all service configuration data at the OTNM2000 side.
Prerequisite
12-14
The configuring data to be deleted has been backed up.
Version: A
12 Data Management
Warning:
The Clear Config Data operation is a high-risk operation. Please handle
with care.
Procedure
1.
Select Business ManagementDatasourceClear Config Data in the main

menu.
2.
In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes, as shown in the
figure below:
3.
figure below:
12.3
Backing Up / Restoring Service Data

The Backup/Restore submenu is moved from the Business Data menu (V2.0R5
(Build04.20.05.50)) to the Business Management menu and added with two
functions: Backup to File and Recovery from File.
Version: A
12-15
12.3.1
Synchronizing All Configuration Data

This function uses the multi-service background to perform inversion algorithm of
the device-to-NE configuration data, and meanwhile generates the subnet-side data
and save them into the database.
u
Scenarios 1: In case that the subnet circuit data is lost but the device circuit
data is normal, the multi-service background obtains the NE configuration by
performing inversion algorithm of device-side data . Then it performs service
data synchronization, generates the subnet-side circuit data and reports to the
multi-service GUI.
Scenario 2: In the early period of the project, the device ran as a dynamic
service model and did not involve the OTNM2000 for service configuration and
management. As it is required to implement unified management and
configuration in the later period of the project, you can use the "Synchronize All
Configuration Data" function to synchronize all service data configured through
the CLI to the OTNM2000.
Prerequisite
u
Make sure the Synchronize All Config Data operation will not cause
communication failure of the network.
Procedure
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreSynchronize All Config

Data.
2.
In the displayed Configuration Synchronize All Config Data tab, click Total
Search. The multi-service background obtains the result by performing
inversion algorithm of device data and writes the result to the NE configuration.
Besides, it summarizes the number of circuits of different types and presents
the result on the GUI, as shown in the figure below:
12-16
Version: A
12 Data Management
3.
Click Synchronize All to notify the multi-service background to generate the

circuit data and report the circuits to the GUI, which will save the reported data
to the database, as shown in the figure below:
12.3.2
Switching to the Offline Mode

Only after switching the offline mode can you perform the Recovery from File,
Download Data to the Client End and Uploaded Data to the Server operations
and reload the service data configured in offline mode.
Prerequisite
u
You have the Operator privileges or higher privileges.
Make sure the operation will not cause communication failure of the network.
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreSwitch to Offline Mode
Procedure
in the main menu.

2.
figure below:
Version: A
12-17
12.3.3
Backing Up the Configuration to the File

To prevent configuration loss caused by misoperation. you can generate the service
configuration as an SNC file and back it up to the specified directory.
Prerequisite
u
The configuration data to be backed up are correct.
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreBackup to File in the
Procedure
main menu.
2.
In the displayed Save As dialog box, enter the Filename, specify the saving
directory and then click Save.
12.3.4
Restoring the Configuration from the File

In case of service configuration loss caused by EMS failures or misoperation, you
can restore the data to the normal status via the configuration file backed up
previously.
Prerequisite
u
The configuration data to be restored are correct.
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreRecovery from File in
Procedure
the main menu.

2.
In the displayed Open dialog box,select the service configuration file and click
Open.
12-18
Version: A
12 Data Management
12.3.5
Downloading Data to the Client End

In offline mode, you can download the service configuration data on the server to
the local client end.
Prerequisite
u
The service configuration data to be downloaded from the server are correct.
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreDownloaded Data to the
Procedure
Client End in the main menu.

2.
In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to complete data
download, as shown in the figure below:
12.3.6
Uploading Data to the Server

In offline mode, you can upload local the service configuration to the server.
Prerequisite
u
The local service configuration data to be uploaded are correct.
1.
Select Business ManagementBackup/RestoreUploaded Data to the
Procedure
Server in the main menu.

Version: A
12-19
2.
In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to complete

service uploading, as shown in the figure below:
12-20
Version: A
Appendix A OTNM2000 Service List

The OTNM2000 relevant services are described in Table A-1.
Table A-1
Description of the OTNM2000 Services
Service
Description
EMS_cfgdatamgr
Configuration import / export service.

Data communication basic component, the message bus
EMS_DataBusServer
responsible for communication between components and

modules.
EMS_DispServer
EMS_Dtserver
processing results.
Data processing component, receiving and processing the
commands sent from other components.
EMS_Dumper
Data save service, managing the capacity of the database.
EMS_FileServer
FTP file transfer service
EMS_IceNode
ICE node management component.
EMS_IceRegister
ICE registry service.
EMS_Manager2
Device communication management service.
EMS_MSMPServer
Multi-service management service.
EMS_NeCfgService
NE configuration service.
EMS_OtnmApiServer
EMS_OtnmCfgService
EMS_QueryServer
Version: A
Data distribution component, distributing the data
API interface component, providing data interface based on

RPC.
Configuration management service.
Query service component, providing services for alarm,
performance and log query.
EMS_RsyncServer
File synchronization service.
EMS_unmcmagent
Service management client.
EMS_unmcmservice
Service management server end.
A-1
Appendix B Setting the Web

Browser
Procedure
1.
Set the default browser. If the default browser is Internet Explorer 8, skip this
step.
1)
Open the Internet Explorer 8 browser, select ToolsInternet Options in

the main menu to open the Internet Options dialog box.
2)
Click the Programs tab, select the Tell me if Internet Explorer is not the
default web browser. check box under Default web browser.
3)
Click OK and restart the Internet Explorer 8 browser. In the displayed alert
box, click Yes to complete the settings.
2.
Set the display mode of the browser tab.

1)

2)
Select the General tab, click Settings under Tabs to open the Tabbed
Browsing Settings dialog box.
Version: A
B-1
3)
Select the Enable Tabbed Browsing (requires restarting Internet

Explorer), that is, enable the multi-tab browsing mode.
4)
Select to open links in The current tab or window, indicating that the new
help tab will replace the original help tab.
B-2
Version: A
Appendix B Setting the Web Browser
5)
3.
Click OK. The settings take effect after the browser is restarted.
Allow to open the help document.

1)

2)
Select the Privacy tab and make sure the Turn on Pop-up Blocker option
is not selected.
Version: A
B-3
3)
4.
Click OK. The settings take effect after the browser is restarted.
(Optional) After the online help document is open, select ToolsCompatibility

View Settings in the browser main menu to make sure the document can be
normally and completely displayed.
B-4
Version: A
Appendix C Abbreviations
Version: A
BCT
Board Control Terminal
BML
Business Management Layer
BMS
Business Management System
CPU
Central Processing Unit
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DCN
Data Communication Network
DDN
Digital Data Network
EML
Element Management Layer
EMS
Element Management System
EMU
Element Management Unit
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GNE
Gate Network Element
GUI
Graphic User Interface
IP
Internet Protocol
LSP
Label Switched Path
NE
Network Element
NEL
Network Element Level
NML
Network Management Layer
NMS
Network Management System
OTN
Optical Transmission Network
PW
Pseudo Wire
QoS
Quality of Service
SML
Service Management Layer
SMS
Service Management System
SSM
Synchronization Status Message
TCP
Transfer Control Protocol
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UPS
Uninterrupted Power System
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
C-1
Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survery

Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company
To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.
Documentation Name
Code and Version
Usage of the product documentation:
1. How often do you use the documentation?
Frequently Rarely Never Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
in starting up a project
shooting
in installing the product
in daily maintenance
in trouble
Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
100% 80%
50% 0%
Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
Satisfied
Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?

Print edition
Electronic edition Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:

1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
Very
Somewhat
Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?

Good
Normal
Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?

Yes
No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
Yes
No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
Yes (Please give an example)
No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?
8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?
9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

Beautiful
Unbeautiful (your advice)
Practical
Unpractical (your advice)
10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

Beautiful
Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:
Satisfied (please specify)
Unsatisfied (please specify)
12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:
Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com

E-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-Fim OTNM2000

Element Management System

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

+6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)

+86 27 8717 8521

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved

Equipment maintenance staff

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

Data communication technology

systems, or cause traffic interruption

May cause severe bodily injuries.

Jumps to another step.

Connects multi-level menu options.

The service signal is bidirectional.

The service signal is unidirectional.

Operation Safety Rules

The network management computer should be placed away from

Do not perform service configuration or expansion during service

Preparatory Knowledge ...............................................................................1-1

Management System .....................................................................1-2

Management Model .........................................................1-2

Management Structure ....................................................1-3

Numbering Hierarchy .....................................................................1-5

Physical Part ...................................................................1-6

Logical Part .....................................................................1-6

OTNM2000 Basic Operations ......................................................................2-1

Logging into the OTNM2000 ............................................2-2

Logging Out of the OTNM2000.........................................2-4

GUI Introduction ............................................................................2-4

System GUI .....................................................................2-4

Commonly Used Shortcuts.............................................2-22

Display Pane .................................................................2-26

Status Bar .....................................................................2-27

Customizing the Table....................................................2-28

Viewing the Command Manager ..................................................2-31

Locking / Unlocking the Client End ...............................................2-32

Locking the Client End ...................................................2-32

Unlocking the Client End................................................2-33

Monitoring the Network Status .....................................................2-34

Viewing the Version Information ...................................................2-35

Current User Logout ....................................................................2-35

Security Management ..................................................................................3-1

Security Policy Management..........................................................3-5

Automatically Locking the Client End................................3-5

Setting the Automatic Exit ................................................3-6

Setting the User Login Detection ......................................3-8

Setting the Password Complexity Check ..........................3-9

Setting the Lockout Upon Incorrect Password Inputs ........3-9

Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division ................................3-10

Authorization Planning .................................................................3-11

Managing System Users ..............................................................3-13

Quick Copy of Table Contents ........................................2-30

Managing Object Groups ...............................................3-13

Managing Operation Groups ..........................................3-16

Managing User Groups ..................................................3-19

Managing Users ............................................................3-22

Authorization and Domain Division Example ..................3-33

Managing User Sessions .............................................................3-36

Monitoring User Sessions ..............................................3-36

Logging Out a User........................................................3-37